Dytran Reference Manual
Dytran Reference Manual
Dytran 2008 r1 ™
Reference Manual
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page ii Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Corporate
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
FAX: (714) 784-4056
Europe
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich
GERMANY
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6
Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
User Documentation: Copyright © 2008 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This document, and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of such license. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written authorization of
MSC.Software Corporation is strictly prohibited.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this document are for illustrative and educational purposes
only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. THIS DOCUMENT IS
PROVIDED ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS AND ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
MSC.Software logo, MSC, MSC., MD, Adams, Dytran, Marc, Mentat, and Patran are trademarks or registered trademarks of
MSC.Software Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. LS-DYNA is a trademark of Livermore Software Technology Corporation. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation),
as applicable.
DT*V2008R1*Z*Z*Z*DC-REF
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Contents
Dytran Reference Manual
Contents
1 Introduction
Overview 34
Similarity with MD Nastran 35
Input 35
Loading 37
Summary 41
Prestress Analysis 41
New Analyses 41
Restart Control 41
User Code 41
File Selection 41
FMS Descriptions 42
BULKOUT 43
Prestress Grid Point Output 43
EULINIT 44
Imports an Euler archive from a previous run 44
IMMFILE 46
Initial Metric Method File Section 46
NASTDISP 47
Prestress MD Nastran Displacement File 47
NASTINP 48
Prestress MD Nastran Solution File 48
NASTOUT 49
MD Nastran Input File for Prestress Analysis 49
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PRESTRESS 50
Prestress Analysis 50
RESTART 51
Restarts a Previous Run 51
RSTBEGIN 52
Restart Time Step 52
RSTFILE 53
Restart File Section 53
SAVE 54
Interval Between Saving an Output File 54
SOLINIT 55
Specify an Initial Solution File from Prestress Analysis 55
SOLUOUT 56
Specifies the Output Solution File from a Prestress Analysis 56
START 57
Primary Analysis 57
TYPE 58
Type of Output File 58
USERCODE 59
User Subroutine Selection 59
CEND 65
Terminates the Executive Control Section 65
MEMORY-SIZE 66
Definition of Memory Usage 66
TIME 67
Selects the Maximum CPU Time 67
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 5
CHECK 78
Data Check 78
CMARKOUT 79
Marker Data to be Output 79
CMARKS 80
CMARKS to be Output 80
COG 81
Center of Gravity Calculation 81
CONTOUT 82
Contact Surface Data to be Output 82
CONTS 83
Contact Surfaces to be Stored 83
CORDDEF 84
Coordinate System for Deformation Output 84
CPLSOUT 85
Coupling Surface Data to be Output 85
CPLSURFS 86
Coupling Surfaces to be Output 86
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CSECS 87
Cross Sections to be Output 87
CSOUT 88
Cross Section Data to be Output 88
EBDOUT 89
Eulerian Boundary Data to be Output 89
EBDS 90
Eulerian Boundaries to be Output 90
ELEMENTS 91
Elements to be Output 91
ELEXOUT 92
User-defined Element Output 92
ELOUT 93
Element Data to be Output 93
ENDSTEP 94
Final Time Step 94
ENDTIME 95
Analysis Termination Time 95
GBAGOUT 96
Gas Bag Data to be Output 96
GBAGS 97
Gas Bags to be Output 97
GPEXOUT 98
User-defined Grid Point Output 98
GPOUT 99
Grid Point Data to be Output 99
GRIDS 100
Grid Points to be Output 100
HIC 101
Head Injury Criteria Calculation 101
INCLUDE 103
Starts Reading of a New File 103
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 7
MATOUT 104
Material Data to be Output 104
MATS 105
Materials to be Output 105
PARAM 106
Parameter Specification 106
PLANES 107
Rigid Planes to be Output 107
PLNOUT 108
Rigid Plane Data to be Output 108
RBOUT 109
Rigid Body Data to be Output 109
RELOUT 110
Rigid Ellipsoid Data to be Output 110
RELS 111
Rigid Ellipsoids to be Output 111
RIGIDS 112
Rigid Bodies to be Output 112
SET 113
Set Definition 113
SETC 115
List of Names 115
SGAUGES 116
Surface Gauges to be Stored 116
SPC 117
Single Point Constraint Set Selection 117
STEPS 118
Time Steps at which Data is Written 118
SUBSOUT 119
Subsurface Data to be Output 119
SUBSURFS 120
Subsurfaces to be Stored 120
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SURFACES 121
Surfaces to be Stored 121
SURFOUT 122
Surface Data to be Output 122
TIC 123
Transient Initial Condition Selection 123
TIMES 124
Times at which Data is Written 124
TITLE 125
Output Title 125
TLOAD 126
Transient Load Selection 126
$ 153
Comment 153
ACTIVE 154
Activate Elements and Interaction 154
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 9
ALE 157
Arbitrary Lagrange Eulerian (ALE) Interface 157
ALEGRID 158
Eulerian Grid Point Motion Definition 158
ALEGRID1 161
Eulerian Grid Point Motion Definition 161
ATBACC 164
Acceleration Field Applied to ATB Segments 164
ATBJNT 165
Interface to ATB Joints 165
ATBSEG 168
Interface to ATB Segments 168
BIAS 172
Bias definition 172
BJOIN 174
Breakable Join 174
BODYFOR 180
Body Force Loading 180
BOX 182
Defines the Shape of a Box 182
BOX1 183
Defines the Shape of a General BOX 183
CBAR 184
Bar Element Connection 184
CBEAM 186
Beam-Element Connectivity 186
CDAMP1 188
Damper Connectivity 188
CDAMP2 190
Linear Damper 190
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CELAS1 192
Scalar-Spring Connection 192
CELAS2 194
Scalar-Spring Property and Connection 194
CFACE 196
Face of an Element 196
CFACE1 198
Face of an Element 198
CHEXA 199
Element with Eight Grid Points 199
CMARKB2 201
Two-noded Marker Connectivity Definition 201
CMARKN1 202
One-noded Marker Connectivity Definition 202
CONM2 203
Concentrated Grid Point Mass and/or Inertia 203
CONTACT 204
Contact Surface 204
CONTFORC 225
Contact Force Definition Using Force-Deflection Curves 225
CONTINI 227
Contact Initialization for In-Plane Folded Air Bags 227
CONTREL 229
Contact with Rigid Ellipsoids 229
CORD1C 230
Cylindrical Coordinate System Definition, Form 1 230
CORD1R 232
Rectangular Coordinate System Definition, Form 1 232
CORD1S 234
Spherical Coordinate System Definition, Form 1 234
CORD2C 236
Cylindrical Coordinate System Definition, Form 2 236
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 11
CORD2R 238
Rectangular Coordinate System Definition, Form 2 238
CORD2S 240
Spherical Coordinate System Definition, Form 2 240
CORD3R 242
Moving Rectangular Coordinate System Definition, Form 1 242
CORD4R 244
Moving Rectangular Coordinate System Definition, Form 2 244
CORDROT 246
Corotational-Frame Definition 246
COUHTR 248
Heat Transfer Model to be Used with COUPLE Entry 248
COUINFL 250
Inflator Model to be Used with COUPLE Entry 250
COUOPT 252
Coupling Options 252
COUP1FL 254
Coupling Surface Failure 254
COUP1INT 255
Coupling Surface Interaction 255
COUPLE 256
General Euler-Lagrange Coupling Surface 256
COUPLE1 261
Euler-Lagrange Coupling Surface 261
COUPOR 264
Coupling Porosity 264
CPENTA 268
Solid Element with Six Grid Points 268
CQUAD4 269
Quadrilateral Element Connection 269
CROD 271
Rod Element Connection 271
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CSEG 272
Segment of a Contact Surface or Coupling Surface 272
CSPR 273
Spring Connection 273
CTETRA 274
Solid Element with Four Grid Points 274
CTRIA3 275
Triangular Element Connection 275
CVISC 277
Damper Connection 277
CYLINDER 278
Defines the Shape of a Cylinder 278
DAREA 279
Concentrated Load or Enforced Motion 279
DETSPH 280
Spherical Detonation Wave 280
DMAT 281
General Constitutive Model 281
DMATEL 284
Isotropic Elastic Material Properties 284
DMATEP 286
Elastoplastic Material Properties 286
DMATOR 287
Orthotropic Elastic Material Properties 287
DYMAT14 290
Soil and Crushable Foam Material Properties 290
DYMAT24 293
Piecewise Linear Plasticity Material 293
DYMAT25 296
Cap Material Model 296
DYMAT26 298
Orthotropic Crushable Material Model 298
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 13
ENDDATA 302
Terminates the Input Data 302
EOSEX 303
User-defined Equation of State 303
EOSEX1 304
User-specified Equation of State 304
EOSGAM 306
Gamma Law Gas Equation of State 306
EOSIG 309
Ignition and Growth Equation of State 309
EOSJWL 316
JWL Explosive Equation of State 316
EOSMG 318
Mie-Gruneisen Equation of State 318
EOSPOL 320
Polynomial Equation of State 320
EOSTAIT 323
Tait Equation of State 323
FABRIC 325
Woven Fabric Material 325
FAILEST 329
Maximum Equivalent Stress and Minimum Time Step Failure Model 329
FAILEX 330
User Failure Subroutine 330
FAILEX1 331
Extended User Failure Subroutine 331
FAILEX2 332
User Failure Subroutine 332
FAILJC 333
Johnson-Cook Failure Model 333
FAILMES 335
Maximum Equivalent Stress Failure Model 335
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILMPS 336
Maximum Plastic Strain Failure Model 336
FAILPRS 337
Maximum Pressure Failure Model 337
FAILSDT 338
Maximum Plastic Strain and Minimum Time-Step Failure Model 338
FFCONTR 339
Closed Volume Intended for Fluid Filled Containers 339
FLOW 341
Flow Boundary Condition 341
FLOWDEF 344
Default Flow Boundary 344
346
FLOWDIR 347
Flow Boundary Condition for all Eulerian boundary faces in a specific
direction 347
FLOWEX 349
User-defined Flow Boundary 349
FLOWSQ 351
Flow Boundary Condition using a Square Definition 351
FLOWT 354
Time-dependent Flow Boundary 354
FLOWTSQ 357
Time dependent Flow Boundary 357
FOAM1 361
Foam Material Properties 361
FOAM2 363
Foam Material Properties 363
FORCE 366
Concentrated Load or Velocity 366
FORCE1 368
Follower Force, Form 1 368
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 15
FORCE2 369
Follower Force, Form 2 369
FORCE3 370
Grid Point Velocity Definition 370
FORCEEX 372
User-defined Enforced Motion at Grid Points 372
GBAG 374
Gas Bag Pressure Definition 374
GBAGC 383
Gas Bag Connection 383
GBAGCOU 387
General Coupling to Gas Bag Switch 387
GBAGHTR 388
Heat Transfer Model to be used With GBAG Entry 388
GBAGINFL 390
Inflator Model to be used with GBAG Entry 390
GBAGPOR 392
Gas Bag Porosity 392
GRAV 395
Gravity Field 395
GRDSET 396
Grid Point Default 396
GRID 397
Grid Point 397
GROFFS 398
Grid Point Offset 398
HGSUPPR 399
Hourglass Suppression Method 399
HTRCONV 402
Air Bag Convection 402
HTRRAD 403
Air Bag Radiation 403
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HYDSTAT 404
Hydrostatic Preset of Density in Euler Elements 404
IGNORE 406
Ignore a Set of Euler Elements 406
INCLUDE 407
Starts Reading a New Input File 407
INFLATR 408
Air Bag Inflator Model 408
INFLATR1 410
Air Bag Inflator Model 410
INFLCG 412
Airbag Cold Gas Inflator Model 412
INFLFRAC 414
Hybrid Inflator Gas Fraction Definition 414
INFLGAS 416
Inflator Gas Definition 416
INFLHYB 418
Hybrid Inflator Model 418
INFLHYB1 420
Hybrid Inflator Model 420
INFLTANK 421
Air Bag Tanktest Inflator Model 421
INITGAS 424
Gas Bag or Coupling Surface Initial Gas Fraction Definition 424
JOIN 425
Hinge-Type Join of Six DOF Grid Points with Three DOF Grid Points 425
KJOIN 426
Kinematic Join of Six DOF Grid Points with Three DOF Grid Points 426
MADGRP 427
Group Name for Extended Coupling to MADYMO 427
MAT1 428
Material Property Definition, Form 1 428
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 17
MAT2 429
Anisotropic Material for Shells 429
MAT8 430
Orthotropic Elastic Material Properties 430
MAT8A 431
Orthotropic Failure Material Properties 431
MATINI 435
Eulerian Initialization Surface 435
MATRIG 438
Rigid-Body Properties 438
MESH 441
Mesh Generator 441
MOMENT 449
Concentrated Moment or Enforced Motion 449
MOMENT1 450
Follower Moment, Form 1 450
MOMENT2 451
Follower Moment, Form 2 451
NASINIT 452
MD Nastran Initialization 452
PARAM 453
Parameter 453
PBAR 454
Simple Beam Property 454
PBCOMP 455
Beam Alternate Form of PBEAM 455
PBEAM 458
Beam Property 458
PBEAM1 460
Beam Properties (Belytschko-Schwer) 460
PBEAM1 464
Beam Properties (Hughes-Liu) 464
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBEAM1 466
Beam Properties (Predefined Hughes-Liu Cross Sections) 466
PBEAML 471
Beam Cross-Section Properties 471
PBELT 474
Belt Property 474
PCOMP 476
Layered Composite Element Property 476
PCOMPA 478
Additional Data for Layered Composite Element Property 478
PDAMP 481
Linear Damper Properties 481
PELAS 482
Elastic Spring Property 482
PELAS1 483
Nonlinear Elastic Spring with Hysteresis Property 483
PELASEX 484
User-defined Spring Properties 484
PERMEAB 485
Air Bag Permeability 485
PERMGBG 487
Air Bag Permeability 487
PEULER 489
Eulerian Element Properties 489
PEULER1 491
Eulerian Element Properties 491
PLOAD 492
Pressure Loads on the Face of Structural Elements 492
PLOAD4 493
Pressure Loads on the Face of Structural Elements 493
PLOADEX 495
User-defined Pressure Load 495
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 19
PMARKER 496
Property Definition of a Marker Element 496
PMINC 497
Constant Spallation Model 497
POREX 499
User-defined Porosity Model Specified by a User Subroutine 499
PORFCPL 500
Flow Between Two Coupling Surfaces Through a Hole 500
PORFGBG 501
Flow Between Two Air Bags Through a Hole 501
PORFLCPL 502
Flow Between Two Coupling Surfaces Through a Large Hole 502
PORFLGBG 503
Flow Between Two Air Bags Through a Large Hole 503
PORFLOW 505
Porous Flow Boundary 505
PORFLOWT 507
Time-dependent Porous Flow Boundary 507
PORHOLE 510
Holes in Air Bag Surface 510
PORHYDST 511
Porous Flow Boundary 511
PORLHOLE 512
Large Hole in Air Bag Surface 512
PROD 514
Rod Property 514
PSHELL 515
Shell-Element Properties 515
PSHELL1 517
Shell-Element Properties 517
PSOLID 521
Lagrangian Solid-Element Properties 521
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PSPR 523
Linear-Elastic Spring Properties 523
PSPR1 524
Nonlinear-Elastic Spring with Hysteresis Properties 524
PSPREX 525
User-defined Spring Properties 525
PVISC 526
Linear-Damper Properties 526
PVISC1 527
Nonlinear Damper Properties 527
PVISCEX 528
User-defined Damper Properties 528
PWELD 529
Spotweld Property 529
PWELD1 532
Skin-Stringer Delamination 532
PWELD2 536
Sandwich Structure Delamination 536
RBC3 539
Rigid-Body Constraint 539
RBE2 541
Rigid-Body Element 541
RBHINGE 543
Rigid Body Hinge 543
RCONN 544
Rigid Connection 544
RCONREL 547
Rigid Connection with Rigid Ellipsoids 547
RELEX 548
External Definition of a Rigid Ellipsoid 548
RELLIPS 550
Rigid Ellipsoid 550
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 21
RFORCE 551
Rotational Force Field 551
RIGID 552
Rigid Surface 552
RJCYL 554
Cylindrical-Joint Constraint Between Rigid Bodies 554
RJPLA 556
Planar-Joint Constraint Between Rigid Bodies 556
RJREV 558
Revolute-Joint Constraint Between Rigid Bodies 558
RJSPH 560
Spherical-Joint Constraint Between Rigid Bodies 560
RJTRA 562
Translational-Joint Constraint Between Rigid Bodies 562
RJUNI 564
Universal-Joint Constraint Between Rigid Bodies 564
RPLEX 566
External Definition of a Rigid Plane 566
RUBBER1 568
Mooney-Rivlin Rubber Material 568
SECTION 570
Cross Section 570
SET1 571
Set of Numbers 571
SETC 572
List of Names 572
SETTING 573
Application-Sensitive Defaults 573
SHEETMAT 575
Sheet-Metal Material 575
SHREL 579
Elastic Shear Model 579
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHREX 580
User-specified Shear Model 580
SHRLVE 581
Isotropic Linear Viscoelastic Shear Model 581
SHRPOL 583
Polynomial Shear Model 583
SPC 584
Single-Point Constraint 584
SPC1 585
Single-Point Constraint 585
SPC2 586
Single-Point Constraint 586
SPC3 588
Single-Point Constraint 588
SPHERE 590
Defines the Shape of a Sphere 590
SUBSURF 591
Multifaceted Subsurface 591
SURFACE 593
Multifaceted Surface 593
TABFILE 595
Text File Defined Function 595
TABLED1 596
Table 596
TABLEEX 598
User-defined Function 598
TIC 599
Transient Initial Velocities of Grid Points 599
TIC1 600
Transient Initial Velocities of Grid Points 600
TIC2 601
Transient Initial Velocities of Grid Points 601
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 23
TIC3 603
General Form of Transient Initial Velocities of Grid Points 603
TICEEX 605
User-defined Transient Initial Conditions of Elements 605
TICEL 606
Transient Initial Conditions of Elements 606
TICEUL 607
Transient Initial Conditions of Eulerian Regions 607
TICGEX 609
User-defined Transient Initial Conditions of Grid Points 609
TICGP 610
Transient Initial Conditions for Grid Points 610
TICVAL 611
Transient Initial Condition Set 611
TLOAD1 613
Transient Dynamic Load 613
TLOAD2 615
Transient Dynamic Load, Form 2 615
VISCDMP 617
Dynamic Relaxation 617
WALL 619
Lagrangian Rigid Wall 619
WALLDIR 621
Wall Boundary Condition for all Eulerian Boundary Faces in a Specific
Direction 621
WALLET 622
Barrier for Eulerian Transport 622
YLDEX 623
User-defined Yield Model 623
YLDEX1 624
User-Specified Yield Model 624
YLDHY 625
Hydrodynamic Yield Model 625
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDJC 626
Johnson-Cook Yield Model 626
YLDMC 628
Mohr-Coulomb Yield Model 628
YLDMSS 629
Multisurface Yield Model for Snow 629
YLDPOL 631
Polynomial Yield Model 631
YLDRPL 632
Rate Power Law Yield Model 632
YLDSG 633
Steinberg-Guinan Yield Model 633
YLDTM 635
Tanimura-Mimura Yield Model 635
YLDVM 637
von Mises Yield Model 637
YLDZA 640
Zerilli-Armstrong Yield Model 640
6 Parameters
Overview 647
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 25
ALEITR 653
Number of ALE Mesh Iterations 653
ALETOL 654
Tolerance at ALE Interface 654
ALEVER 655
ALE Volume Computation Method 655
ATB-H-OUTPUT 656
Write ATB Output to Dytran Time-History Files 656
ATBAOUT 657
Output Frequency to Main Output File of ATB 657
ATBSEGCREATE 658
Create Grids and Elements for ATBSEG 658
ATBTOUT 659
Output Frequency to Time-History Files of ATB 659
AUTHINFO 660
Licensing Information Control 660
AUTHQUEUE 661
Licensing Queuing Control 661
AXIALSYM 662
Axial Symmetric Analyses 662
BULKL 664
Linear Bulk Viscosity Coefficient 664
BULKQ 665
Quadratic Bulk Viscosity Coefficient 665
BULKTYP 666
Bulk Viscosity Type 666
CFULLRIG 667
Converts 123456 Constraints to FULLRIG on RBE2 Entries 667
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CLUFLIM 668
Limiter of Volume Stain Rate for Clumps 668
CLUMPENER 669
Switch for Kinetic Energy Calculation Scheme of Blended Clumps 669
COHESION 670
Cohesion for Coulomb Friction 670
CONM2OUT 671
CONM2 Summary Output 671
CONTACT 672
Sets Defaults for CONTACT 672
COSUBCYC 677
Growth of Subcycling Interval in Coupling 677
COSUBMAX 678
Subcycle Limit in Euler/Lagrange Coupling 678
COUFRIC 679
Coupling Surface Friction for Nonmetallic Eulerian Solids 679
DELCLUMP 680
Delete Clump Fraction 680
ELDLTH 681
Show List of Lagrangian Elements with Time Step in Ascending Order 681
ERRUSR 682
Redefinition of Severity and Number of Error Message Prints 682
EULER-BOUNDARY 683
Euler Boundary Treatment 683
EULSTRESS 684
Stress Update Method 684
EULTRAN 685
Switch for the Euler Transport Scheme of the Multi-material Solver and the
Single Material Strength Solver 685
EXTRAS 686
Extra Input Constants 686
FAILDT 687
Element Time-step Based Failure Model 687
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 27
FAILOUT 688
Failed Element Output Parameter 688
FASTCOUP 689
Fast Coupling Algorithm 689
FBLEND 690
Blend Fraction 690
FLOW-METHOD 691
Flow-Method Between Two Euler Domains Across Open Areas in Coupling
Surfaces 691
FMULTI 695
Multimaterial Overflow Array Parameter 695
GEOCHECK 696
Define Geometry Consistency Check 696
GRADED-MESH 697
Glue Sets of Euler Elements 697
HGCMEM 698
Shell Membrane Hourglass Damping Coefficient Parameters 698
HGCOEFF 699
Hourglass Damping Coefficient 699
HGCSOL 700
Solid Hourglass Damping Coefficient 700
HGCTWS 701
Shell Twisting Hourglass Damping Coefficient 701
HGCWRP 702
Shell Warping Hourglass Damping Coefficient 702
HGSHELL 703
Shell Hourglass Suppression Method 703
HGSOLID 704
Solid Hourglass Suppression Method 704
HGTYPE 705
Hourglass Suppression Method 705
HICGRAV 706
Gravity Used by HIC Calculations 706
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HVLFAIL 707
Failure at Hydrodynamic Volume Limit 707
HYDROBOD 708
Hydrodynamic Body Force 708
IEEE 709
IEEE Binary Data Output Format 709
IGNFRCER 710
Ignores Warnings 710
IMM 711
Initial Metric Method Formulation 711
INFO-BJOIN 713
List the Generated BJOINs and Spotwelds 713
INISTEP 714
Initial Time Step 714
INITFILE 715
Method of Initialization Definition 715
INITNAS 719
Defines the Type of Displacement Initialization File 719
LIMCUB 721
Contact Cube Sort Algorithm 721
LIMITER 722
Euler Solver Scheme 722
MATRMERG 723
Merges MATRIG and RBE2-FULLRIG Assemblies 723
MATRMRG1 724
Merges MATRIG and RBE2-FULLRIG Assemblies 724
MAXSTEP 725
Maximum Time Step 725
MESHELL 726
Mesh Density for Covering Ellipsoids 726
MESHPLN 727
Mesh Density for Covering Rigid Planes 727
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 29
MICRO 728
Micro-zoning Parameter 728
MINSTEP 729
Minimum Time Step 729
MIXGAS 730
Controls Updating of Gas Fractions 730
NASIGN 731
Echo Ignored Data Entries 731
NZEROVEL 732
Auto Constrain Failed Nodes 732
OLDLAGTET 733
Use Collapsed Hexahedron Scheme for CTETRA 733
PARALLEL 734
Parallel Execution Information 734
PLCOVCUT 735
Pressure Cut Off Time 735
PMINFAIL 736
Switches Failure at Spall Limit 736
RBE2INFO 737
Lists MATRIG and RBE2 Grid Points 737
RHOCUT 738
Global Density Cutoff Value 738
RJSTIFF 739
Rigid-joint Stiffness 739
RKSCHEME 740
Runge-Kutta Time-Integration Scheme 740
ROHYDRO 741
Density Cut-Off Value 741
ROMULTI 742
Density Cut-Off Value 742
ROSTR 743
Density Cut-Off Value 743
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RSTDROP 744
Type of Elements Dropped at Restart 744
SCALEMAS 745
Mass Scaling Definition 745
SHELLFORM 747
Sets the Default of the Shell Formulation 747
SHELMSYS 748
Shell Element System Definition 748
SHPLAST 749
Type of Plane-Stress Plasticity for Shells 749
SHSTRDEF 750
Composite Shell Stress and Strain Output Definition 750
SHTHICK 751
Shell-Thickness Modification Option 751
SLELM 752
Store Shell Sublayer Variables 752
SNDLIM 753
Sound Speed Minimum Value 753
SPHERSYM 754
Spherical Symmetric Analyses 754
STEPFCT 755
Time Step Scale Factor 755
STEPFCTL 756
Time-step Scale Factor for Lagrangain Elements 756
STRNOUT 757
Shell Sublayer Strain Output 757
TOLFAC 758
Increase the Projection Tolerance for CONTACT at Initialization 758
UGASC 759
Universal Gas Constant 759
VARACTIV 760
Activation or Deactivation of Grid-Point, Element, or Face Variables 760
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 31
VDAMP 763
Dynamic Relaxation Parameter 763
VELCUT 764
Velocity Cutoff 764
VELMAX 765
Maximum Velocity 765
VISCOPLAS 766
Use Overstress Formula to Update Strain-rate Dependent Plasticity 766
7 User Subroutines
Overview 769
Loading the User Subroutines with Dytran 770
User Access to Element and Grid Point Data from User Subroutines 770
User-written Subroutine Notes 771
EEXOUT 773
User-defined Element Output 773
EXALE 777
User-defined ALE Grid Point Motion 777
EXBRK 780
User-defined Failure of Breakable Joins 780
EXCOMP 783
User-defined Orthotropic Failure Model 783
EXELAS 790
User-defined CELAS1 Spring Element 790
EXEOS 793
User-defined Equation of State 793
EXEOS1 798
User-specified Equation of State 798
EXFAIL 802
User-defined Failure Model 802
EXFAIL1 804
User-defined Orthotropic Failure model 804
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXFAIL2 808
User-defined Failure Model 808
EXFLOW 811
User-defined Flow Boundary 811
EXFLOW2 814
User-defined Flow Boundary 814
EXFUNC 818
User-defined Function 818
EXINIT 820
User-defined Initial Condition 820
EXPBAG 823
User-defined Air Bag Pressure 823
EXPLD 825
User-defined Pressure Load 825
EXPOR 826
User-defined Porosity Model 826
EXPOR2 832
User-defined Porosity Mode for Multi-material Euler 832
EXSHR 836
User-specified Shear Behavior 836
EXSPR 839
User-defined CSPR Spring Element 839
EXTLU 842
User-defined Logical Unit 842
EXTVEL 844
User-defined Grid Point Constraint 844
EXVISC 846
User-defined CVISC Damper Element 846
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTENTS 33
EXYLD 849
User-defined Yield Behavior 849
EXYLD1 852
User-specified Yield Behavior 852
GEXOUT 857
User-defined Grid Point Output 857
8 Diagnostic Messages
Overview 860
A References
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Chapter 1: Introduction
Dytran Reference Manual
1 Introduction
J
Overview 34
J
Similarity with MD Nastran 35
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
Input to Dytran™ takes the form of a data file where each line can contain up to 80 characters. The file
contains all the information to define the analysis model and control the analysis.
The input to Dytran is similar, but not identical, to that for MD Nastran® and Dyna. If you are familiar
with MD Nastran, learning to use Dytran will be very easy although you should note the areas in which
the two programs differ. These differences are summarized in Similarity with MD Nastran.
The input data is split into four main sections, which must be in the following order:
1. File Management Section (FMS)
2. Executive Control Section
3. Case Control Section
4. Bulk Data Section (Note that parameter options may appear at any location within the Bulk
Data Section.)
The File Management Section contains information about the files used during the analysis and to control
restarting. The Executive Control Section is not used often in Dytran, since the program does not have
an Executive System like MD Nastran.
The Case Control Section controls the analysis, specifies the type of input and output required, selects
the constraints and loading from the Bulk Data, and allows you to control the way the analysis progresses.
A discussion of the functions available in the Case Control Section and a detailed description of the
commands that can be used is given in the Case Control section of this manual.
The Bulk Data Section contains all data necessary to define the model, the constraints, loading
conditions, and initial conditions. Only one model can be defined in the input data, but several types of
constraints and loading can be specified. The constraints and loading actually used in the analysis are
selected in the Case Control Section. The Bulk Data Section is discussed in the this manual together with
a detailed description of the entries.
The File Management, Executive Control, and Case Control Sections use a free-format input, which
means that the data can appear anywhere on the line with individual items separated by commas or
spaces. The Bulk Data Section can also be in free format and can optionally be in fixed format. In cases
where additional precision is required, large format can be used, where each entry occupies two lines in
the input file. Free, fixed, and large format can be mixed as needed in the input file on a line-by-line basis.
Comments can appear anywhere in the input file by placing a $ at the start of the comment. A full
description of the various input formats is given in Format of Bulk Data Entries.
The input data can be present in several separate files. In this case, you can use the INCLUDE command
or entry, available in both the Case Control and Bulk Data Sections, to direct Dytran to read the
appropriate file. The mechanism can be used to store the infrequently changed Bulk Data in one file,
while the File Management, Executive Control, and Case Control Sections, which are usually modified
more often, can be stored in another file.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Chapter 1: Introduction 35
Similarity with MD Nastran
It is important to remember that MD Nastran and Dytran are completely different programs even though
they offer similar input. A CQUAD4 shell element in Dytran has nothing in common with the CQUAD4
shell element in MD Nastran, since it differs in formulation, type of integration, and capabilities.
Similarly, other features defined using the same entries do not necessarily behave in the same way. The
solution method is different, so an identical analysis in MD Nastran and Dytran can give slightly different
results, although they will be within engineering accuracy.
Input
MD Nastran has a wide range of facilities of which a number are not available in Dytran. Therefore, there
are MD Nastran entries that are not valid in Dytran.
The following entries are compatible with both codes:
Elements
CBAR CHEXA
CBEAM CQUAD4
CDAMP1 CROD
CDAMP2 CTETRA
CELAS1 CTRIA3
CELAS2 CVISC
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Properties
PBAR PROD
PBEAM PSHELL
PCOMP PSOLID
PDAMP PVISC
PELAS
Materials
MAT1 MAT8
Coordinate Systems
CORD1C CORD2C
CORD1R CORD2R
CORD1S CORD2S
Other Entries
CONM2 TITLE
GRID TLOAD1
TABLED1 TLOAD5
TIME
The FMS has the same purpose in both Dytran and MD Nastran, but it is less important in Dytran since
all the filenames are automatically defined. The FMS controls restarting and user-written subroutines as
well as specification of the type of the output files.
The Executive Control Section exists but is rarely used since Dytran does not have an Executive System
or DMAP.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Chapter 1: Introduction 37
Similarity with MD Nastran
The Case Control Section has the same function in both Dytran and MD Nastran but uses
different commands.
PARAM entries are used by Dytran but offer different options to those in MD Nastran.
Dytran offers slightly greater flexibility in the way the input file can be defined, as listed below:
• Free format data can have more than eight characters.
• Continuation mnemonics do not have to be unique.
• Fixed and free format input can be freely mixed on a line-by-line basis.
• Real numbers can be entered as integers.
However, continuation lines must follow the entry that references them. If you intend on using both
Dytran and MD Nastran on a regular basis, use only those options that are available in both programs to
avoid confusion and incompatibility.
Loading
Several of the entries used for static loading in MD Nastran (such as FORCE, MOMENT, and PLOAD) are
used for dynamic transient loading in Dytran. Instead of being referenced directly from Case Control,
they are referenced from a TLOAD1 entry that gives the variation of the load with time.
The DAREA entry, used for transient loading in MD Nastran, is also valid in Dytran.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J
Overview 40
J
Summary 41
J FMS Descriptions 42
J
BULKOUT 43
J
EULINIT 44
J IMMFILE 46
J
NASTDISP 47
J
NASTINP 48
J NASTOUT 49
J
PRESTRESS 50
J
RESTART 51
J RSTBEGIN 52
J
RSTFILE 53
J
SAVE 54
J SOLINIT 55
J
SOLUOUT 56
J
START 57
J TYPE 58
J
USERCODE 59
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
The File Management Section (FMS) controls any file assignments that are required by Dytran. It also
controls restarting. The FMS must be placed at the beginning of the input file, but the individual
statements can be in any order within the FMS.
Most of the file assignments are made automatically by Dytran and cannot be changed by the user. The
filenames used are machine dependent and are listed in the Dytran Installation and Execution Guide.
A summary of the statements available in the FMS is given below. Each statement is described in
this chapter.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Summary
The following statements are valid in the FMS:
Prestress Analysis
PRESTRESS Indicates a prestress analysis.
BULKOUT Selects the file to which grid-point data is to be written.
NASTDISP Selects the MD Nastran displacement file to be used.
SOLUOUT Selects a file to which solution data is to be written.
New Analyses
START Indicates a new analysis.
NASTINP Selects an MD Nastran solution file from which Dytran is to be initialized.
SOLINIT Selects a Dytran prestress solution file from which Dytran is to be initialized.
NASTOUT Selects a file to which Dytran writes geometric and material data in MD
Nastran format.
Restart Control
RESTART Indicates a restart of a previous analysis.
RSTFILE Selects the restart file to be used.
RSTBEGIN Selects the time step at which the calculation is to be restarted.
User Code
USERCODE Indicates that user-written subroutines are required for the analysis and
defines the filename containing the Fortran user-written subroutines.
File Selection
TYPE Defines the format of a file
SAVE Defines the interval of saving an output file
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FMS Descriptions
The format of the FMS statements is free field. In presenting the general formats for each statement, the
following conventions are used:
• Uppercase letters should be typed as shown.
• Lowercase letters indicate that a value or option can be substituted.
• Brackets [ ] give a choice of different options.
The default value indicates the value that is used if no FMS command is present. The type column
indicates the type of data you must supply. This can be I (Integer), R (Real), or C (Character). In addition,
a range of permissible values may also be indicated. For example, I > 0 means that you must supply an
integer that is greater than zero.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BULKOUT
Remarks
1. The Bulk Data file filename contains only grid point data of the deformed geometry at the end
of the prestress analysis. It can be used to construct an ALE mesh for the final transient
dynamic analysis.
2. See NASTDISP, Prestress Analysis, and SOLUOUT in this chapter, and NASINIT, Chapter 5: Bulk
Data Entry Descriptions in this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EULINIT
0.
Remarks
1. The target elements are the elements defined in the follow-up run and are the elements that will
be initialized using the import archive.
2. Both defined and imported Euler elements need to be orthogonal in the global system
3. MESH-ID enables support for multiple Euler domains. If MESH-ID is not set the import archive
will be mapped onto all Euler elements.
4. For multi-material Euler analyses with multiple Eulerian materials all material variables in the
import archive require the material number. These material variables are MASS, DENSITY, SIE,
FMAT. The required list of variables for a MMHYDRO run are: MASSXX, SIEXX, FMATXX,
XVEL, YVEL, ZVEL. Here XX denotes the material number. FOR MMSTREN the variables TXX,
TYY, TZZ, TXY, TYZ, TZX, EFFPLS have to be added. If the multi-material run uses only one
Eulerian material then the material numbers can be left out.
5. For multi-material Euler analyses with EOSIG the following has to be added for the IG materials:
MASS-EXX, MASS-PXX, RHO-EXX, RHO-PXX, IGBURNXX, FMAT-PXX, FMAT-PXX, SIE-
EXX, and SIE-PXX. Here XX denotes the material number.
6. For the single-material Hydro Euler solver the required list is MASS, DENSITY, SIE, FMAT,
and FVUNC.
7. IF FVUNC is not included in the Import archive it is assumed that all elements in this archive are
fully uncovered. It is allowed to import such an archive in a simulation with a coupling surface.
In this follow up simulation the target elements can have uncover fractions different from one. In
this case conservative quantities of imported elements are reduced by the uncover fraction of the
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
target element. This is to avoid unwanted pressure increases. It simply means that any mass of the
import archive that is located in the covered part of the target elements is thrown away. As a result
not all mass in the import archive is mapped to the target elements. How much of the mass of the
import archive is mapped is shown in the out file.
8. In the OUT file, a summary is shown of all variables that are mapped.
9. In the follow-up run, the cycle and time are taken from the import archive. The results of the first
cycle of the follow-up run are determined from remapping only and has not gone trough an
equation of state yet. This will happen in the next cycle.
10. If needed the remapping can be checked by doing only one additional cycle in the follow-up run
with a quite small time step. Then, the follow-up OUT file shows two cycles and the results should
be almost identical to the results of the import archive. Also, material summaries in the OUT file
between first run and follow-up run should be identical. The only exceptions are the summaries
of momentum, kinetic energy, and total energy per material. For these three quantities, only the
total amounts will remain constant between first and follow-up run.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
IMMFILE
Remark
The Initial Metric Method is described in the Dytran User’s Guide in Initial Metric Method for Air Bags.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NASTDISP
Remarks
1. The displacement file must be either in MD Patran format, formed by using NASPAT on the
MD Nastran OUTPUT2 results file.
2. The default file type is MSC.XL format. This can be changed using PARAM,INITNAS.
3. See also the BULKOUT, Prestress Analysis, and SOLUOUT in this chapter, and NASINIT, Chapter
5: Bulk Data Entry Descriptions in this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NASTINP
Remarks
1. The stresses and displacement files are obtained by using NASPAT on the OUTPUT2 results file
from MD Nastran.
2. Element stresses are defined in the material coordinate system.
3. It is recommended that the MD Nastran geometrical problem setup be performed by Dytran for
consistency (see NASTOUT).
4. This option causes Dytran to read a MASS.DAT file that is automatically generated by the
NASTOUT File Management Section statement.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NASTOUT
Remark
The option causes a MASS.DAT file to be written containing the element initial masses. This file is read
when the NASTINP File Management Section statement is used.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PRESTRESS
Prestress Analysis
Indicates a prestress analysis.
Remarks
1. The following entries should be present elsewhere in the File Management Section or Bulk Data
Section for a prestress analysis:
2. The SOLUOUT file is then used to initialize Dytran for the primary analysis (via a SOLINIT
FMS statement).
3. Prestressing is described in the Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis,
PRESTRESS
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RESTART
Remarks
1. The RSTBEGIN File Management Section statement must be present to specify the time step from
which the calculation is to be restarted.
2. The RSTFILEFile Management Section statement must be present to specify the name of the
restart file to be used.
3. Restarting is described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Restarting a
Previous Analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RSTBEGIN
Remarks
1. A RESTARTFile Management Section statement must be present to indicate a restart analysis.
2. A RSTFILE File Management Section statement must be present to specify the name of the restart
file to be used.
3. Restarting is described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Restarting a
Previous Analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RSTFILE
Remarks
1. A RESTART File Management Section statement must be present to indicate a Restart analysis.
2. A RSTBEGIN File Management Section statement must be present to specify the time step at
which the calculations are to be restarted.
3. Restarting is described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Restarting a
Previous Analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SAVE
Remarks
1. When the file is written the specified number of times, it is closed, saved, and subsequent results
are stored in a new file.
2. Results are available for postprocessing when the file has been closed and saved. If the SAVE
statement is set to 1, results are stored in individual files and can be postprocessed immediately.
3. If value of n is negative for a RESTART request, the file is overwritten for every restart save. If
the n value is positive, a new file is created for every restart save request.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SOLINIT
Remarks
1. The SOLINIT File Management Section statement causes Dytran to initialize the structural part
of the transient problem from a previous prestress analysis.
2. See also the BULKOUT, NASTDISP, PRESTRESS and SOLUOUT FMS statements, and the
NASINIT Bulk Data entry, for performing the prestress analysis.
3. The solution file should correspond to the filename used to write out the solution data at the end
of the prestress analysis (see the SOLUOUT File Management Section statement).
4. See PARAM,INITFILE for an overview of the different initialization methods and information
on the element types for which prestressing is available.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SOLUOUT
Remarks
1. The solution file is a binary file. It contains all necessary data of the solution at the end of an
Dytran prestress analysis.
2. See also the BULKOUT and PRESTRESS File Management Section statements, and the NASINIT
Bulk Data entry.
3. The solution output file should be the same file as used for initializing the primary analysis (see
the SOLINIT File Management Section statement).
4. See PARAM,INITFILE for an overview of the different initialization methods and information
on the element types for which prestressing is available.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
START
Primary Analysis
Indicates the primary analysis
.
Remarks
1. Since the default is a start analysis, this statement can be omitted.
2. See also the PRESTRESS and RESTART File Management Section statements.
3. This entry can be accompanied by using either of the following File Management
bulletreg statements:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TYPE
Remarks
1. Archive files are normally used to store results at one or more time steps during the analysis.
Archive files are used in postprocessing to produce deformed shapes, contour plots, and vector
plots. Archive files contain the model geometry and results.
2. Time-history files are normally used to store results for particular grid points and elements and
are used to produce time-history plots. Only the results are stored.
3. Restart files are used to restart the calculation.
4. The summaries STEPSUM, MATSUM, MRSUM, and EBDSUM are always printed on standard
output, irrespective of the value of logical_file.
5. The default output frequency is every 50 cycles for MATSUM, MRSUM, and EBDSUM. The default
for STEPSUM is every cycle.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
USERCODE
Remarks
1. The USERCODE command causes the user-written subroutines to be compiled and linked into a
new, temporary version of Dytran. On most computers, this is automatic. See the Dytran
Installation and Execution Guide for details on how it is performed on your computer.
2. If the USERCODE statement is not present, the standard version of Dytran is used.
3. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for details on how to write and use
user-written subroutines.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J
Overview 62
J
Executive Control Summary 63
J Executive Control Descriptions 64
J
CEND 65
J
MEMORY-SIZE 66
J TIME 67
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
Executive Control is not used extensively by Dytran since, unlike MD Nastran, it does not contain an
Executive System, and DMAP is not available. It is retained for compatibility with MD Nastran.
The Executive Control Section immediately follows the FMS and is terminated by a CEND statement.
The Executive Control statements can appear in any order within the Executive Control Section.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 63 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 64 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
The default value is used if the statement is not present. Where you can supply an option, the type heading
indicates the type of data you must supply. This can be I (Integer), R (Real), or C (Character). A
restriction on the range of the option may also be included. For example, I > 0 indicates that you must
supply an integer that is greater than zero, while 0 < R < 1. indicates that you must supply a real number
greater than zero and less than one.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 65 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CEND
Remark
If there are no FMS or Executive Control statements, the input file can start directly with the Case
Control Section.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 66 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MEMORY-SIZE
Remarks
1. Both values are required data. If you wish to use the default memory size for any of the values,
you can use the word DEFAULT for that specific value entry. The entry is case insensitive.
2. Dytran defines the memory size according to the following rules.
a. The user-specified definition by the MEMORY-SIZE entry always prevails.
b. If the MEMORY-SIZE entry is not used, the default memory size depends on the setting when
the analysis was submitted. On UNIX platforms, the run script takes the “size” entry that
defines the memory size. The choices are small (default), medium, and large. On Windows
platforms, you can define the memory size from Dytran Explorer.
c. If you do not specify anything, the predefined default (small) applies.
3. Due to the implementation, it may still be possible that your analysis data does not fit in the
requested memory. You can then alter the definition in the input file, or increase the size using
Dytran Explorer. If you need an estimate of the size the analysis approximately needs, you can
look at the memory summary at the end of the output file. Please note the memory sizes mentioned
are only an indication, as the summary is written when the analysis stopped. If the analysis
completed successfully, the core memory size is accurate.
4. There is no entry to define the character memory size. Dytran does not use any core memory
character data.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 67 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TIME
Remarks
1. When the CPU time specified on the TIME statement is used, the analysis terminates. The
analysis may be continued by performing a restart, if a restart file is requested at the end of
the analysis.
2. It is not possible to specify a maximum I/O time. I/O time is normally insignificant compared to
the CPU time for a Dytran analysis.
3. The time is specified in minutes. Thus, 1.5 is equivalent to 90 seconds, and 480 gives 8 hours.
4. It is advised to use the TIME statement to control CPU time, rather than specifying a time limit
for the batch queue or the job. If you do give a job or batch queue limit, make sure it is
significantly longer than specified on the TIME statement to ensure that Dytran terminates
normally and does not corrupt the files.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 68 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 69 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J
Overview 72
J
Case Control Summary 73
J Case Control Descriptions 76
J
ACC 77
J
CHECK 78
J CMARKOUT 79
J
CMARKS 80
J
COG 81
J CONTOUT 82
J
CONTS 83
J
CORDDEF 84
J CPLSOUT 85
J
CPLSURFS 86
J
CSECS 87
J CSOUT 88
J
EBDOUT 89
J
EBDS 90
J ELEMENTS 91
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 70 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J ELEXOUT 92
J
ELOUT 93
J
ENDSTEP 94
J ENDTIME 95
J
GBAGOUT 96
J GBAGS 97
J
GPEXOUT 98
J
GPOUT 99
J GRIDS 100
J
HIC 101
J
INCLUDE 103
J MATOUT 104
J
MATS 105
J
PARAM 106
J PLANES 107
J
RBOUT 109
J
RELOUT 110
J RELS 111
J
RIGIDS 112
J
SET 113
J SETC 115
J
SPC 117
J
STEPS 118
J SUBSOUT 119
J
SUBSURFS 120
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 71 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J SURFACES 121
J
SURFOUT 122
J
TIC 123
J TIMES 124
J
TITLE 125
J TLOAD 126
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 72 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
The Case Control Section of the input file controls the analysis, makes selections from the Bulk Data
Section, and determines what results are output and how often. Case Control immediately follows the
CEND statement, marking the end of the Executive Control Section, and is terminated by a BEGIN
BULK entry or, in the case of a restart, by an ENDDATA entry. The Case Control commands can be in any
order within the section. A summary of the commands available is given below.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 73 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Analysis Control
ENDSTEP Termination step for the analysis
ENDTIME Termination time for the analysis
CHECK Data check
Data Selection
TLOAD Selects transient loading
TIC Selects transient initial conditions
SPC Selects single-point constraints
Output Control
CORDDEF Defines the moving rectangular coordinate system for deformation output
SET Defines lists of entity numbers for use in output requests
SETC Defines lists of names for use in output requests
TITLE Defines the title of the analysis
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 74 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SURFACES Defines the surfaces for which results are to be written to a file
EBDS Defines the Eulerian boundary conditions for which results are written to a file
Output Frequency
TIMES Lists the times at which output is required
STEPS Lists the time steps at which output is required
User-Defined Output
GPEXOUT Indicates that user subroutines are used for grid point output
ELEXOUT Indicates that user subroutines are used for element output
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 75 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Miscellaneous
PARAM Specifies parameters
ACC Creates time history output of an accelormeter in local coordinate system
COG Calculates the center of gravity for a group of elements
HIC Calculates Head Injury Criteria (HIC) value
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 76 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
The default value is used if the command is not present. Where you need to supply an option, the type
heading indicates the type of data you must supply. This can be I (Integer), R (Real), or C (Character).
A restriction on the range of the option may also be included. For example, I > 0 indicates that you must
supply an integer greater than zero; 0. < R < 1. indicates that you must supply a real number greater than
zero and less than one.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 77 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ACC
Accelerometer Output
Creates time history output of an accelerometer in local coordinate system.
Remarks:
1. For each ACC output request, a file will be generated according to:
{JOBNAME}_{NAME}_XX.THS.
2. The set SID referenced must contain 1 grid point ID, which must be the same node that defines
the origin of the (moving) coordinate system referenced with CID.
3. The ACC output request automatically stores the following variables in the timehistory file:
a. XPOS, YPOS, and ZPOS: Position of accelerometer in global coordinate system.
b. XVEL, YVEL, and ZVEL: The velocity of the accelerometer in coordinates of the local
coordinate system.
c. XACC, YACC, and ZACC: The acceleration of the accelerometer in coordinates of the local
coordinate system.
d. RVEL and RACC: The absolute velocity and absolute acceleration of the accelerometer.
4. If any BODYFOR boundary condition is defined for the grid point defined in the SET, it is
subtracted from the global acceleration of the gird point. Any other acceleration fields like GRAV,
RFORCE, or ATBACC are not subtracted from the measured grid point acceleration.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 78 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CHECK
Data Check
Selects the data checking option.
Remarks
1. The data check option performs the following:
a. Reads the input data.
b. Checks for errors.
c. Produces printed output.
d. Runs two time steps.
e. Writes the model data to the output files.
2. The default is YES for a new analysis and NO for a restart analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 79 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CMARKOUT
Remarks
1. The elements for which data is written are specified using the CMARKERS command. The element
results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output the results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the CMARKOUT command. If the CMARKOUT
command exceeds 80 characters, a second CMARKOUT command (with the same
logical_file name) can be used as follows:
CMARKOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
CMARKOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 80 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CMARKS
CMARKS to be Output
Defines the CMARKS for which results are to be output to a file.
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The element results written are specified using the CMARKOUT command. The element results
that can be output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Outputting
Results. The frequency of output is controlled by using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 81 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COG
ELEM: Element
SID Unique SET number I>0
SAMPLE Dytran sampling rate. This value determines the time step R>0
when center of gravity will be calculated and stored in the
timehistory file.
Remarks
1. For each COG output request, a file is generated according to: {JOB-NAME}_{NAME}_XX.THS
2. The elements referenced in the SET entry can be a combination of elastic, plastic and rigid
elements. However, CONM2 definitions are not included in this calculation of the center
of gravity.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 82 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTOUT
Remarks
1. The contact surfaces for which data is written are specified using the CONTS command. The
contact-surface results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter
9: Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using theTIMES or STEPS command.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the CONTOUT command. If the CONTOUT
command exceeds 80 characters, a second CONTOUT command (with the same logical_file name)
can be used as follows:
CONTOUT (logical_file) = var1, var2
CONTOUT (logical_file) = var3
5. For a time-history file, the following entities are written to the file together with the
corresponding results:
Master-Slave Contact:
C < Contact Surface ID > M:Forces/accelerations on/of the master surface.
C < Contact Surface ID > S:Forces/accelerations on/of the slave surface.
C < Contact Surface ID > T:Difference between the forces/accelerations on/of the master and
slave surfaces of the contact set.
Single-Surface Contact:
C < Contact Surface ID > T:Forces/accelerations on/of the single surface.
For an archive file, the combined entity C < Contact Surface ID > T is not written.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 83 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTS
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The results are specified using the CONTOUT command. The contact surface results that can be
requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis,
Outputting Results. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES or
STEPS command.
3. An archive file can contain only one contact surface definition. You can, of course, define
multiple contact output definitions.
4. Contact-surface data can only be written to time-history files. (See the TYPE FMS statement.)
5. For a time-history file, the following entities are written to the file together with the
corresponding results:
Master-Slave Contact:
C < Contact Surface ID > M:Forces/accelerations on/of the master surface.
C < Contact Surface ID > S:Forces/accelerations on/of the slave surface.
C < Contact Surface ID > T:Difference between the forces/accelerations on/of the master and
slave surfaces of the contact set.
Single-Surface Contact:
C < Contact Surface ID > T:Forces/accelerations on/of the single surface.
For an archive file, the combined entity C < Contact Surface ID > T is not written.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 84 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORDDEF
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. Note that this entry is applicable only to output requests with TYPE=ARCHIVE.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 85 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CPLSOUT
Remarks
1. The coupling surfaces for which output is written must be specified using the
CPLSURFS command. The coupling-surface results available for output are defined in Dytran
User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled by the TIMESor the STEPS command.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the CPLSOUT command. When the command line
exceeds 80 characters, a second CPLSOUT command (with the same logical file name) can be
used as follows:
CPLSOUT(SRF_1) = vanr, var2
CPLSOUT (SRF_1) = var3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 86 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CPLSURFS
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results
2. The results written are specified using the CPLSOUT command. The coupling surface results
available for output are described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis,
Outputting Results
3. The frequency of output is controlled by the TIMES or STEPS command.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 87 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CSECS
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The results written are specified using theCSOUT command. The cross section results that can be
requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis,
Outputting Results. The frequency of output is controlled using the TIMES or STEPS command.
3. Cross-section data can only be written to time-history files. (See theTYPE FMS statement.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 88 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CSOUT
Remarks
1. The cross sections for which output is written are specified using the CSECS command. The cross
section results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Outputting Results
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES or the STEPS command.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis,Outputting Results
4. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the CSOUT command. If the command exceeds 80
characters, a second CSOUT command (with the same logical filename) can be used as follows:
CSOUT(SEC001) = var1, var2
CSOUT (SEC001) = var3
5. Cross-section data can only be written to time-history files. (See the TYPE FMS statement.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 89 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EBDOUT
Remarks
1. The Eulerian boundaries for which data is written are specified using the EBDS command. The
Eulerian boundary results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Outputting Results
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Eulerian boundary data can only be written to time-history files.
5. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the EBDOUT command. If the EBDOUT exceeds
80 characters, a second EBDOUT (with the same logical_file name) can be used as follows:
EBDOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
EBDOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 90 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EBDS
Remarks
1. The Eulerian boundary results to be written are specified using the EBDOUT command. The
Eulerian boundary results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Eulerian boundary results can only be written to time-history files.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 91 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ELEMENTS
Elements to be Output
Defines the elements for which results are to be output to a file.
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results. The element results written are specified using the ELOUT
command. The element results that can be output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of output is controlled using theTIMES and STEPS commands.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 92 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ELEXOUT
Remarks
1. At every time or time step specified by the TIMES or STEPS command, a subroutine named
ELEXOUT is called for each of the elements listed using the ELEMENTS command allowing the
user to calculate specific quantities for output.
2. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. For a description of how to use user-written subroutines, see Chapter 7: User Subroutines in
this manual.
4. The following commands:
ELEXOUT (USEROUT)
ELEMENTS (USEROUT) = 10
<Courier><Hypertext>SET 10 = 101, THRU, 110
<Courier><Hypertext>TIMES (USEROUT) = 1.0E-3, 2.0E-3
cause the subroutine <Courier><Hypertext>EEXOUT to be called at times 1.0E–3 and 2.0E–3 for
elements 101 through 110 with the user-supplied name USEROUT.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 93 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ELOUT
Remarks
1. The elements for which data is written are specified using the ELEMENTS command. The element
results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results. The frequency of output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS
commands.
2. For a description of how to output the results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the ELOUT command. If the ELOUT command
exceeds 80 characters, a second ELOUT command (with the same logical_file name) can
be used as follows:
ELOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
ELOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 94 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ENDSTEP
Remarks
1. The RESTART statement can be used to continue a previous analysis. Therefore, you do not need
to set ENDSTEP to the final point you want to reach, but instead, to the point at which you want
the analysis to stop.
2. Unless you are very sure of what the analysis will do, you should always run the analysis in stages.
Then use the RESTART statement to continue the analysis after you have checked how the
mesh deforms.
3. The ENDTIME command can be used to terminate the analysis based on time.
4. If ENDTIME is specified, ENDSTEP is set to a large value (9999999).
5. At least one of the two termination criteria must be specified, either ENDSTEP or ENDTIME
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 95 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ENDTIME
Remarks
1. The RESTART statement can be used to continue a previous analysis. Therefore, you do not need
to set ENDTIME to the final point you want to reach, but instead, to the point at which you want
the analysis to stop.
2. Unless you are very sure of what the analysis will do, you should always run the analysis in stages.
Then use the RESTART statement to continue the analysis after you have checked how the
mesh deforms.
3. The ENDSTEP command can be used to terminate the analysis based on the number of time steps.
4. If ENDSTEP is specified, endtime is set to large value (99999).
5. At least one of the two termination criteria must be specified, either ENDTIME or ENDSTEP.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 96 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAGOUT
Remarks
1. The gas bags, for which data is written, are specified using the GBAGS command. The gas-bag
results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results, GBAGOUT — Gas Bag Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results, GBAGOUT — Gas Bag Results.
4. Gas-bag data can only be written to time-history files. (See the TYPE FMS statement.)
5. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the GBAGOUT command. If the GBAGOUT
command exceeds 80 characters, a second GBAGOUT command (with the same logical_file
name) can be used as follows:
GBAGOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
GBAGOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 97 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAGS
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The results written are specified using the GBAGOUT command. The gas bag results that can be
requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis,
Outputting Results, GBAGOUT — Gas Bag Results.
3. The frequency of output is controlled using theTIMES and STEPS commands.
4. Gas bag data can only be written to time-history files. (See theTYPE FMS statement.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 98 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GPEXOUT
Remarks
1. At every time or time step specified by the TIMES or STEPS commands, a subroutine called
GEXOUT is called for each of the grid points specified using a GRIDS command that allows you
to calculate specific quantities for output.
2. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results
3. For a description of how to use user-written subroutines, see Chapter 7: User Subroutines in
this manual.
4. The following commands:
GPEXOUT (DYTRAN_EXT_GP)
GRIDS (DYTRAN_EXT_GP) = 3
SET, 3, 1 THRU 35.
STEPS (DYTRAN_EXT_GP) = 5, 10, 15
cause user subroutine GPEXOUT to be called at time steps 5, 10, and 15 for grid points 1 through
35 with the user-supplied name DYTRAN_EXT_GP.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 99 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GPOUT
Remarks
1. The grid points for which data is written are specified using theGRIDS command. The grid-point
results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the GPOUT command. If the GPOUT command
exceeds 80 characters, a second GPOUT command (with the same logical_file name) can
be used as follows:
GPOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
GPOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 100 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GRIDS
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The grid point results to be written are specified using the GPOUT command. The grid point
results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. The frequency of output is controlled using theTIMES and STEPS commands.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 101 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HIC
ELLIPS Ellipsoid
RIGID Rigid
SID Unique SET or SETC number I>0
HIC TYPE The definition of HIC calculation. If a limited time C or R>0
envelope is chosen then this entry provides the range
of time envelope.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 102 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The summary of HIC calculation will be written to *.OUT file
2. If the sampling rate (SAMPLE) is close to the delta time step of Dytran, then a warning message
is written to the *.OUT file of suspicious HIC values.
3. The value of the gravity used by the HIC calculations has to be set by the parameter HICGRAV.
When this value is not set, a warning message is issued and the default value of 9.80665 is used.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 103 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INCLUDE
Remarks
1. The file must be present in the working area where Dytran is executing.
2. BEGIN BULK and ENDDATA may be included in an INCLUDE file.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 104 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MATOUT
Remarks
1. The materials for which data is written are specified using the MATS command. The material
results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results,MATOUT — Material Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results, MATOUT — Material Results .
4. Material data can only be written to time-history files.
5. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the MATOUT command. If the MATOUT command
exceeds 80 characters, a second MATOUT command (with the same logical_file name) can
be used as follows:
MATOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
MATOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 105 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MATS
Materials to be Output
Defines the materials for which results are to be output to a file.
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The material results to be written are specified using the MATOUT command. The material results
that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. The frequency of output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
4. Material results can only be written to time-history files.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 106 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PARAM
Parameter Specification
Defines the values for the parameters that are used during the analysis
Remark
This command is normally used in the Bulk Data Section. A list of parameters that can be set, along with
the parameter names and values, is given in Chapter 6 : Parameters of this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 107 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PLANES
Remarks
1. The rigid planes results to be written are specified using the <Courier><Hypertext>PLNOUT
command. The rigid planes results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s
Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. A SETC is used to enable output for rigid planes obtained from MADYMO.
5. Rigid plane data can only be written to archive files. See also the TYPE FMS statement.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 108 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PLNOUT
Remarks
1. The rigid planes for which data is written are specified using the PLANES command. The rigid
plane results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results
4. The keyword GEOMETRY causes a mesh to be placed on the rigid planes for visualization
purposes in the postprocessor.
5. Plane output can only be used for ARCHIVE output requests.
6. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the PLNOUT command. If the PLNOUT
comand exceeds 80 characters, a second PLNOUT (with the same logical_file name) can be
used as follows:
PLNOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
PLNOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 109 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RBOUT
Remarks
1. The rigid bodies for which data is written are specified using the RIGIDS command. The rigid
body results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the RBOUT command. If the RBOUT command
exceeds 80 characters, a second RBOUT (with the same logical_file name) can be used
as follows:
RBOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
RBOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 110 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RELOUT
Remarks
1. The rigid ellipsoids for which data is written are specified using the RELS command. The rigid
ellipsoid results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Outputting Results, RELOUT — Rigid Ellipsoid Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results, RELOUT — Rigid Ellipsoid Results.
4. The keyword GEOMETRY causes a mesh to be placed on the rigid ellipsoids for visualization
purposes in the postprocessor. This keyword can be used only with archive files.
5. Continuation lines are not allowed when using the RELOUT command. If the RELOUT command
exceeds 80 characters, a second RELOUT command (with the same logical_file name) can
be used as follows:
RELOUT (logical_file) = var 1, var 2
RELOUT (logical_file) = var 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 111 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RELS
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The rigid ellipsoid results to be written are specified using the RELOUT command. The rigid-
ellipsoid results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. The frequency of output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
4. A SETC is used to enable output for rigid ellipsoids obtained from MADYMO or ATB.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 112 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RIGIDS
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The rigid-body results to be written are specified using the RBOUT command. The rigid-body
results that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. The SET can refer to a RIGID surface (id), a MATRIG (MR<id>), or an RBE2-FULLRIG
(FR<id>).
4. The frequency of output is controlled using the TIMES and STEPS commands.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 113 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SET
Set Definition
Defines a list of grid points, elements, etc., for which output is required.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 114 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. A SET command may occupy more than one line in the input file. A comma (,) at the end of a line
signifies that the next line is a continuation. Commas cannot end a set.
2. The keyword BY does not have to be used when specifying an i1 THRU i2 range since the
assumed default is 1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 115 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SETC
List of Names
Defines a list of names (character strings) that are used to specify what output is required.
Remarks
1. A SETC command may occupy more than one line of the input file. A comma (,) at the end of a
line signifies that the next line is a continuation. Commas cannot end a set.
2. This SETC may be referred to from outside the Case Control Section.
3. The length of the character string must be 16 characters or less.
4. The RELS command uses the SETC instead of the normal SET1, enabling the user to specify
character strings rather than integers.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 116 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SGAUGES
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES or STEPS command.
3. Surface gauge data can only be written to time-history files. (See the TYPE FMS statement).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 117 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SPC
Remark
Single point constraints are not used by Dytran unless they are selected in the Case Control Section.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 118 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
STEPS
Remarks
1. The keyword END can be used to indicate the end of the calculation.
2. The TIMES command can be used instead to control the output using the values of time.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. A list of steps should be in ascending order.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 119 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SUBSOUT
Option Meaning
logical_file The logical name of the file to which the subsurface output is written.
vari Variable name to be output.
Remarks
1. The subsurfaces for which data is written are specified using the SUBOUT command. The
subsurface data that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES or STEPS command.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Subsurface output data can only be written to a time history files. (See theTYPE FMS statement.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 120 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SUBSURFS
Subsurfaces to be Stored
Defines the subsurfaces for which results are to be written to a file.
Option Meaning
logical_file The logical name of the file to which the subsurface output
is written.
n Number of a SET command. Only data for GBAG or
COUPLING subsurfaces that appear in the set are output.
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The results are specified using the SUBSOUT command. The subsurf data that can be requested
for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. The frequency of the output is controlled using theTIMES or STEPS command.
4. Subsurface output data can only be written to a time history files. (See the TYPE FMS statement).
5. The SUBSURFACEs specified in the SET command need to be part of a SURFACE referenced by
a COUPLE or GBAG entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 121 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SURFACES
Surfaces to be Stored
Defines the surfaces for which results are to be written to a file.
Option Meaning
logical_file The logical name of the file to which the surface output is written.
n Number of a SET command. Only data for GBAG or COUPLING
surfaces that appear in the set are output.
Remarks
1. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The results are specified using the SURFOUT command. The subsurf data that can be requested
for output is listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Outputting Results.
3. The frequency of the output is controlled using the TIMES or STEPS command.
4. Surface output data can only be written to a time history files. (See the TYPE FMS statement).
5. The SURFACEs specified in the SET command need to be referenced by a COUPLE or
GBAGentry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 122 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SURFOUT
Option Meaning
logical_file The logical name of the file to which the subsurface output
is written.
vari Variable name to be output.
Remarks
1. The surfaces for which data is written are specified using the SURFACES command. The surface
data that can be requested for output are listed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
2. The frequency of the output is controlled using theTIMES or STEPS command.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. Surface output data can only be written to a time history files. (See the TYPE FMS statement.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 123 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TIC
Remark
Initial conditions are not used by Dytran unless they are selected in the Case Control Section.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 124 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TIMES
Remarks
1. The keyword END can be used to indicate the end of the calculation.
2. The STEPS command can be used instead to control the output using the time-step numbers.
3. For a description of how to output results, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the
Analysis, Outputting Results.
4. A list of times should be in ascending order.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 125 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TITLE
Output Title
Defines the title for the Analysis
Remark
The title is written to the output files for use in postprocessing.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 126 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TLOAD
Remark
Loads, pressures, flow boundaries, and enforced motion are not used by Dytran unless they are selected
in the Case Control Section.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 127 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J
Overview 137
J
Format of Bulk Data Entries 138
J Bulk Data Summary 141
J
Bulk Data Descriptions 152
J
$ 153
J ACTIVE 154
J
ALE 157
J
ALEGRID 158
J ALEGRID1 161
J
ATBACC 164
J
ATBJNT 165
J ATBSEG 168
J
BEGIN BULK 171
J
BIAS 172
J BJOIN 174
J
BODYFOR 180
J
BOX 182
J BOX1 183
J
CBAR 184
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 128 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J CBEAM 186
J
CDAMP1 188
J
CDAMP2 190
J CELAS1 192
J
CELAS2 194
J CFACE 196
J
CFACE1 198
J
CHEXA 199
J CMARKB2 201
J
CMARKN1 202
J
CONM2 203
J CONTACT 204
J
CONTFORC 193
J
CONTINI 195
J CONTREL 197
J
CORD1C 198
J
CORD1R 200
J CORD1S 202
J
CORD2C 204
J
CORD2R 206
J CORD2S 208
J
CORD3R 210
J
CORD4R 212
J CORDROT 215
J
COUHTR 217
J
COUINFL 219
J COUOPT 221
J
COUP1FL 223
J
COUP1INT 224
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 129 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J COUPLE 225
J
COUPLE1 230
J
COUPOR 233
J CPENTA 268
J
CQUAD4 269
J CROD 271
J
CSEG 272
J
CSPR 273
J CTETRA 274
J
CTRIA3 275
J
CVISC 277
J CYLINDER 278
J
DAREA 279
J
DETSPH 280
J DMAT 281
J
DMATEL 284
J
DMATEP 286
J DMATOR 287
J
DYMAT14 290
J
DYMAT24 293
J DYMAT25 296
J
DYMAT26 298
J
ENDDATA 302
J EOSEX 303
J
EOSEX1 304
J
EOSGAM 306
J EOSIG 309
J
EOSJWL 316
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 130 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J EOSMG 318
J
EOSPOL 320
J
EOSTAIT 323
J FABRIC 325
J
FAILEST 329
J FAILEX 330
J
FAILEX1 331
J
FAILEX2 332
J FAILJC 333
J
FAILMES 335
J
FAILMPS 336
J FAILPRS 337
J
FAILSDT 338
J
FFCONTR 339
J FLOW 341
J
FLOWDEF 344
J
FLOWDIR 347
J FLOWEX 349
J
FLOWSQ 351
J
FLOWT 354
J FLOWTSQ 357
J
FOAM1 361
J
FOAM2 363
J FORCE 366
J
FORCE1 368
J
FORCE2 369
J FORCE3 370
J
FORCEEX 372
J
GBAG 374
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 131 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J GBAGC 383
J
GBAGCOU 387
J
GBAGHTR 388
J GBAGINFL 390
J
GBAGPOR 392
J GRAV 395
J
GRDSET 396
J
GRID 397
J GROFFS 398
J
HGSUPPR 399
J
HTRCONV 402
J HTRRAD 403
J
HYDSTAT 404
J
IGNORE 406
J INCLUDE 407
J
INFLATR 408
J
INFLATR1 410
J INFLCG 412
J
INFLFRAC 414
J
INFLGAS 416
J INFLHYB 418
J
INFLHYB1 420
J
INFLTANK 421
J INITGAS 424
J
JOIN 425
J
KJOIN 426
J MADGRP 427
J
MAT1 428
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 132 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J MAT2 429
J
MAT8 430
J
MAT8A 431
J MATINI 435MATRIG 438
J
MESH 441
J MOMENT 449
J
MOMENT1 450
J
MOMENT2 451
J NASINIT 452
J
PARAM 453
J
PBAR 454
J PBCOMP 455
J
PBEAM 458
J
PBEAM1 460
J PBEAM1 466
J
PBEAM1 466
J
PBEAML 471
J PBELT 474
J
PCOMP 476
J
PCOMPA 478
J PDAMP 481
J
PELAS 482
J
PELAS1 483
J PELASEX 484
J
PERMEAB 485
J
PERMGBG 487
J PEULER 489
J
PEULER1 491
J
PLOAD 492
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 133 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J PLOAD4 493
J
PLOADEX 495
J
PMARKER 496
J PMINC 497
J
POREX 499
J PORFCPL 500
J
PORFGBG 501
J
PORFLCPL 502
J PORFLGBG 503
J
PORFLOW 505
J
PORFLOWT 507
J PORHOLE 510
J
PORHYDST 511
J
PORLHOLE 512
J PROD 514
J
PSHELL 515
J
PSHELL1 517
J PSOLID 521
J
PSPR 523
J
PSPR1 524
J PSPREX 525
J
PVISC 526
J
PVISC1 527
J PVISCEX 528
J
PWELD 529
J
PWELD1 532
J PWELD2 536
J
RBC3 539
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 134 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J RBE2 541
J
RBHINGE 543
J
RCONN 544
J RCONREL 547
J
RELEX 548
J RELLIPS 550
J
RFORCE 551
J
RIGID 552
J RJCYL 554
J
RJPLA 556
J
RJREV 558
J RJSPH 560
J
RJTRA 562
J
RJUNI 564
J RPLEX 566
J
RUBBER1 568
J
SECTION 570
J SET1 571
J
SETC 572
J
SETTING 573
J SHEETMAT 575
J
SHREL 579
J
SHREX 580
J SHRLVE 581
J
SHRPOL 583
J
SPC 584
J SPC1 585
J
SPC2 586
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 135 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J SPC3 588
J
SPHERE 590
J
SUBSURF 591
J SURFACE 593
J
TABFILE 595
J TABLED1 596
J
TABLEEX 598
J
TIC 599
J TIC1 600
J
TIC2 601
J
TIC3 603
J TICEEX 605
J
TICEL 606
J
TICEUL 607
J TICGEX 609
J
TICGP 610
J
TICVAL 611
J TLOAD1 613
J
TLOAD2 615
J
VISCDMP 617
J WALL 619
J
WALLDIR 621
J
WALLET 622
J YLDEX 623
J
YLDEX1 624
J
YLDHY 625
J YLDJC 626
J
YLDMC 628
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 136 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J YLDMSS 629
J
YLDPOL 631
J
YLDRPL 632
J YLDSG 633
J
YLDTM 635
J YLDVM 637
J
YLDZA 640
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 137 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
The Bulk Data Section of the input file contains all the data to fully describe the analysis model, including
the geometry, topology, constraints, and loading. This section must begin with a BEGIN BULK entry.
Thereafter, entries can appear in any order except that continuation lines must follow the entry from
which they are referenced. Entries can be numbered in any manner that is convenient. Gaps in the
numbering are allowed. The input file must finish with an ENDDATA entry.
Many of the entries are the same as those used for MD Nastran. However, sometimes not all the fields
are used for Dytran. If data occurs in the unused fields, a User Warning Message is issued and the excess
data is ignored, see Chapter 1: Introduction, Similarity with MD Nastran in this manual. Similarly, any MD
Nastran entry that is not used by Dytran is ignored.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 138 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Free-field entries must start in column one; data fields can consist of any number of characters as long as
the whole entry fits on one line of 80 characters.
A field may be left blank by entering two commas with or without spaces between them:
GRID, 7,, 0.0, 1.0, 3.7569
Only those fields containing data need be entered. All the extra fields are given their default values. In
the example above, only six fields have been entered, so the last four are set to the default.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 139 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
1a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10a
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
The small-field, fixed-format entry consists of a single line in the input file containing 80 characters and
comprising 10 fields, each of which has eight characters. The data in each field must lie completely
within the designated columns.
1a 2 3 4 5 6a
8 16 16 16 16 8
1b 2 3 4 5 6b
8 16 16 16 16 8
The large field format is denoted by placing the symbol * after the mnemonic in Field 1a and a + as the
first character of Field 10a. The second line contains the symbol * in column one. The second line may,
in turn, be used to point to a large or small field continuation line, depending on whether the continuation
line contains the symbol * (for a large field) or the symbol + (for a small field) in column one. The use
of multiple and large field lines is illustrated in the following examples:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 140 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 141 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Geometry
Grid Points
GRID Grid-point location, coordinate system selection.
GRDSET Default options for GRID entries.
GROFFS Grid-point offset in the local coordinate system.
CONM2 Concentrated grid-point mass and/or inertia.
Coordinate Systems
CORD1R,CORD2R Rectangular coordinate system definition
CORD1C, CORD2C Cylindrical coordinate system definition
CORD1S, CORD2S Spherical coordinate system definition
CORD3R Moving rectangular coordinate system definition, form 1
CORD4R Moving rectangular coordinate system definition, form 2
CORDROT Corotational frame definition
Mesh Generation
MESH Mesh generator
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 142 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Lagrangian Elements
Solid Elements
CHEXA Connection definition for brick element with eight grid points
CPENTA Connection definition for wedge element with six grid points
CTETRA Connection definition for tetrahedron element with four grid points
PSOLID Property definition for CHEXA, CPENTA, CPENTA
Surface Elements
CQUAD4 Connection definition for a quadrilateral shell element with four grid points
CTRIA3 Connection definition for a triangular shell or membrane element with three grid points
PSHELL Property definition for CQUAD4 and CTRIA3
PSHELL1 Extended property definition for CQUAD4and CTRIA3
PCOMP Layered composite element property
PCOMPA Additional data for layered composite element property
1-D Elements
CBAR Connection definition for a line element with two grid points
CBEAM Connection definition for a line element with two grid points
CROD Connection definition for a line element with two grid points
CDAMP1 Connection definition for a scalar damper element with two grid points
CDAMP2 Connection definition for a linear damper element with two grid points
CELAS1 Connection definition for a scalar spring element with two grid points
CELAS2 Connection and property definition for a scalar spring element with two grid points
CSPR Connection definition for spring element with two grid points
CVISC Connection definition for a viscous damper element with two grid points
PBAR Property definition for a CBAR element
PBEAM Property definition for CBAR and CBEAM
PBEAM1 Extended property definition for CBARand CBEAM
PBEAML Complex property definition forCBAR and CBEAM by cross-sectional dimensions
PBELT Property definition for a seat belt element defined by CROD
PDAMP Property definition forCDAMP1 and CDAMP2
PELAS Property definition for CELASn
PELAS1 Property definition on nonlinear elastic springs for CELASn
PELASEX Property definition for CELASn with user subroutines
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 143 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Eulerian Elements
Solid Elements
CHEXA Connection definition for a brick element with eight grid points
CPENTA Connection definition for a wedge element with six grid points
CTETRA Connection definition for a tetrahedral element with four grid points
PEULER Property definition for CHEXA, CPENTA CTETRA
PEULER1 Property definition for CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA using geometrical regions
Constitutive Models
DMAT General constitutive model
DMATEL Isotropic elastic material properties
DMATEP Elastic or elastoplastic material properties
DMATOR Orthotropic material properties
DYMAT14 Soil and crushable foam material properties
DYMAT24 Piecewise linear plasticity material properties, with strain rate dependent plasticity
DYMAT25 Kinematic hardening Cap material properties
DYMAT26 Orthotropic crushable material properties used to model composites
FABRIC Bi-directional woven fabric material properties
FOAM1 Crushable foam material properties
FOAM2 Crushable foam material properties
MAT1 Linear-isotropic material properties
MAT2 Anisotropic material properties
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 144 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Yield Models
YLDHY Hydrodynamic yield properties
YLDVM von Mises yield properties
YLDJC Johnson-Cook yield properties
YLDMC Mohr-Coulomb yield properties
YLDTM Tanimura-Mimura yield properties
YLDZA Zerilli-Armstrong yield properties
YLDRPL Rate power law yield properties
YLDMSS Snow material yield properties
YLDPOL Polynomial yield properties
YLDEX User-defined yield properties
Shear Models
SHREL Elastic shear properties
SHRLVE Isotropic linear viscoelastic shear properties
SHRPOL Polynomial shear properties
SHREX User-defined shear properties
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 145 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Equations of State
EOSPOL Polynomial equation of state
EOSJWL JWL explosive equation of state
EOSGAM Gamma law equation of state
EOSTAIT Equation of state based on Tait model
EOSEX Equation of state defined by user subroutines
EOSIG Ignition and growth equation of state
Detonation Models
DETSPH Spherical detonation wave
Failure Models
FAILEST Maximum equivalent stress and minimum time-step failure model
FAILEX Failure model defined by user subroutines
FAILEX1 Extended failure model defined by user subroutines
FAILMES Maximum equivalent stress failure model
FAILMPS Maximum plastic strain failure model
FAILPRS Maximum pressure failure model
FAILSDT Maximum plastic strain and minimum time-step failure model
Spallation Models
PMINC Constant spallation pressure properties
Rigid Bodies
MATRIG Rigid-body properties
RBE2 Rigid-body element
RELEX MADYMO or ATB ellipsoid to be used with Dytran
RPLEX MADYMO planes to be used in Dytran
RELLIPS Analytical rigid ellipsoid
RIGID Rigid-body properties
SURFACE Geometry of a rigid body
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 146 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATB Interface
ATBACC Acceleration field applied to ATB segments
ATBJNT Interface to ATB joints
ATBSEG Interface to ATB segments
Lagrangian Constraints
Single-Point Constraints
GRDSET Includes the default for single-point constraints on the GRID entry
GRID Includes the single-point constraint definition (permanentSPCs)
SPC Single-point constraint to put velocity components to zero
SPC1 Single-point constraint to put velocity components to zero
SPC2 Rotational velocity constraint
SPC3 Single-point constraint to put velocity components to zero in a local
coordinate system
Contact Surfaces
CONTACT Defines contact between Lagrangian objects
CONTINI Defines initialization of contact state between two subsurfaces
CONTREL Defines rigid-ellipsoid contact with Lagrangian grid points or rigid bodies
SURFACE Defines a multifaceted surface
SUBSURF Defines a multifaceted subsurface
CSEG Defines segments of a surface
CFACE Defines segments of a surface
CFACE1 Defines segments of a surface
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 147 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Connections
JOIN Defines a rigid connection between grid points of 1-D, shell, and solids
BJOIN Defines a breakable rigid connection between grid points of 1-D and
shell elements
KJOIN Defines the kinematic join of shell and solid grid points
RCONN Defines a rigid connection between two surfaces
RCONREL Defines a connection with rigid ellipsoids for grids and surfaces
RJCYL Cylindrical-joint constraint between rigid bodies
RJPLA Planar-joint constraint between rigid bodies
RJREV Revolute-joint constraint between rigid bodies
RJSPH Spherical-joint constraint between rigid bodies
RJTRA Translational-joint constraint between rigid bodies
RJUNII Universal-joint constraint between rigid bodies
Rigid Walls
WALL Defines a rigid wall for grid points
Lagrangian Loading
Transient Loading
TLOAD1 Defines the transient load
TLOAD2 Defines the transient time-varying load
DAREA Defines the position and scale factor of a concentrated load
FORCE Defines the position and scale factor of a concentrated force
FORCE1 Defines a follower force, form 1
FORCE2 Defines a follower force, form 2
MOMENT Defines the position and scale factor of a concentrated moment
MOMENT1 Defines a follower moment, form 1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 148 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Enforced Motion
TLOAD1 Defines the transient enforced motion
TLOAD2 Defines the transient time-varying enforced motion
DAREA Defines the direction and scale factor of motion
FORCE Defines the direction and scale factor of motion
FORCE3 Defines the direction and scale factor of motion in local coordinate systems
FORCEEX Enforced translational velocity defined by user subroutines
MOMENT Defines the direction and scale factor of motion
Initial Conditions
TIC Defines transient initial velocities of grid points
TIC1 Defines transient initial velocities of grid points
TIC2 Defines an initial rotational velocity field for grid points
TICEL Defines the transient initial conditions of element variables
TICGP Defines the transient initial conditions of grid point variables
TICEEX Transient initial conditions of element variables defined by user subroutines
TICGEX Transient initial conditions of grid-point variabled by a user-written subroutine
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 149 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Flow Boundary
TLOAD1 Defines the transient load
FLOW Defines the flow boundary
FLOWEX Flow boundary defined by user subroutines
FLOWDEF Defines the free Eulerian faces to be a flow boundary by default
POREX Defines a porosity model through a user-written subroutine
PORFLOW Defines a porous flow boundary
PORHOLE Defines a hole in a couple and/or GBAG(sub)surface
PORLHOLE Defines a large hole in a couple and/or GBAG (sub)surface
CSEG Defines the face to which the flow boundary is applied
CFACE Defines the face to which the flow boundary is applied
CFACE1 Defines the face to which the flow boundary is applied
Wall
WALLET Defines a wall for Eulerian material flow
Gravity
GRAV Defines the gravitational load
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 150 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Initial Conditions
TIC Defines the initial rotational grid-point velocities for ALEGRIDpoints
TICGP Defines the transient initial grid-point variables
TICEL Defines the transient initial condition for element variables
TICEUL Defines the transient initial conditions for element variables using
geometric regions
TICVAL Defines the transient initial conditions
CYLINDER, Defines the geometrical shapes
SPHERE, BOX
Euler/Lagrange Coupling
COUP1FL Defines the surrounding variables when a segment of a coupling surface fails
COUP1INT Defines the interaction between two coupling surfaces
COUPLE Defines the general coupling between the Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes
COUPLE1 Defines the general coupling between the Roe solver for single hydro materials
and Lagrangian structures
COUOPT Defines the coupling options
COUPOR Defines the coupling surface or subsurface porosity
ALE Defines the arbitrary Lagrange-Euler (ALE) coupling
GBAG Gas bag pressure definition
GBAGC Defines flow between two gas bags
GBAGCOU General coupling to gas bag switch to save CPU time
SURFACE Defines the coupling surface
SUBSURF Defines the subsurface
Miscellaneous
Comments
$ For inserting comments in Bulk Data Section
Parameters
PARAM Specifies values for the parameters used in the solution
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 151 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Tabular Input
TABLED1 Tabular functions for loads, properties, materials, etc.
TABLEEX Analytical function for loads, properties, materials, etc. defined
by user subroutines
Sets
SET1 Sets of numbers for use by other entries
SETC Sets of names for use by other entries
Solution Control
ACTIVE Activates or deactivates elements and interaction
VISCDMP Defines dynamic relaxation factors for damping
Output
SECTION Cross section
Prestress Analysis
NASINIT Defines the prestress analysis logistics
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 152 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 153 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Comment
Anything that appears after a $ on a line is treated as a comment and is ignored. If a $ appears as the first
character, the entire line is a comment.
Remark
If a comment is placed in fields which would otherwise contain data, the data in those fields is given the
fields’ default values.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 154 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ACTIVE
+ TIME TIMEV
+ TABLE 1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 155 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
• TYPE
• TYPEV
• ELEMENT
• SHTRIA
• SHQUAD
• MEMTRIA
• DUMTRIA
• DUMQUAD
• LAGSOLID
• EULHYDRO
• EULSTRENGTH
• MULTIEULHYDRO
• ELEM1D
• INTERACT CONTACT
• COUPLE
• GBAG
• RIGID SURFACE
TIME Type specification for switches. C Required
TABLEPart is switched on and off, depending on the y-value of
the table with ID as specified in TIMEV. The x-value of the table
represents the time; the y-value means:
ON y > 0
OFF y < 0
TIMEV Number of a TABLED1 or TABLEEX I>0 Required
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 156 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The default is all parts of the program are active at all times.
2. For CONTACT, an activity switch can also be set on the entry itself. These settings overrule
settings on the ACTIVE entry.
3. The active option for multimaterial with shear strength is activated by using
TYPEV = MULTIEULHYDRO.
4. For COUPLE and C in combination with PARAM, LIMITER, ROE, an activity switch can also be
set on the COUPLE1entry. These settings overrule the settings on the ACTIVE entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 157 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ALE
Remarks
1. SIDLG and SIDEU must reference the SID of a SURFACE entry.
2. The Eulerian and Lagrangian SURFACEs must have a one-to-one correspondence. This means
that the Eulerian and Lagrangian grid points in the SURFACEs must coincide in physical but not
in logical space (same position, different number).
3. The tolerance used in finding coinciding SURFACE nodes is defined by the ALETOL parameter.
4. ALE is not applicable in combination with the single material Euler solver with a
full-stress tensor. (EULSTRENGTH), please use the multimaterial solver instead
of (MULTIEULSTRENGTH).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 158 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ALEGRID
+ G1 G2 THRU G3 BY G4 -etc-
+ 1 2 THRU 15 BY 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 159 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The MINCUT and MAXCUT parameters define the minimum and maximum allowable grid-point
velocity of ALE grid points. Usually the defaults are sufficient.
Δq
u g = ma x ⎛ MINCUT ------- , u g ⎞ ⋅ sig n ( u g )
⎝ Δt ⎠
Δq
u g = min ⎛ MINCUT -------, u g ⎞ ⋅ sig n ( u g )
⎝ Δt ⎠
where Δ q is the element characteristic dimension and Δt is the time step.
2. The TYPE definition causes the grid point motion algorithm to define grid point velocities
as follows:
where n is the normal to the free surface. u f s is the free surface velocity defined
as:
∑ vi
i =1 -
u f s = -------------
N
with vi the material velocity of the elements connected to the grid point.
ug
ten ta ti ve
is the tentative grid point velocity.
FIXED: Grid points that are defined as FIXED move as on a fixed wall.
ug = ug – ( ug ⋅ n ⋅ n)
tentative ten ta ti ve
ug = u g + [( ug – ug ) ⋅ t] ⋅ t
int t ent at ive i nt
where gi n t is the grid point velocity of the closest internal grid point.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 160 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. More than one ALEGRID entry can occur in input, with each one having a different type
definition. All ALEGRID entries that have the same AID are merged into one definition. This
requires a consistent definition with respect to the options of all of the ALEGRID entries that have
the same AID.
4. The number of relaxation iterations for the grid point displacement is one by default but can be
changed using PARAM,ALEITR.
5. There can be as many continuation lines as necessary.
6. The weight factors determine the grid point motion. If the option is set to COMPUTED (default),
Dytran computes the weight factors based on geometrical considerations. If the option is set to
EQUAL, all weight factors are set to a constant. The latter is automatically done when a local
distortion of the Eulerian mesh is encountered that does not allow for the computation of the
weight factors.
7. If the TYPE field is set to USER, all other fields are ignored except the NAME field which
is mandatory.
8. For a description of user-written subroutines, see Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 161 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ALEGRID1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 162 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 163 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The ALEGRID1 mesh motion algorithm has the following features:
No limit on the number of neighboring grid points exists. This is in contrast to the ALEGRID
algorithm where a limit of eight neighboring nodes exists.
The velocity of the grid points is based on a changing weight factor, which is calculated
accordingly
∑ ( Δ l gi × u gi )
u g = -----------------------------------
∑ Δ lg i
ug = the velocity component of the Eulerian grid point
ug = the velocity component of the neighbor grid points i
i
Δ lg = the distance between the Eulerian grid point and the neighbor grid points i
i
2. When the Lagrangian mesh is moving very fast it can happen that the Eulerian mesh is not
properly following the structure, and Eulerian elements get distorted.
The mesh motion can be improved by increasing the value of PARAM,ALEITR. Multiple
iterations per time step will be performed to determine the grid point velocities.
3. Multiple SET1 entries with the same SID are automatically concatenated.
4. A combination of ALEGRID and ALEGRID1 entries in one analysis model is not allowed.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 164 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATBACC
Remarks
1. The acceleration a(t) is defined as:
a ( t ) = T ( t ) * SCALE * N
where SCALE is the acceleration scale factor; N is the vector defined by NX, NY, and NZ; T(t) is
the value interpolated at time t from the table referenced by the TLOADn entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
3. The type field on the TLOADn entry must be set to zero.
4. More than one ATBACC acceleration field can be defined per problem.
5. This acceleration field is intended to apply a crash pulse to ATB segments that define a crash
dummy. The acceleration is multiplied by the mass of the segment and the resulting force is added
as an external force.
6. To compare the accelerations of the ATB segments to experiments, the crash pulse needs to be
subtracted from the total acceleration. The acceleration of the segments as defined on the H1
entries in the ATB input file are automatically corrected.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 165 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATBJNT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 166 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 167 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remark
All elements related to an ATB segment refer to the same material number. This material number is
defined on the ATBSEG entry. If the material is defined to be rigid by means of a MATRIG entry, all
elements can be easily connected to the contact ellipsoid of the ATB segment by means of an RCONREL
entry referencing the MATRIG entry. In this way, all elements related to an ATB segment move together
with the ATB segment during the analyses and can be postprocessed.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 168 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATBSEG
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 169 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 170 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All elements related to an ATB segment reference the same material number. This material
number is defined on the ATBSEG entry. If the material is defined as rigid by means of a
MATRIGentry, all elements can be easily connected to the contact ellipsoid of the ATB segment
by means of an RCONREL entry referencing the MATRIGentry. In this way, all elements related
to an ATB segment move together with the ATB segment during the analysis and can be
postprocessed. The elements can also be used in a CONTACT ALE, and/or COUPLING surface to
define interaction between the ATB segment and other parts of the finite element model. The
forces and moments acting on the elements are transferred to the ATB segment to which they
are connected.
2. The MATRIG entry written to the file has the inertia properties of the segment, as defined in the
ATB input file.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 171 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BEGIN BULK
Remark
A BEGIN BULK entry must always be present.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 172 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BIAS
Bias definition
Specifies a variation of the mesh-size in one direction for use in the MESH entry. The MESH entry can
create a biased or non-uniform mesh. A uniform mesh consists of a number of planes separated by a fixed
distance, but for a biased mesh the distance between subsequent planes can differ. The BIAS definition
allows specifying the locations of planes in one direction. For a number of intervals the density of planes
can be specified.
GROWi GROWi is the ratio between the step size at the beginning of the
interval and at the end of the interval. If it is smaller than 1.0 then
the mesh refines when going from the beginning of the interval to
the end of the interval.
Ni Ni is the number of elements inside the interval.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 173 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The begin point of the first interval has to be equal the X0 field of the MESH entry and may be left
unspecified. The end point of the last interval is given by X0+DX as specified by the MESH entry.
In the example above the first interval is given by [-4.5, -1], The second one by [-1,1] and the last
one by [1,4.5], assuming that X0+DX =4.5 on the MESH entry that uses the bias definition as a
IBIDX.
2. The locations of the planes are written out in the OUT file as part of MESH output. Also the total
number of elements is written out.
3. Here it is assumed that the BIAS ID-number was used on the IBIDX field of the MESH entry.
4. GRWTHi is not equal 1.0 the smallest mesh-size in an interval is given by:
X(i + 1) – X(i)
-----------------------------------------------------------------
G RO WS M * GRS TP – 1-
----------------------------------------------------------------
GRST P – 1
where
1
---------------
Ni – 1
GRS TP = GROW S M
Here GROWSM is the maximum of GROWTHi and 1.0/GROWTHi, which is the ratio between the
largest mesh size and smallest mesh-size. Furthermore X(i) denotes Xi and X(i+1) denotes the
next Xi value. The locations of the planes are written to the OUT file. In addition, the growth of
the element sizes is written out in the next column. This is given as the ratio in element size
between the layer of elements to the right of the plane and to the left of the plane. Let x0, x1 and
x2 denote three subsequent planes, then the element size to the left of the x1-plane is given x1-x0
and to the right it is given by x2-x1. The ratio by which the element size grows if one goes across
the x1-plane is:
X 2 – X 1-
--------------------
X1 – X0
To get physically meaningful results, this value should not exceed 1.3 or be smaller than 0.7
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 174 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BJOIN
Breakable Join
Defines (multiple) pairs of grid points of one-dimensional and/or shell elements to be joined during
the analysis. When the failure criterion for a grid point pair is satisfied, the grid point pair is removed
from the join and the grid point motion is computed for the separate grid points. The join ceases to exist
when all pairs of the join have failed, after which all of the grid points of the join are treated as separate
grid points
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 175 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 176 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
No
failure
No
failure
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 177 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CRIT : No meaning.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 178 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. If the TYPE field is set to USER, the user subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the
USERCODE FMS statement.
2. The breakable joins can only be used for grid points of Lagrangian one-dimensional and shell
elements. Note that any grid point can be made into a one-dimensional grid-point type by
connecting a dummy spring to the grid point.
3. The constant force or constant moment failure criterion (TYPE=FOMO) is met once the following
inequality is true:
2 2 2 2
( F x1 – F x2 ) + ( F y1 – F y2 ) + ( F z1 – F z2 ) > F
In the above formula, F is either a force or a moment. F max is the value defined in the
VALUEn fields.
4. If component failure is requested (TYPE=COMPO), the comparison is performed for each
component of the force and moment vector. Depending on the criterion-type definition, the forces,
the moments, or both are taken into account to determine whether the join fails.
5. In component failure, note that if one of the determining failure component values is left blank,
this component can never cause the join to fail.
6. The first entity that satisfies the criterion for failure will cause the join to fail.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 179 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. The undefined components in component failure are automatically set to infinity. This means that
when failure on force components is requested, the moment criteria are set to infinity. The same
is true for the forces when moment component failure is requested.
8. The user-defined criterion name can be a maximum of eight characters long.
9. At the moment of failure, an informational message is written to the output file.
10. The breakable joins for skin-stringer delamination (TYPE=RUPTURE) can only be used for beam-
shell element connections. This type of connection can also be defined by the PWELD entry. The
PWELD1 definition has an additional advantage in that it gives you access to the load on the
connection. SeePWELD1 for more details.
11. A solid-shell connection, like for example the connection of the facing and core of a sandwich
structure can be modeled using the PWELD2 entry. See PWELD2for more details.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 180 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BODYFOR
ELLIPS :Ellipsoid
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 181 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
LAGRANGE:
ELEM1D
SHTRIA
SHQUAD
MEMTRIA
LAGSOLID
EULER:
EULHYDRO
EULSTREN
EULMM
ELLIPS:
ELLIPS ID
GRID:
SET1 ID
CID Number of a CORDxxx entry I≥0 0
SCALE Scale factor for the load: C CONSTA
NT
CONSTANT: Constant scale factor.
Remarks
1. The default for entity TYPEV is all entities of TYPE.
2. By default the components are zero, but at least one of them should be nonzero.
3. Only one BODYFOR entry per type of entity TYPEV is allowed.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 182 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BOX
Remarks
1. The box is aligned with the coordinates axis.
2. Initial conditions are defined for the elements that are fully or partially inside the box. See Dytran
User’s Guide, Chapter 3: Constraints and Loading, Eulerian Loading and Constraints
3. See also TICEUL Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 183 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BOX1
+ X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2 +
+ 0 0 0 0 0 1 +
+ X3 Y3 Z3 X4 Y4 Z4 +
+ 0 0 1 1 0 0 +
+ X5 Y5 Z5 X6 Y6 Z6 +
+ 0 1 0 0 0 1 +
+ X7 Y7 Z7 X8 Y8 Z8
+ 0 0 1 1 1 0
Remarks
1. The Box1 allows a general box and edges do not need to be aligned with the coordinates axis. The
eight grid points define the box identical to the CHEXA grid point numbering. Points may
coincide as illustrated in the example values. These values give a pyramid shape.
2. Initial conditions are defined for the elements that are fully or partially inside the box. See
Eulerian Loading and Constraints.
3. See also TICEUL Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 184 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CBAR
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 185 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. The third grid point is used to specify a vector from G1 to G3. The local x-axis of the beam is in
the direction of the beam from point G1 to G2. The local y-axis is perpendicular to the beam in
the plane containing the vector from G1 to G3. The local z-axis is perpendicular to the local x and
y-axes (see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 2: Elements, Beam Elements ).
3. If field 6 (X1, G3) is an integer, G3 is used to define the x-y plane. If field 6 (X1, G3) is real, X1,
X2, and X3 are used.
4. The following figures define the elemental force and moment sign convention (a and b are
equivalent with G1 and G2, respectively).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 186 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CBEAM
Beam-Element Connectivity
Defines a beam element.
+ COORD
+
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 187 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. The third grid point is used to specify a vector from G1 to G3. The local x-axis of the beam is in
the direction of the beam from point G1 to G2. The local y-axis is perpendicular to the beam in
the plane containing the vector from G1 to G3. The local z-axis is perpendicular to the local x-
and y-axes (See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 2: Elements, Beam Elements).
3. If field 6 (X1, G3) is an integer, G3 is used to define the x-y plane. If field 6 (X1, G3) is real, X1,
X2, and X3 are used.
4. Offset vectors are treated like rigid elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 188 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CDAMP1
Damper Connectivity
Defines a scalar damper element.
+ CORD FOLLOW
+ 3 G1
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. The damper always acts in the direction given by C1 and C2 regardless of the relative positions
of the grid points. CVISC defines a damper with an orientation that changes during the analysis.
3. Setting G1 or G2 to zero gives a grounded damper.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 189 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 190 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CDAMP2
Linear Damper
Defines a linear scalar damper element where the damping coefficient is defined directly.
+ CORD FOLLOW
+ 3 G1
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. The damper always acts in the direction given by C1 and C2, regardless of the relative positions of
the grid points. CVISC defines a damper with an orientation that can change during the analysis.
3. Setting G1 or G2 to zero gives a grounded damper.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 191 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 192 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CELAS1
Scalar-Spring Connection
Defines a scalar-spring element.
+ CORD FOLLOW
+ 3 G1
Remarks
1. A grounded spring is defined by setting G1 or G2 to zero in which case the corresponding C1 or
C2 is zero or blank. (A grounded grid point is a grid point where the displacement is constrained
to zero.)
2. Element numbers must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
3. The connection grid points G1 and G2 must be distinct.
4. If the degree of freedom is defined in a nonbasic coordinate system, the degrees of freedom G1
and G2 must be equal or one must be grounded.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 193 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 194 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CELAS2
+ CORD FOLLOW
+ 3 G1
Remarks
1. A grounded spring is defined by:
a. Setting G1 or G2 to zero in which case the corresponding C1 or C2 is zero or blank.
b. Using a scalar point for G1 and/or G2 in which case the corresponding C1 and/or C2 is zero
or blank. (A grounded grid point is a grid point where the displacement is constrained to zero.)
2. Element numbers must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
3. This entry completely defines the element since no material or geometric properties are required.
4. The two connection points G1 and G2 must be distinct.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 195 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. If the degree of freedom is defined in a nonbasic coordinate system, the degrees of freedom G1
and G2 must be equal or one must be grounded.
6. The coordinate system CORD must be rectangular.
7. For fast rotating structures it is advised to use a CORD3R or CORD4R to define the follow motion.
A moving coordinate system CORD4R is updated according to the full-rotation equations, while
a direction vector that rotates with G1 or G2 is updated using the Hughes-Winget relation. The
Hughes-Winget relation becomes less accurate when the rotation angle per time step is very high.
8. If possible, use of thePELAS, CELAS1 entries is preferable. Many CELAS2 elements result in
excessive input manipulation and storage.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 196 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CFACE
Face of an Element
Defines a face on an Eulerian or a Lagrangian element.
Remarks
1. The face number FID must be unique with respect to all other face numbers.
2. The CSEG entry is also used to define faces in terms of the grid-point numbers. The CFACE1
entry is also used to define faces.
3. A negative face number indicates that the face normal direction is reversed.
4. The element-face numbers are as follows:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 197 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 198 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CFACE1
Face of an Element
Defines a face on an element in terms of the element number and two grid points on the required face.
This is particularly suitable for defining the faces on solid elements.
Remark
A PLOAD4 entry with an absolute pressure of 9999. is automatically converted to a CFACE1 entry. This
makes defining CFACE1 entries in preprocessors very easy. See also Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9:
Running the Analysis, Using a Modeling Program with Dytran.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 199 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CHEXA
+ G7 G8
+ 9 10
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 200 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. Grid points G1 through G4 must be given in consecutive order about one quadrilateral face. G5
through G8 must be on the opposite face with G5 opposite G1, G6 opposite G2, etc.
3. Number according to the figure shown in this CHEXA entry description.
4. The property number references a PSOLID or a PEULER entry. This determines whether the
element is Lagrangian or Eulerian.
5. Only the first eight grid points on a CHEXA are used in Dytran. The excess is ignored.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 201 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CMARKB2
Remarks
1. A CMARKB2 element may refer to two types of grid points:
a. Structural grid points, thus grid points that are part of the connectivity of an element.
b. Free grid points in space. These grid points do not have mass associated with them. The
motion of these grid points is specified by the PMARKER property.
2. The ID must be unique in the model and may not be used as structural element ID.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 202 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CMARKN1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 203 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONM2
Remarks
1. All grid points in the model must have mass associated with them, either by the properties of the
elements attached to the grid point or by using a CONM2 entry.
2. When PARAM,CONM2OUT is set to NO, there is no summary on the CONM2 entries defined. This
means that the mass, momentum, and energy of the CONM2s are not added to the material and
cycle summaries. Setting PARAM,CONM2OUT,NO saves memory and CPU time.
3. The CONM2 results cannot be output on time-history or archive files.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 204 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTACT
Contact Surface
Defines contact between Lagrangian grid points and elements. The algorithm is based on the contact of
slave nodes with master faces.
+ TENDNEW
+
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 205 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See
Remark
6.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 206 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See
Remark
6.
SID Number of a SURFACE entry if STYPE = SURF, or number I>0 Required
of a SET1 entry if STYPE = ELEM, PROP, MAT, or GRID, or
number of a SETC entry if STYPE = ELLIPS.
MID Number of a SURFACE entry if MTYPE = SURF, or number I>0
of a SET1 entry if MTYPE = ELEM, PROP, MAT, or GRID, or
number of a SETC entry if MTYPE = ELLIPS.
FS Static coefficient of friction (See Remark 3.) R 0.0
FK Kinetic coefficient of friction (See Remark 3.) R 0.0
EXP Exponential decay coefficient (See Remark 3.) R 0.0
VERSIO Version of the algorithm (See Remark 3.): C Required
N
V2: Obsolete (use V4 version)
V3: Obsolete (use V4 version).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 207 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
The slave node does not slide relative to the master face when
the friction coefficient (FS) is set to 1E20.
BELT1: Identical to BELT algorithm, except that the slave
nodes are initially repositioned on top of the closest master
face.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 208 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 209 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NO: The contact is nonadaptive, and all the master faces are
active during the whole analysis.
Shell elements – At time zero all the master faces are active.
Once an element fails, its corresponding master face will be
deactivated. The contact treats it as an actual hole.
Lagrangian solids – At time zero only the free faces are active.
All the internal faces are deactivated. When an element fails,
some of its faces might become free faces. These free faces
will be activated. Once all the elements connected to a master
face have failed, it is deactivated for the remainder of the
analyses. This logic allows for modeling of impact-
penetration phenomena, and is sometimes called “eroding
contact.”
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 210 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MASTER M scal e = M ma st er
Recommended usage:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 211 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 212 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 213 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 214 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. See also the information on the contact algorithm in the Getting Started Manual.
2. The SETC ID referred to by ELLIPS may contain more than one ellipsoid. The ELLIPS option
may only use the V4 contact algorithm and the default thickness factor for the ELLIPS option
is 0.0.
3. The coefficient of friction is given by:
– βv
μ = μ k + ( u s – μ k )e
where
4. When a nonzero value has been specified for THICK and/or GAP, a contact thickness is assigned
to both the slave nodes and the master faces
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 215 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
where
t _c on t ac t = contact thickness
TH ICK = scale factor for shell thickness
t _sh el l = shell thickness
GAP = artificial contact thickness
t_contact = GA P
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 216 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 217 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
b. Use of a contact thickness prevents losing contacts in the “dead region” on the “penetrated
side” of neighboring master faces. When a slave node enters the “dead region” between
neighboring master faces, it is not projected on either face, and the contact is lost:
Using a contact thickness has the disadvantage that an unwanted initial penetration
might occurs where the edge of shell elements meets a master surface. The following is a
good example:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 218 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. The search for the closest master face for a slave node is performed by a normal projection of the
slave node on the faces of the master surface. For the search option FULL, all faces of the master
surface are taken into account. This is the most reliable option, but takes the most
computational time.
The SLIDE search option searches for the closest master face under the assumption that a slave
node will only slide from the current master face to its neighbors during one time step. This search
algorithm is much faster than the FULL option. However, this search option can cause problems
for slave nodes that have entered the “dead-region” on the “penetrated side” between neighboring
master faces, where it can not be projected on either face, and the contact is lost because of that.
The BPLANE search option alleviates the problems for slave nodes that have entered the “dead-
region” by creating automatically a plane perpendicular to the folding line between two master
faces. Contact for slave nodes that reside in the back-up plane area is preserved and the nodes
remain in the contact search algorithm. A force perpendicular to the BPLANE is applied to those
nodes, since they are on the penetrated side of the master surface.
Because the BPLANE search algorithm is very fast, it is the recommended contact search
algorithm for air bag analysis.
The BPFULL algorithm combines features of the FULL search contact algorithm and the BPLANE
search contact algorithm. The same back-up planes are generated as the BPLANE contact;
however, new contacts can be initialized during the simulation. This new initiation is especially
important for air bags that have large internal open regions and where contacts between layers
occur later during the simulation time. Special care is taken into account to initialize the correct
side of the master face so that hooking behind layers is reduced to a minimum. Consequently, this
type of contact is very CPU intensive. To this end, the new search algorithm can be skipped after
a certain time has been reached. This time can be defined by the user with the TENDNEW entry on
the CONTACT option. After this time has been reached, no new contact is searched for.
Effectively, after the new TENDNEW is reached, the BPFULL contact algorithm behaves the same
as the regular BPLANE contact algorithm.
6. An edge-to-edge contact is defined by specifying the surfaces of which you want the free edges
to be included in the contact definition. The “free” edges are derived only from the supplied
elements within those surfaces. This means that they are not necessarily the real free edges of
the model.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 219 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Limitation: when you want to use the edge-to-edge contact, you need to define a contact entry
that has both the master and the slave surface in contact be of the type SURFEDGE. Of course,
you can combine “normal” contact definitions with the edge-to-edge definition. Please note that
each contact must be separately defined as a contact specification.
You can influence the behavior of the searching algorithm that defines the edges that are in
contact. By default, the edge contact is recognized when the direction of the velocity of the point
that has potential contact is in the direction of the normal to the edge. This criterion may be too
strict for some occasions. Therefore, with the EVIEW definition on the contact specification you
may define an angle that defines a 3-D cone with the edge normal as the center line. When the
velocity vector of a point searching for contact with an edge falls within this 3-D cone, the point
is considered for contact with the edge. If the velocity vector of the point falls outside the 3-D
cone, the point is ignored in the contact search. You can use this parameter when you encounter
spurious edge-to-edge contact situations.
7. In case of V4 contact, REVERSE=ON takes effect only for edge-to-edge and master-slave
contacts. For master-slave contact, it is only necessary to align the face normal when the SIDE
entry is TOP or BOTTOM. For other situations, in principle, it is not necessary without violating
the contact constraints.
8. TENDNEW is used only when the BPFULL contact search algorithm is used. After the TENDNEW
time is reached, no new contacts are searched for.
9. A detailed description of the slave node (de)activation methods is given here. These methods are
only available for VERSION = V4:
When a master surface might fold onto itself, is more suited for eroding master-slave contact
behaves as a single surface.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 220 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
METHOD1 Nodes become active as slave once they reside on the outside of the mesh. In
case of master slave contact, nodes on the master surface will not act as a slave.
Nodes will be deactivated as slave once all connected elements have failed.
METHOD2 Nodes become active as slave once they reside on the outside of the mesh. In
case of master-slave contact, nodes on the master surface will not act as a slave.
Nodes will remain active as slave once all connected elements have failed.
METHOD3 Nodes are active as slave from the start of the calculation, independent of
whether they reside on the inside or the outside of the mesh. In case of master-
slave contact, nodes on the master surface will not act as a slave.
Nodes will be deactivated as slave once all connected elements have failed.
METHOD4 Nodes are active as slave from the start of the calculation, independent of
whether they reside on the inside or the outside of the mesh. In case of master-
slave contact, nodes on the master surface will not act as a slave.
Nodes will remain active as slave once all connected elements have failed.
METHOD1A For master-slave contact only. Nodes become active as slave once they reside
on the outside of the mesh. Nodes on the master surface will also act as slave,
once they reside on the outside of the mesh. This method is more suited for
eroding master-slave contact than METHOD1.
Nodes will be deactivated as slave once all connected elements have failed.
METHOD2A For master-slave contact only. Nodes become active as slave once they reside
on the outside of the mesh. Nodes on the master surface will also act as slave,
once they reside on the outside of the mesh. This method is more suited for
eroding master-slave contact than METHOD2.
Nodes will remain active as slave once all connected elements have failed.
METHOD3A For master-slave contact only. Nodes are active as slave from the start of the
calculation, independent of whether they reside on the inside or the outside of
the mesh. Nodes on the master surface will also act as slave, once they reside on
the outside of the mesh. This method is more suited for eroding master-slave
contact than METHOD3.
Nodes will be deactivated as slave once all connected elements have failed.
METHOD4A For master-slave contact only. Nodes are active as slave from the start of the
calculation, independent of whether they reside on the inside or the outside of
the mesh. Nodes on the master surface will also act as slave, once they reside on
the outside of the mesh. This method is more suited for eroding master-slave
contact than METHOD4.
Nodes will remain active as slave once all connected elements have failed.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 221 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
To choose the correct slave activity switch, you can use the following flow schemes. The selection
of a method depends on the desired results, and can be captured by three questions:
a. Only nodes on the outside of the mesh are active?
In most cases only the slave nodes on the outside need to be active.
In cases of high-velocity impact, it might be necessary to activate the internal slave nodes also.
This will prevent missing contacts for slave nodes that move across the monitoring region of
the master face during the time-step it is activated.
b. Deactivate slave nodes when all connected elements have failed?
This determines whether slave nodes will remain active after all its connected elements have
failed. This option only applies to an adaptive contact.
c. Nodes on the master surface will also act as slave?
When a master surface might fold onto itself this will prevent the master surface from
penetrating itself. Therefore the master surface will behave as a single surface.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 222 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 223 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 224 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 225 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTFORC
F contact = K d
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 226 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Either K or LOAD must be specified.
2. None or just one of the options B-CONST, or B-TABLE must be specified.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 227 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTINI
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 228 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTINI,-,INIID,SUBID2,SUBID1
Remarks
1. By default the SIDE is equal to the SIDE as specified on the CONTACT entry.
2. It is allowed to have multiple CONTINIs defined for a slave subsurface. If a grid point of a slave
subsurface (SUBID1) finds a contact in more than one master subsurface, only the ones with the
highest level are accepted.
For example, suppose a subsurf is used as slave in three CONTINI definitions:
CONTINI,1,101,SUBID1,SUBID2,,LEVEL1
CONTINI,2,101,SUBID1,SUBID3,,LEVEL2
CONTINI,3,101,SUBID1,SUBID4,,LEVEL3
When a slave node of SUBSURF,SUBID1 finds a contact in all three master SUBSURFs. The
following logic applies:
LEVEL1=LEVEL2=LEVEL3 Æ all contacts are accepted
LEVEL1>LEVEL2,LEVEL3 Æ only contact 1 is accepted
LEVEL1=LEVEL2>LEVEL3 Æ only contact 1 and 2 are accepted
LEVEL1,LEVEL2<LEVEL3 Æ only contact 3 and 2 are accepted
LEVEL1<LEVEL2>LEVEL3 Æ only contact 2 is accepted
3. The options LEVEL, SIDE, and REVERSE are only valid for contact version V4.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 229 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTREL
Remarks
1. For grid points attached to Lagrangian elements, the default for ARF is 1.0. For rigid surfaces, the
default is 0.1.
2. Only rigid surfaces can be defined in the SET1 entry and are referenced by their number. MATRIG
and RBE2-FULLRIGs cannot be referenced by this entry. Use the CONTACT entry instead.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 230 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD1C
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 231 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All coordinate system numbers must be unique.
2. The three grid points G1, G2, and G3 must not be colinear.
3. The location of a grid point in the coordinate system is given by ( R , θ , Z ) where θ is measured
in radians.
4. The velocity component directions at P depend on the location of P as shown above by Ur , Uθ ,
and U z , when the coordinate system is used in a motion prescription.
5. One or two coordinate systems may be defined on a single line.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 232 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD1R
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 233 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All coordinate system numbers must be unique.
2. The three grid points G1, G2, and G3 must not be collinear.
3. The location of a grid point in this coordinate system is given by ( X , Y , Z ).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 234 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD1S
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 235 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All coordinate system numbers must be unique.
2. The three grid points G1, G2, and G3 must not be collinear.
3. The location of a grid point in this coordinate system is given by ( R , θ , φ ) where θ and φ are
measured in degrees.
4. The velocity component directions at P depend on the location of P as shown above by Ur , Uθ ,
and U φ , when the coordinate system is used in a motion prescription.
5. Grid points on the polar axis may not have their displacement directions defined in this coordinate
system, since an ambiguity results.
6. One or two coordinate systems may be defined on a single line.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 236 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD2C
+ C1 C2 C3
+ 5.2 1.0 -2.9
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 237 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The continuation line must be present.
2. The three points (A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), and (C1, C2, C3) must be unique and must not
be collinear.
3. All coordinate system numbers must be unique.
4. The location of a grid point in the coordinate system is given by ( R , θ , Z ) where θ is measured
in degrees.
5. The velocity component directions at P depend on the location of P as shown above by Ur , Uθ ,
and U z when the coordinate system is used in a motion prescription.
6. A RID of zero references the basic coordinate system.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 238 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD2R
+ C1 C2 C3
+ 3.14 .1592 .653
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 239 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The continuation line must be present.
2. The three points (A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), and (C1, C2, C3) must be unique and must not
be co-linear.
3. All coordinate system numbers must be unique.
4. The location of a grid point in this coordinate system is given by ( X , Y , Z ).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 240 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD2S
+ C1 C2 C3
+ 5.2 1.0 -2.9
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 241 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The continuation line must be present.
2. The three points (A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3) and (C1, C2, C3) must be unique and must not be
co-linear.
3. All coordinate system numbers must be unique.
4. The location of a grid point in this coordinate system is given by ( R , θ , φ ) where θ and φ are
measured in degrees.
5. The velocity components directions at P depend on the location of P as shown above by Ur , Uθ ,
and U φ , when the coordinate system is used in a motion prescription.
6. Grid points on the polar axis may not have their displacement directions defined in this coordinate
system, since an ambiguity results.
7. A RID of zero references the basic coordinate system.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 242 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD3R
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 243 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All coordinate system numbers must be unique.
2. The three points G1, G2, G3 must not be collinear.
3. The location of a grid point P in this coordinate system is given by ( X , Y , Z ).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 244 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORD4R
+ C1 C2 C3 +
+ 5.2 1.0 -2.9 +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 245 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The continuation line must be present.
2. The three points (A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), and (C1, C2, C3) must be unique and must not
be co-linear.
3. All coordinate-system numbers must be unique.
4. The location of a grid point P in this coordinate system is given by ( X , Y , Z ).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 246 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CORDROT
Corotational-Frame Definition
Defines the direction of corotational axes in a material.
Remarks
1. The DMAT and DMATEL entries can refer to this type of coordinate system.
2. G1 defines the origin, G2 lies on the corotational z-axis, and G3 lies in the corotational
(X-Z) plane.
Figure 5-11 Element Corotational Frame According to the Example Given Above
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 247 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. The orientation of the element corotational frame is updated according to the spin of the element.
4. If the fields G1, G2, G3 are left blank, the default applies.
5. If it is referred by linear tetrahedron elements, the default of G1, G2, G3 is 1, 2, 4, respectively
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 248 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUHTR
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 249 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The same HTRTYPE entry referenced from this COUHTR entry can be referenced by a GBAGHTR
entry. This allows for setting up the exact same model for either a uniform pressure model or an
Euler Coupled model:
This makes it possible to set up the model using the switch from full gas dynamics to uniform
pressure (GBAGCOU).
2. A mixture of multiple COUHTR with different HTRTYPEs is allowed.
3. For the same SUBSURF, multiple different types of heat transfer may be defined.
4. A more detailed description can be found in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 6: Air Bags and
Occupant Safety, Porosity in Air Bags.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 250 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUINFL
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 251 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The INFLATR, INFLATR1, INFLHYB, or INFLHYB1 inflator geometry and location is defined
by a subsurface (SUBID). The area of the hole through which the gas enters is equal to the area
of the subsurface multiplied by COEFFV. A value of COEFFV = 1.0 opens up the complete
subsurface area, while a value of COEFFV = 0.0 results in a closed inflator area with no inflow.
2. The same INFTYPE entry referenced from this COUINFL entry can be referenced by a
GBAGINFL entry. This allows for setting up the exact same model for either a uniform pressure
model or an Euler Coupled model:
This makes it possible to set up the model using the switch from full gas dynamics to uniform
pressure (GBAGCOU).
3. One couple entry can reference more than one COUINFL entry. This allows for modeling multiple
inflators in an airbag module.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 252 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUOPT
Coupling Options
Defines the interaction factor and a pressure load from the covered side acting on a SURFACE
or SUBSURF.
+ PLCOVER PLCOVERV
+ CONSTANT 1.E5
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 253 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The effect of specifying an interaction FACTOR is similar to specifying a porosity coefficient on
a COUPOR entry. The difference is that in this case the SURFACE or SUBSURF still acts as a
wall boundary for the Eulerian material.
2. Applying a PLCOVER instead of applying a pressure load on the faces through either a PLOAD,
PLOAD4, or DAREA entry gives the following differences:
a. PLCOVER is applied only when there is a balancing Eulerian pressure greater than zero.
b. Possible porosity as defined on a COUPOR entry is taken into account when applying
the PLCOVER.
c. With PARAM,PLCOVCUT you can define a cut-off time that is applied to PLCOVER.
3. The covered side of a SURFACE lies on the side where there is no Eulerian material. See Dytran
User’s Guide, Chapter 4: Fluid Structure Interaction, General Coupling.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 254 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUP1FL
Remarks
1. This entry can only be used in combination withPARAM,FASTCOUP,FAIL and with either the
HYDRO, MMHYDRO, or MMSTREN Euler Solver. For restrictions on the use of COUP1FL
refer to param,flow-method. The coupling surface failure is associated with the element failure of
the structure to which the surface is connected. Therefore, you have to define a failure model for
the structure for the entry to take effect in the analysis.
2. For the Roe solver at least one of the surrounding variables should be defined. The default value
of the density (RHO) will be set equal to the reference density as defined on the DMAT entry and
the other variables (SIE, XVEL, YVEL, and ZVEL) are, by default, equal to zero.
3. The coupling surface must only consist of CQUADs and/or CTRIAs elements.
4. The PRESSURE field has to be left blank in combination with the Roe solver.
5. In combination with multi-material Euler, only outflow of material is allowed. Each material in
an outflow Euler element is transported. The materials are transported in proportion to their
relative volume fractions.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 255 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUP1INT
Remarks
1. This entry can only be used in combination with PARAM,FASTCOUP, ,FAIL and with either
the HYDRO, MMHYDRO or MMSTREN Euler Solver. For restrictions on the use of
COUP1INT refer to PARAM, FLOW-METHOD. The interaction will be activated when failure of
a Lagrangian structure on which the coupling surface lies is defined. Therefore, you have to define
a failure model for the material of the structure.
2. The coupling surface should consist of CQUADs and/or CTRIAs.
3. For more detail on modeling flow between Eulerian domains, see PARAM, FLOW-METHOD.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 256 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUPLE
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 257 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 258 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 259 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All coupling surfaces must from a multi-faceted closed volume. If necessary, additional segments
must be defined to achieve the closed volume. The closed volume must intersect at least one Euler
element initially.
2. All segments must de attached to the face of an element. Dummy elements can be used to define
any additional segments that are required to create the closed volume.
3. The normals of all segments that from the coupling surface must point in the same general
direction and result in a positive closed volume. Setting the REVERSE option to ON ensures that
this condition is satisfied, regardless of the initial definition of the segments.
4. The COVER field determines how Eulerian elements that are inside and outside of the coupling
surface are processed. The default setting of INSIDE is appropriate for most of the problems. In
the majority of analyses, the Eulerian material flows around the outside of the coupling surface.
Therefore, the Eulerian elements that fall within the coupling surface do not contain material.
For some specific applications, such as air bag inflation, the Eulerian material (gas) is completed
contained within the coupling surface. In these cases, the COVER definition should be set
to OUTSIDE.
5. When you want to use the fast coupling algorithm, you can define the parameter
PARAM,FASTCOUP in the input file. The algorithm then used is substantially faster than the
general coupling. The restriction is that you cannot use an arbitrarily shaped Euler mesh with the
fast coupling algorithm. All element faces of the Euler mesh must have their normal pointing in
any of the three basic coordinate directions. Thus, the mesh must be aligned with the three basic
coordinate directions.
6. The friction model implemented for the coupling algorithm is a simple Coulomb friction
definition. The friction coefficient μ is defined as:
–β ⋅ v
μ = μk + ( μ s – μk ) ⋅ e
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 260 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
where μ s is the static friction coefficient, μ k is the kinetic friction coefficient, β the exponential
decay coefficient and v the relative sliding at the point of contact.
7. An initial gas composition is for use with the single-material hydrodynamic Euler solver and an
ideal-gas equation of state (EOSGAM) only.
8. Multiple coupling surfaces are available when you associate one Eulerian domain with a single
coupling surface by either using the SET1ID or the MESHID option. Note that only one of the
two options may be set and work only in combination with the fast coupling algorithm defined by
PARAM,FASTCOUP.
9. The COUP1FL option is available and valid only in combination with the fast coupling algorithm
with the failure option (PARAM,PARAM, ,FAIL). If no number is given the default values of the
surrounding variables are used; the density (RHO) is set equal to the reference density as defined
on the DMAT entry. By default, the other variables (SIE, XVEL, YVEL, and ZVEL are set equal
to zero.
10. If an ACTIVE entry is present, its definition is ignored in case the TDEAC value is defined in
combination with the fast coupling algorithm (PARAM,FASTCOUP).
11. The skin friction is defined as:
τw
C f = --------2-
ρu
Here, τ w denotes the shear friction in an Euler element adjacent to a couple surface segment where
ρ is the density and u is the tangential relative velocity in the Euler element that is adjacent to a
couple surface segment.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 261 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUPLE1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 262 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All coupling surfaces must form a multifaceted closed volume. If necessary, additional segments
must be specified to achieve this.
2. All segments must be attached to the face of an element. Dummy elements must be used to define
any additional segments that are required to create a closed volume.
3. The normals of all the segments that form the coupling surface must point in the same general
direction and result in a positive closed volume. Setting the REVERSE field to ON ensures that
this condition is satisfied, regardless of how the segments are defined initially.
4. The COVER field determines how Eulerian elements that are inside and outside of the coupling
surface are processed. The default setting of INSIDE is appropriate for most problems, since in
the majority of analyses, the Eulerian material flows around the outside of the coupling surface.
Therefore, the Eulerian elements within the coupling surface are empty. However, for some
specialized applications (such as air bag inflation), the Eulerian material is completely contained
within the coupling surface, and in these cases COVER should be set to OUTSIDE.
5. For the fast coupling algorithm use PARAM,FASTCOUP.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 263 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 264 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUPOR
Coupling Porosity
Defines porosity for SURFACE and SUBSURFentries used in general coupling.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 265 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 266 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 267 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. A mixture of multiple COUPORs with different PORTYPEs is allowed.
2. All options of PORTYPE except PORFLOW, POREX, PORFCPL, and PORFLCPL can also be
referenced by a GBAGPOR. This makes it possible to setup the exact same model for either a
uniform pressure model (GBAG → GBAGPOR) or an Eulerian model (COUPLE→ COUPOR). It
allows for setting up the model using a switch from full gas dynamics to uniform
pressure (GBAGCOU).
3. The options PORFGBG and PERMGBG can be used to model air bags with
different compartments.
4. The pressure, as defined by a PORFLOW or PORHOLE entry, is exerted on the Eulerian material.
Similarly, the pressure in the connected GBAG, in case of a PORFGBG entry, is exerted on the
Eulerian material. This pressure is applied over the open area only. The open area is equal to the
area of the (sub)surface multiplied by COEFFV. The remaining closed area behaves as a wall
boundary condition for the gas.
5. Any model that is not supported by the default types can be user-programmed in a subroutine
called EXPOR.
6. To determine to use small hole definition (PORHOLE/PORFGBG/PORFCPL) or large hole
definition PORLHOLE/PORFLGBG/PORFCPL) depends on the size of the hole relative to the
size of the Euler elements. In general, when the size of the hole is 2-3 times larger than the Euler
elements, use the velocity (or large hole) definition. When it is smaller use the pressure (or small
hole) definition.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 268 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CPENTA
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other elements.
2. G1, G2, and G3 must define a triangular face. G4, G5, and G6 define the opposite face with G1
opposite G4; G2 opposite G5, etc.
3. The faces may be numbered either clockwise or counterclockwise.
4. The Lagrangian CPENTA element performs poorly compared with the CHEXA element. This
element should only be used where the geometry demands it, and it should be located well away
from any critical areas. Always use the CHEXA element if you can.
5. The property number references a PSOLID or a PEULER entry. This determines whether the
element is Lagrangian or Eulerian.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 269 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CQUAD4
+ T1 T2 T3 T4
+
T1-T4 Thickness at the grid points G1 through G4. R > 0.0 See
Remark
4.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 270 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other elements.
2. Grid points G1 to G4 must be ordered consecutively around the perimeter of the element.
3. If a CQUAD4 element has a thickness of 9999. (set on the PSHELL entry), it is not a shell element
but it is converted to a CSEG entry. This conversion allows CSEGs to be easily defined using
standard preprocessors. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Using a
Modeling Program with Dytran for details.
4. If the four grid-point thicknesses are defined, the element thickness is the average of the defined
thickness at the four grid points. If the thicknesses are not defined, the default thickness as
specified on the PSHELLentry is used.
5. The THETA entry is only used with orthotropic materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 271 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CROD
Remarks
1. Element numbers must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. Only one rod element may be defined on a single line.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 272 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CSEG
Remarks
1. The segment number must be unique with respect to all other segments.
2. Grid points G1 to G4 must be ordered consecutively around the perimeter of the element.
3. Segments can be automatically generated for shell and membrane elements, thereby saving the
effort of creating several CSEG entries for contact surfaces and coupling with CQUAD4 and
CTRIA3 elements. The elements for which segments are automatically generated are selected on
SET1 entries referenced by the SURFACE entry.
4. To simplify the generation and checking of CSEG entries, CSEG entries can alternatively be
defined using the CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 entries with a thickness of 9999. For details, see Dytran
User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Using a Modeling Program with Dytran.
5. Segments also can be defined using the CFACE and CFACE1 entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 273 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CSPR
Spring Connection
Defines a spring element.
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other elements.
2. This entry defines a spring acting between two grid points. The force always acts in the direction
of the line connecting the two grid points. The direction changes during the analysis as the grid
points move.
3. The spring can have a linear or nonlinear force/deflection characteristic depending on the PSPR
entry it references.
Linear elastic with failure (PSPR)
Nonlinear elastic (PSPR1)
User-defined (PSPREX)
4. CELAS1 and CELAS2define springs with a fixed orientation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 274 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CTETRA
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. The element can be numbered in any convenient order.
3. There are two types of Lagrangian CTETRA elements. The first one is based on linear tetrahedron
FE formulation. The second one is based on collapsed CHEXA formulation that is the default due
to upward compatibility reason. It performs poorly compared with the CHEXA element and should
not be used unless absolutely necessary. It should be located well away from any area of interest.
4. The property number references a PSOLIDor PEULER entry. This determines whether the
element is Lagrangian or Eulerian. To activate the linear tetrahedron FE formulation, IN and ISOP
entry of the PSOLID must be set to 1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 275 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CTRIA3
+ T1 T2 T3
+
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 276 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other elements.
2. Grid points G1 to G3 must be ordered consecutively around the perimeter of the element.
3. If a CTRIA3 element has a thickness of 9999 (set on the PSHELLn entry), it is not a shell element
but is converted to a CSEG entry. This conversion allows CSEGs to be easily defined using
standard preprocessors. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Using a
Modeling Program with Dytran for details.
If the three grid point thicknesses are defined, the element thickness is the average of the defined
thickness at the three grid points.
If the thicknesses are not defined, the default thickness as specified on the PSHELL entry is used.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 277 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CVISC
Damper Connection
Defines a viscous damper element.
Remarks
1. The element number must be unique with respect to all other element numbers.
2. This entry defines a damper acting between two grid points. The force always acts in the direction
of the line connecting the two grid points. The direction changes during the analysis as the grid
points move.
3. The damper can have a linear or nonlinear force/velocity characteristic depending on the PVISC
entry it references.
Linear (PVISC)
Nonlinear (PVISC1)
User-defined (PVISCEX)
4. CDAMP1 and CDAMP2 define dampers with a fixed orientation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 278 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CYLINDER
+ RAD
+ .5
Remarks
1. A cylinder is defined by the two end points of the cylinder axis and a radius.
2. Initial conditions are defined for the elements that are fully or partially inside the cylinder. See
Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 3: Constraints and Loading, Eulerian Loading and Constraints.
3. Also see theTICEUL Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 279 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DAREA
Remarks
1. One or two loads can be defined on a line.
2. At time t , the load F(t) is given by
F ( t ) = SCALE * T ( t )
where SCALE is the scale factor and T(t) is given by a table referenced from the TLOAD entry.
3. The load direction is defined in the basic coordinate system.
4. The direction of the load does not change during the analysis.
5. If G references a MATRIG, an RBE2 FULLRIG, or a RIGID surface, the load is applied to the
center of the rigid body. If G references a MATRIG, G must be MR<id>, where id is the MATRIG
number. If G references an RBE2FULLRIG, G must be FR<id>, where id is the RBE2 number.
If G references a RIGID surface, G is the RIGID surface number.
6. If the TYPE field on the TLOAD entry is 0, it defines a force or moment applied to a grid point. If
the TYPE field is 2, it defines an enforced motion of the grid point. If the TYPE field is set to 12,
it defines an enforced motion applied to the center of a rigid body. If the TYPE field is 13, it
defines a force or moment applied to the center of a rigid body.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 280 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DETSPH
Remark
An element detonates when a spherical detonation wave originating from the detonation point at the
specified time reaches the element.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 281 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DMAT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 282 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 283 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This material model can be used with Lagrangian and Eulerian solid elements and membrane
elements.
2. If YID is blank or zero, a hydrodynamic yield model is used.
3. For Eulerian elements, if the TYPE field on the PEULER entry is set to HYDRO, then YID is either
blank or references a YLDHY entry, and SID is blank. Conversely, if the TYPE field is set to
STRENGTH, a non hydrodynamic yield model is specified.
4. This material is discussed in Materials.
5. Materials of shell elements need to be specified using the MAT1, MAT8, DMATEP, DYMAT24 or
SHEETMAT entries.
6. If no PMINCentry is referenced, a minimum pressure of zero is assumed for the Eulerian elements,
while spallation is prevented for the Lagrangian solid elements by assuming a minimum pressure
of -1.E20. The PMINC entry will be ignored when a cavitation model through the EOSTAIT entry
has been given.
7. The definition of a corotational coordinate system can only be used for Lagrangian solid elements.
If no corotational coordinate system is specified, all stresses are in the basic coordinate system.
8. The failure model for Eulerian materials can be FAILEXor FAILMPS. For Lagrangian materials
FAILMPS, FAILEX, FAILMES, and FAILSDTcan be addressed.
9. When PARAM,PMINFAIL is also set and a failure model is defined, Lagrangian solid elements
also fail on the defined spallation pressure.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 284 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DMATEL
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 285 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Only two of the elastic constants E, Nu, G, and K should be defined.
2. The behavior of this material is discussed in Materials.
3. This material model can be used only with Lagrangian solid and membrane shell elements.
4. The definition of the corotational coordinate system can be used only for Lagrangian
solid elements. If no corotational coordinate system is specified, all stresses are in the basic
coordinate system.
5. For air bag modeling the following values of CSCALE and DMPFAC are suggested:
CSCALE = 0.1
DMPFAC= 0.05 to 0.20
6. The entry PMAXCUT, which was supported by Dytran V4.5 has become obsolete. A better
methodology is now offered by scaling the compressive stresses in the principal directions, and
using damping to suppress high-frequency oscillations (CSCALE and DMPFAC).
7. The Initial Metric Method relaxation factor is used to slow down the expansion of the membrane
elements during the calculation. The default is sufficient in most simulations. The value of
IMMREL is not used when the type of IMM is zero (see PARAM, IMM). The Initial Metric Method
is described in the Dytran User’s Guide in Initial Metric Method for Air Bags.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 286 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DMATEP
Remarks
1. Only two of the elastic constants E, v, G, or K should be defined.
2. The behavior of this material is discussed in Materials.
3. This material model can be used only with shell and beam elements.
4. If YID is 0 or blank, the material is elastic.
5. YID can refer to a YLDVM entry, in which case the material is elastoplastic with isotropic
hardening, or for CQUADy and CTRIAz elements only, to a YLDJC entry to define a Johnson-
Cook yield model.
6. If an elastoplastic material is specified for Belytschko-Schwer beams, a resultant plasticity model
is used. The entire cross section yields at once.
7. The failure models that can be addressed by the DMATEP material definition are FAILMPS
and FAILEX
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 287 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DMATOR
+ X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2 +
+ +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 288 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Grid point 1 defines the origin, grid point 5 lies on the c-axis,
and grid point 2 lies in the ac-plane.
E a , E b , E c , G ab , G bc , G ca ,
v ab , v ac , v bc , v ba , v ca , v cb
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 289 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The continuation line with bulk-viscosity data can be omitted.
2. The behavior of this material is discussed in Materials.
3. This material model can be used only with Lagrangian solid elements.
4. The failure models addressed by an orthotropic (DMATOR) material definition are FAILEX
FAILEX1, FAILMES, FAILPRS, and FAILEST.
5. If FAILEX1, the extended user-defined failure, is used, set the OPTION to either ELMAT or
ELPROP. The user-defined failure, FAILEX1, gives access to the material properties on an
element basis.
6. The sum of any two ratios is less or equal to 1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 290 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DYMAT14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DYMAT14 MID RHO G K TABLE TYPE VALUE CUTOFF +
DYMAT14 3 0.01 5. 3. 111 CRUSH -100. PFRAC +
+ A0 A1 A2 YIELD YSTYP +
+ 1. 0. 0. YSURF DYNA +
See Remark 3.
VALUE The value for the cut-off pressure R < 0.0 See
Remark
4.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 291 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks:
1. If BULKTYP, BULKQ, or BULKL are blank or zero the default values are used.
2. The continuation line with the bulk-viscosity data can be omitted.
3. The pressure-volume characteristic can either be defined in terms of the amount of crush, which
is minus the engineering strain and is defined as (1 – V/V0), with V/V0 as the relative volume; or
in
t
terms of the volumetric (true) strain which is defined as:
dV
∫ -----V- or, ln ( V ⁄ V 0 ) .
t0
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 292 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. If the field for the value of PFAIL/PFRAC/PMIN is left blank, then this value is calculated from
the yield function defined by the constants A0, A1, and A2. In case of a Mohr-Coulomb yield
model, the cut-off pressure is calculated as the root of the pressure-yield stress curve. If the
YSURF option is used, the cut-off pressure is calculated as the intersection point of the yield
surface with the hydrostat (if only A0 is nonzero, then the cut-off pressure is set to -100K, where
K is the bulk modulus). The cut-off pressure must be negative.
5. Either a minimum pressure (PMIN) or a failure pressure (PFAIL or PFRAC) can be specified. In
the first case, this corresponds to a tensile cutoff, where the pressure cannot fall below the
minimum value. In the second case, if the pressure falls below the failure pressure the element
fails and cannot carry tensile loading for the remainder of the analysis. Thus, the pressure can
never become negative again. If PFAIL is used, the elements can physically fail, which means
that the stresses are set to zero, but also the failure flag is used as in normal FAILxxx models. If
PFRAC is used, only the stresses are set to zero.
6. This material can only be used with Lagrangian solid elements.
7. If the YSTRESS option is used, the yield stress is determined by a Mohr-Coulomb model:
σ y = M IN ( A 0 + A 1 p, A 2 )
If the YSURF option is used, the yield surface in three-dimensional space is defined by Φs = 0
here
1 2 2
Φ s = --- s i j s ij – ( B 0 + B 1 p + B 2 p ) = J 2 – ( B 0 + B 1 p + B 2 p )
2
where s i j are the deviatoric stresses and J 2 is the second invariant of the stress deviation. The
coefficients B 0 , B 1 , and B 2 can be related to the coefficients A 0 , A 1 , and A 2 , which are defined
on the DYMAT14 entry. The relation between the coefficients depends on the YSTYP field as
shown below. If the YSTYP field is DYTRAN, then
B0 = A0
B1 = A1
B2 = A2
Thus, the yield stress (see Dytran User Guide, Constraints and Loading) is defined as
2
σy = 3 ( A0 + A1 p + A2 p )
8. The behavior of this material is described in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 3: Materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 293 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DYMAT24
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 294 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks:
1. If BULKTYP, BULKQ, or BULKL are blank or zero, the default values apply.
2. The continuation line with the bulk-viscosity data can be omitted.
3. If TABLE is blank or zero, a bilinear stress-strain curve is assumed. If TABLE has a value, it refers
to a TABLED1 entry giving the stress-strain curve for the material.
4. If TABLE is defined, the value of YIELD should be left blank, since it is determined from the
stress-strain curve.
5. If TABY is blank or zero, and D and P are blank or zero, the yield stress does not vary with strain
rate. If TABY has a value, then it references a TABLED1 entry, which gives the variation with
strain rate of the scale factor applied to the yield stress (D and P must be blank or zero).
If TABY is blank or zero and D and P are defined, the enhancement of the yield stress with strain
rate is calculated as
ε⎞ 1 ⁄ P
σd ·
------ = 1 + ⎛ ---
-
σy ⎝ D⎠
·
where σ d is the dynamic stress and σy is the static yield stress (YIELD), and ε is the equivalent
plastic strain rate.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 295 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
6. If TYPE is set to ENG or TRUE, Young’s modulus is calculated from the stress-strain curve. When
Young’s modulus is specified together with TYPE set to ENG or TRUE, the calculated Young’s
modulus is substituted by the value specified.
7. The behavior of this material is described in Section Materials.
8. This material can only be used with Lagrangian solid, shell and beam elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 296 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DYMAT25
+ TOFF +
+ -1.0E+11 +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 297 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. If BULKTYP, BULKQ, or BULKL are blank or zero, the default values apply.
2. The continuation lines with the bulk viscosity data may be omitted.
3. For a physically meaningful model, the value of the failure envelope exponential coefficient
should be less than the failure envelope parameter ( α < γ ) .
4. This material can only be used with Lagrangian solid elements.
5. The tension cut off value ( T o ff ) can be defined on the entry and must be less than zero. If the
tension cut off is left blank, Dytran calculates the tension cut off as the intersection point of the
failure envelope surface with the J1-axis as described in the Theory Manual.
6. The behavior of this material is discussed in detail in the Theory Manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 298 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DYMAT26
+ X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2
+ 0. 1. 1. 1. 1. 0.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 299 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
OPTION Material axes option used to determine how the local material C ELEM
axis system is defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 300 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 301 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. If BULKTYP, BULKQ, or BULKL are blank or zero, the default values are used.
2. If the initial Poisson’s ratios are not supplied, the default is set to zero. Therefore, the behavior of
the material during compaction is uncoupled. This means that straining in the (local) x-direction
produces stresses only in the (local) x-direction, and not in the (local) y- or z-direction. The tables
define the variation of the stress in a particular direction with the relative volume or the crush. The
relative volume is defined as (current volume)/(initial volume) and varies from 1.0
(uncompressed) to 0.0 (zero volume). Crush is defined as one minus the relative volume and
varies from 0.0 to 1.0. Since the tables should be defined with increasing x-values, it is convenient
to use the default value for type, which is CRUSH. When defining the curves, care should be taken
that the extrapolated values do not lead to negative yield stresses.
3. The elastic moduli (and the initial Poisson’s ratios only if they are supplied) vary linearly with the
relative volume from their initial uncompacted values to the fully compacted ones.
4. When the material is fully compacted, its behavior becomes isotropic with an elastic perfectly
plastic material characteristic.
5. This material can only be used with Lagrangian solid elements.
6. If the TIDSR option is used, you can supply a table including strain-rate effects. Strain rate is
defined here as the Euclidean norm of the deviatoric strain-rate tensor; i.e., e· = e· dev · d ev
ij e i j . The y-
values in this table are factors with which the stresses in the other tables are multiplied to
incorporate strain-rate effects.
7. The behavior of this material is described in Materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 302 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ENDDATA
Remarks
1. Anything after the ENDDATA entry is ignored.
2. An ENDDATA entry in an INCLUDE file is ignored.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 303 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSEX
Remarks
1. The EXEOS subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
2. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines in the manual for a description of how to use
user-written subroutines.
3. The equation of state name is passed to the EXEOS subroutine and can be used to identify the
equation of state.
4. This entry can only be used for Lagrangian and Eulerian solids. Viscosity is only available for
Eulerian solids.
5. The viscosity coefficient is the dynamic viscosity. It is the ratio between shear stress and velocity
gradient. The SI-unit of viscosity is P a ⋅ s = N
------s .
2
m
6. For the single mat solver viscous stresses can be requested by the use of TXX thru TZX. Also,
EFFSTS is available. For the multi-material solver viscous stresses are stored in TXX-VIS,
TYY-VIS, TZZ-VIS, TXY-VIS, TYZ-VIS, TZX-VIS. These viscous stresses only depend on
the current velocity gradients. The stresses like TXX are elastic-plastic stresses and depend on past
stresses. The total stress tensor in the element is given by the average of the viscous stress and
elastic-plastic stress. The weight factors are the material fraction of viscous fluid and the
remaining materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 304 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSEX1
Remarks
1. This model is only supported by the multi-material Euler solver.
2. A FAILJC entry or FAILEX2 entry is required.
3. The EXEOS1 subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE
FMS statement.
4. See User-written Subroutine Notes in Chapter 7: User Subroutines for a description of how to use
user-written subroutines.
5. The equation of state name is passed to the EXEOS1 subroutine and can be used to identify the
equation of state.
6. The viscosity coefficient is the dynamic viscosity. It is the ratio between shear stress and velocity
gradient. The SI-unit of viscosity is = Pa s = N s
------ .
2
m
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 305 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. For the single mat solver, viscous stresses can be requested by the use of TXX thru TZX. Also
EFFSTS is available. For the multi-material solver, viscous stresses are stored in TXX-VIS,
TYY-VIS, TZZ-VIS, TXY-VIS, TYZ-VIS, TZX-VIS. These viscous stresses only depend on
the current velocity gradients. The stresses like TXX are elastic-plastic stresses and depend on past
stresses. The total stress tensor in the element is given by the average of the viscous stress and
elastic-plastic stress. The weight factors are the material fraction of viscous fluid and the
remaining materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 306 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSGAM
where
Remarks
1. This equation of state is discussed in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, EOSGAM –
Gamma Law Equation of State
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 307 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
2. The temperature of the gas is calculated when one of the gas constants, R , C v , or C p is specified.
When temperature is not mentioned in an output request, the constants can be omitted.
3. The Euler variable name for temperature is TEMPTURE.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 308 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 309 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSIG
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 310 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 311 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This equation of state can be used with solid Lagrangian and Eulerian elements.
2. The definition of the unit system in which the input values are defined is required information
only in case you wish to have an automatic conversion to a different unit system as defined by the
UNITCNV field. In case you are using the conversion mechanism, note that the density RHO in the
corresponding DMAT entry is interpreted in the unit system defined here.
Table 5-1 defines sets of units available:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 312 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. The UNITCNV field defines the unit system to which the material parameters are converted. In
case you are not using one of the database material models, you also have to define the default
unit system (UNITDEF) in which you supplied the data.
4. You can use the database containing several detonation materials to start the analysis. The
material data are taken from Lee/Tarver (Ref.1.) and Murphy/Lee (Ref.2.) papers in the Dytran
Theory Manual. The equations of state parameters are given in the table 2.
5. The default setting for DBEXPL is NO, which means you should define the values in the input
fields (fields 3 to 18). If the database material name is defined, all values in the input fields will
be overridden. The reference density RHO defined on the corresponding DMAT entry is set to the
value from the database.
6. The default unit system for the material database parameters is the CGMS unit system. If you wish
to use the material base data in a different unit system, you can specify this by defining the target
unit system in the UNITCNV field.
7. You can define the shear property and yield model of the material with respectively SHXXX and
YLDXX entry. Note that the unit system of data required in these entries should be consistent with
the unit system defined in the UNITCNV field.
8. The IG equation of state cannot be used in combination with a spallation model.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 313 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
9. The following JWL equation of state is used to calculate the pressure of the un-reacted explosive
(in “solid” state):
– R1e – R 2e
ω e η e ------------
η
-
ω e η e ------------
η
-
p e = A e ⎛ 1 – ------------⎞ e e + B e ⎛ 1 – ------------⎞ e e + ω e η e ρ 0 E e
⎝ R 1e ⎠ ⎝ R 2e ⎠
where
ρe
η e = ----- = the relative density of the un-reacted explosive
ρ0
Ee = the specified internal energy per unit mass of the unreacted explosive
ρ0 = the initial density of the explosive
A e , B e , ω e , R 1e , R 2 e = the input constants of the un-reacted explosive.
Similarly, the pressure in the reaction products (in “gas” state) is defined by another JWL form
as follows:
– R 1p –R2 p
------------- -------------
ωp ηp ηp ωp ηp ηp
pp = A p ⎛ 1 – -------------⎞ e + B p ⎛ 1 – -------------⎞ e + ωp η p ρ0 Ep
⎝ R 1p ⎠ ⎝ R2 p ⎠
where
ρp
η p = ----- = the relative density of the reaction product.
ρ0
Ep = the specified internal energy per unit mass of the reacted product.
A p , B p , ω p , R 1p , R 2p = the input constants of the reaction product.
The chemical reaction rate for conversion of un-reacted explosive to reaction products is
described by the following reaction rate equation:
∂F x y x y z
------- = I ( 1 – F ) ( η e – 1 – a ) + G ( 1 – F ) F ( P )
∂t
Here F denotes the burn fraction that is defined as the fraction of the explosive that has already
reacted. For more details concerning the implementation of this equation of state, please refer to
the Dytran Theory Manual.
10. You can access the results of the un-reacted explosive and reaction products for IG elements.
These EOSIG specific output variables are:
Keyword Description
SIE-E Specific internal energy per unit mass of un-reacted explosive part
SIE-P Specific internal energy per unit mass of reaction products part
FMAT Volume fraction
RHO-E Density of un-reacted explosive part
RHO-P Density of reaction products part
MASS-E Mass of un-reacted explosive part
MASS-P Mass of reaction products part
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 314 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Table 5-2 Coefficients for the IG Model of Several Explosions in the Database
PBX- LANL Military
9404 Cast COMP COMP PBX-
Explosive (a) TATB PETN TNT B B 9404 (b) LX-17
Un-reacted Equation of State and Constitutive Values:
RHO (g/cm3) 1.842 1.90 1.842 1.61 1.712 1.630 1.842 1.903
AE (μbar) 69.69 108.2 37.46 17.98 778.1 1479. 9522. 778.1
BE (μbar) -1.727 -2.406 -1.313 -0.931 - -0.05261 -0.5944 -
0.05031 0.05031
R1E 7.8 8.2 7.2 6.2 11.3 12. 14.1 11.3
R2E 3.9 4.1 3.6 3.1 1.13 1.2 1.41 1.13
OMGE 0.8578 1.251 1.173 0.8926 0.8938 0.9120 0.8867 0.8938
Reacted Product Equation of State Values:
AP (μbar) 8.524 6.5467 6.17 3.712 5.242 5.5748 8.524 6.5467
BP (μbar) 0.1802 0.071236 0.1692 0.03230 0.07678 0.0783 0.1802 0.07123
6 6 6
R1P 4.6 4.45 4.4 4.15 4.2 4.5 4.6 4.45
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 315 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Table 5-2 Coefficients for the IG Model of Several Explosions in the Database
PBX- LANL Military
9404 Cast COMP COMP PBX-
Explosive (a) TATB PETN TNT B B 9404 (b) LX-17
R2P 1.3 1.2 1.2 0.95 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.2
OMGP 0.38 0.35 0.25 0.30 0.34 0.34 0.38 0.35
ECHEM 0.0554 0.0363 0.0548 0.0435 0.0496 0.04969 0.0554 0.03626
μbar-cm3/g)
Reaction Rate Parameters:
I (μs-1) 44.0 50.0 20.0 50.0 44.0 44.0 44.0 50.0
G (μbar-z μs- 200.0 125.0 400.0 40.0 414.0 514.0 850.0 500.0
1)
A 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.0
Z 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
X 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9
Y 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3
R 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 316 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSJWL
p0 = initial pressure
A , B , R1 , R2 are constants.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 317 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This equation of state can be used only with Eulerian elements.
2. A DETSPH entry must be used to specify the detonation model.
3. This equation of state is discussed in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, EOSJWL – JWL
Equation of State.
4. In simulations with ideal gases, the JWL material needs to have an initial pressure to counter
balance the pressure of the ideal gas. Similarly, in case of undex calculations where an explosive
is located at a certain depth, P0 should be preset to equal the initial hydrostatic pressure.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 318 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSMG
ρ0 c2 η Γ0 η
p = -----------------------2 ⎛ 1 – ----------⎞ + Γ 0 ρ 0 e
( 1 – sη ) ⎝ 2 ⎠
ρ0
η = 1 – -----
ρ1
ρ 1 = min ( ρ, RM )
where
e = specific internal energy per unit mass. For material at zero pressure, e has to be
initialized as zero.
ρ0 = reference density
ρ = overall material density
Γ0 = Gruneisen parameter at reference density
s = definition by U s = c 0 + sU p where U s and U p are the linear shock velocity and particle
velocity, respectively, as obtained from the shock data.
c = sound speed at reference density
RM = cut-off value for density
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 319 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This equation of state can only be used with Eulerian elements.
2. This equation of state is discussed in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, EOSMG - Mie-
Gruneisen Equation of State.
3. The cut off value RM is only used for limiting the pressure. To prevent division by zero, RM
s
should be less than ----------- ρ . RM can be set slightly below this value. In case the simulation gets
s – 1 ref
unstable because of too large pressures, RM can be decreased.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 320 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSPOL
2 3 2 3
p = a 1 μ + a 2 μ + a 3 μ + ( b 0 + b 1 + b 2 μ + b 3 μ )ρ 0 e
In tension (i < 0) ,
p = a1 μ + ( b0 + b1 μ ) ρ0 e
where
μ = η–1
η = ρ ⁄ ρ0
+ HVL VISC
+ 1.1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 321 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. When the relative volume ( ρ0 ⁄ ρ ) exceeds HVL, the pressure is cut off to
P HVL = f ( μ HVL )
with
1
μ HVL = ------------ – 1
HVL
e.g., for p = a1 ⋅ μ , the pressure behavior is as follows:
2. When the PARAM,HVLFAIL is set to YES, the elements where the relative volume ( ρ0 ⁄ ρ )
exceeds HVL fail completely. Their stress state is zero.
3. This equation of state is discussed in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, EOSPOL –
Polynomial Equation of State.
4. The viscosity coefficient is the dynamic viscosity. It is the ratio between shear stress and velocity
Ns kg
gradient. The SI-unit of viscosity is P a ⋅ s = ------
- = ------- .
2 M ms
5. If possible, use in coupled analysis the FASTCOUP coupling algorithm, because viscous fluxes
are computed more accurately for fast coupling than for general coupling.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 322 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
6. For the single mat solver, viscous stresses can be requested by the use of TXX thru TZX. Also
EFFSTS is available. For the multi-material solver, viscous stresses are stored in TXX-VIS,
TYY-VIS, TZZ-VIS, TXY-VIS, TYZ-VIS, TZX-VIS. These viscous stresses only depend on
the current velocity gradients. Stresses like TXX are elastic-plastic stresses and depend on past
stresses. The total stress tensor in the element is given by the average of the viscous stress and
elastic-plastic stress. The weight factors are the material fraction of viscous fluid and the
remaining materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 323 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EOSTAIT
No cavitation ( ρ > ρe ) ,
γ
p = a0 + a 1 ( η – 1 )
Cavitation ρ ≤ ρc ,
p = pc
where
η = ρ ⁄ ρ0
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 324 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
ρ γ
1. The pressure can not fall below the cavitation pressure p c = a 0 + a 1 ⎛⎝ ⎛⎝ -----c⎞⎠ – 1⎞⎠ , although the
ρ0
density can continue to decrease below its critical value ρ c .
2. The Tait equation of state can not be used in combination with a spallation model.
3. For a more detailed description, see the Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, EOSTAIT –
Tait Equation of State.
4. The viscosity coefficient is the dynamic viscosity. It is the ratio between shear stress and velocity
Ns kg
gradient. The SI-unit of viscosity is P a ⋅ s = ------
- = ------- .
2
M ms
5. If possible, use in coupled analysis the FASTCOUP coupling algorithm, because viscous fluxes
are computed more accurately for fast coupling than for general coupling.
6. For the single mat solver, viscous stresses can be requested by the use of TXX thru TZX. Also
EFFSTS is available. For the multi-material solver, viscous stresses are stored in TXX-VIS,
TYY-VIS, TZZ-VIS, TXY-VIS, TYZ-VIS, TZX-VIS. These viscous stresses only depend on
the current velocity gradients. Stresses like TXX are elastic-plastic stresses and depend on past
stresses. The total stress tensor in the element is given by the average of the viscous stress and
elastic-plastic stress. The weight factors are the material fraction of viscous fluid and the
remaining materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 325 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FABRIC
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 326 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. For a description of the bi-directional woven fabric model, see Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter
3: Materials.
2. When a coating is defined (PERC>0), two out of three values need to be specified for ECOAT,
NUCOAT, and GCOAT.
3. For air bag modeling the following values of DAMPCOAT and DAMPFIB are suggested:
DAMPCOAT= 0.05
DAMPFIB= 0.05
4. The compressive stresses in the fibers are scaled with the value of COMPFIB. Putting
COMPFIB = 0.0 results in a tension only fiber model.
The compressive stresses in the coating are scaled with the value of COMPCOAT. Putting
COMPCOAT = 0.0 results in a tension only coating model.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 327 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
The compressive stresses are scaled in the direction of the principal stresses.
When PERC = 100%, and the coating of this fabric model is used to simulate an isotropic air bag
material, it is best to scale down the compressive stresses of the coating. A suggested value is
COMPCOAT = 0.1.
5. Since this is a model which tracks warp and weft directions and uses total warp/weft strain as a
state variable, the initial warp and weft directions must be specified. There are two ways to
indicate the initial warp and weft directions:
a. THETA1 and THETA2
Orientation angles between the element coordinate system and the warp/weft ends. If no
orientation angle is specified, vectors will be used to indicate the warp/weft directions of the
fabric material with respect to the basic coordinate system.
b. XWARP, YWARP, ZWARP and XWEFT, YWEFT, ZWEFT
Vectors indicating the warp/weft directions of the fabric material with respect to the basic
coordinate system. The projection of these vectors on the surface of each element is used to
determine the angle between the element and the material coordinate system. If the orientation
angles are defined, these vectors are ignored.
6. For shell element properties (PSHELL1), when the material is FABRIC, the material angle
THETA is ignored. The orientation of the fabric fibers is defined completely on the FABRIC entry.
For layered composite element properties (PCOMP), when the material of a ply is FABRIC, the
angle THETAi is ignored. The orientation of the fabric fibers is defined completely on the
FABRIC entry.
7. The maximum shear stress is given by a friction coefficient of the fabric (SCOF) times the RMS
value of the direct fiber stresses.
8. If the field G12 is left blank, the shear modulus is computed from the RMS value of the two linear
stiffness coefficients.
9. When Fabric material is referenced by shell elements, the Spin Rate method (SPIN) is applied
automatically when no stress-rotation correction is specified on SPINCOR option. See PSHELL
entry for the details on SPINCOR option.
10. There are a number of specific output sublayer variables useful for this material:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 328 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
11. When a fabric is being sheared, the angle between the fibers changes. At a certain moment, the
fibers will reach a locking angle, after which a further change in the fiber angle is no
longer possible.
The simulation models this behavior as follows:
a. Change in Fiber Crossover Angle < LockAng1
The shear stress between the fibers is cut off based on the friction coefficient SCOF
b. LockAng1 < Change in Fiber Crossover Angle < LockAng2
The shear stress between the fibers is linearly increased.
c. Change in Fiber Crossover Angle > LockAng2
The shear stress between the fibers is no longer cut off.
This situation is equal to an infinite friction coefficient SCOF.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 329 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILEST
Remarks
1. This failure model is valid for Lagrangian solid (CHEXA) orthotropic materials. (See also the
DMATOR entry.)
2. The FAILEST failure model is a two-stage failure. The first stage retains the hydrodynamic
properties of the material. The second stage is reached when the global time step falls below the
specified value. The element is then removed from the calculation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 330 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILEX
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
2. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for a description of how to use
user-written subroutines.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 331 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILEX1
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
2. The failure model is available for orthotropic materials only. The FAILEX1 entry must be
referenced on the DMATOR entry.
3. The failure model allows for an extensive description of the failure of composite materials in
three-dimensional elements. It includes the possibility to have property degradation according to
material damage.
4. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines for a description of how to use user-written subroutines.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 332 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILEX2
NOFAIL: No failure
Remarks
1. This model is only supported by the Multi-material solver with strength.
2. The subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
3. See User-written Subroutine Notes in Chapter 7: User Subroutines for a description of how to use
user-written subroutines.
4. For each material and for each Euler element a variable will be created that monitors the degree
of failure of the material. This variable is denoted by DAMAGE and is between 0 and 1. The
EXFAIL2 routine allows updating this damage variable due to the plastic strain increment of the
current cycle.
5. There are two ways in which this damage variable can model failure These are:
• Continuous failure: The yield stress is reduced by a factor (1-D). When D exceeds 1, the yield
stress equals zero and the element fails.
• Discrete failure: the element fails when D equals one.
When NOFAIL is set, positive damage values will not lead to failure. This is useful if the failure
modeling is done by an EXYLD1 routine. Then the yield stress can be reduced depending on the
magnitude of the damage variable.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 333 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILJC
Δ εp
D = ∑ ------------
ε f rac
-
ti me
⎛ ·
ε pl ⎞
ε f rac = ( D 1 + D 2 exp ( D 3 σ * ) ) ⎜ 1 + D 4 ln ------
-⎟ ( 1 + D 5 T * )
⎝ ·0
ε pl ⎠
σm
σ * = -------
σ
T – T room
T * = ---------------------------------
T melt – T r oom
The summation is performed over all past time increments. The variable D measures the damage; T is
the temperature, σ m the mean stress, σ is the von Mises equivalent stress, and ε f rac is the fracture strain.
· ·0
The fracture strain depends on a nondimensional plastic strain rate ε p l ⁄ εp l . If D exceeds one it set equal
to one.
The damage variable D is transported along with the Eulerian material.
There are two methods to determine when elements fail:
• Continuous failure: The yield stress is reduced by a factor ( 1 – D ) . When D exceeds 1 the yield
stress equals zero and the element fails.
• Discrete failure: the element fails when D equals one.
This failure model applies to high-strain rate deformation of metals. It is less suitable for
quasi-static problems.
+ TMELT CP MTH
+ 1495 450 CONT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 334 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This failure model is only available for Eulerian materials. The use of the multi-material solver
with strength is required.
2. The variable D can be visualized by adding DAMAGE to the Output request for Euler elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 335 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILMES
Remark
This failure model is valid for Lagrangian solid element materials. (See also the DMAT and
DMATOR entries.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 336 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILMPS
Remark
This failure model is valid for Eulerian, shell (CQUAD4 and CTRIA3), Hughes-Liu beams, and
Lagrangian solid element materials. (Also see the DMAT and DMATEP entries.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 337 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILPRS
Remark
This failure model is valid for Lagrangian solid element orthotropic materials. (See also the
DMATORentry.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 338 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILSDT
Remarks
1. This failure model is valid for Lagrangian solid element materials. (See also the DMAT entry.)
2. The FAILSDT failure model is a two-stage failure. The first stage retains the hydrodynamic
properties of the material. The second stage is reached when the global time step falls below the
specified value. The element then is removed from the computation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 339 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FFCONTR
Remarks
1. The gas above the fluid is assumed to be an ideal, iso-thermal gas: p ⋅ V = C , where C is a
constant. If TEMPTAB is set, the temperature is applied to both the fluid as well as the gas. Then,
the gas satisfies p ⋅ V ⁄ T = C , where T is the temperature of the fluid.
2. The fluid is assumed incompressible.
3. The pressure is based on the uniform pressure gas bag algorithm, where the pressure is uniform
in the volume, but variable in time.
4. Output for the fluid-filled container is available through a GBAGOUT definition. The available
variables are: PRESSURE, VOLUME, TEMPTURE, VOLGAS, VOLFLUID, GAUGEPRES,
and RHOFLUID.
5. The normals of the surface referenced by SID are automatically reversed if required.
6. Modeling guidelines are described in the “Getting Started” section.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 340 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. If DENSTAB is Flset,
ui d
then the volumd of the fluid changes according to
ρ ( T 0 )V 0
V Flui d = -------------------------------
ρ (T)
Here, T 0 and V 0Flui d are initial values for temperature and fluid volume, ρ
is the fluid density, and
T denotes the current temperature. If TEMPTAB is not set, the DENSTAB entry will not be used.
8. At time = TACTIVE, the gas is assumed to be in contact with the ambient pressure for the last time.
This means that at Time = TACTIVE, the pressure in the bottle equals the ambient pressure for the
last time. After TACTIVE, the bottle has been closed and there is no longer contact between
ambient and gas inside the bottle. Any change in volume of the bottle or temperature or fluid will
result in change of pressure of the gas inside the bottle.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 341 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOW
+ TYPE4 VALUE4
+
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 342 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. LID must be referenced by a TLOAD1entry.
2. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element with the flow
boundary condition.
3. TLOAD entries referencing FLOW entries must have the TID field blank or zero.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 343 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the density and specific energy have
to be set. On the other hand, when material flows out of a multi-material Euler mesh, it is assumed
that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element contributes to the out-flow of mass.
The materials are transported in proportion to their relative volume fractions.
5. Prescribing both pressure and velocity may lead to the instabilities.
6. For TYPE=HYDSTAT, the pressure is set using HYDSTAT; the velocity equals the element
velocity. In case of inflow, the density follows from the hydrostatic pressure by using the EOS.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 344 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOWDEF
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 345 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remark
1. If this entry is not specified, a default wall boundary condition is applied to all Eulerian free faces.
2. For TYPE=HYDSTAT, the pressure is set using HYDSTAT; the velocity equals the element
velocity. In case of inflow, the density follows from the hydrostatic pressure by using the EOS.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 346 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 347 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOWDIR
Defines the properties of a material for the boundaries of an Eulerian mesh. The boundary consists of all
Eulerian boundary faces that point in a specific direction.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 348 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. FLOWDIR can be used to specify flow boundaries for CHEXA’s and also for Euler element
created by the MESH,BOX option.
2. In the OUT file, the total area of boundary faces is printed.
3. FLOWDIR is not supported by the single material strength Euler solver.
4. FLOWDIR overrules FLOW definitions, but FLOWSQ overrules FLOWDIR.
5. The MESH-ID is only used when multiple Euler domains have been defined. If multiple euler
domains have been defined but if the MESH-ID is blank all Euler domains will be considered in
assigning the boundary condition.
6. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element with the flow
boundary condition.
7. TLOAD entries referencing FLOW entries must have the TID field blank or zero.
8. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the density and specific energy have
to be set. On the other hand, when material flows out of a multi-material Euler mesh, it is assumed
that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element contributes to the out flow of mass.
The materials are transported in proportion to their relative volume fractions.
9. Prescribing both pressure and velocity may lead to the instabilities.
10. For TYPE = HYDSTAT, the pressure is set using HYDSTAT, the velocity equals the element
velocity. In case of inflow the density follows from the hydrostatic pressure by using the equation
of state.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 349 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOWEX
Remarks
1. LID must be referenced by a TLOAD1 entry.
2. The subroutine EXFLOW must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS
statement. The EXFLOW user subroutine must be present in case single hydrodynamic materials,
or materials with strength are used. For multimedia problems, the EXFLOW2 subroutine must
be used.
3. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines for a description of how to use user-written subroutines.
4. TLOAD1 entries referencing FLOWEX entries must have the TID field blank or zero.
5. The flow boundary name is passed to the EXFLOW subroutine and can be used to identify
the boundary.
6. The EXFLOW2 subroutine allows for the definition of any material to flow into the Eulerian mesh.
The outflow can only be of materials present in the mesh.
7. There are two methodologies available to define an inflator model for an eulerian calculation:
a. as a boundary condition for a subsurface on a coupling surface (see the COUPLE, COUPOR,
and INFLATR entries)
b. as a FLOWEX boundary condition for an Euler face.
The second method can be activated by using a predefined name on the FLOWEX entry. The
following name must be used:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 350 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 351 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOWSQ
Defines the properties of a material for the boundaries of an Eulerian mesh. The boundary consists of all
Eulerian faces that are inside a specified square.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 352 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. FLOWSQ can be used to specify flow boundaries for CHEXA’s and also for Euler element created
by the MESH,BOX option.
2. In the OUT file, the total area of boundary faces is printed.
3. FLOWSQ is not supported by the single material strength Euler solver.
4. If Neither the MIN or MAX value has been set the default value is respectively -1E+20 and 1e+20
for the MIN and MAX value. If the MIN value has been set the default value of the MAX value is the
Min value.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 353 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. It is allowed that the defined square of a FLOWSQ entry overlaps with FLOW definitions or FLOWDIR
definitions. In that case, the FLOWSQ definition overrules the other ones. It is not allowed that a
square of one FLOWSQ overlaps a square of another FLOWSQ entry.
6. The MESH-ID is only used when multiple Euler domains have been defined. If multiple euler
domains have been defined but if the MESH-ID is blank all Euler domains will be considered in
assigning the boundary condition.
7. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element with the flow
boundary condition.
8. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the density and specific energy have
to be set. On the other hand when material flows out of a multi-material Euler mesh it is assumed
that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element contributes to the out flow of mass.
The materials are transported in proportion to their relative volume fractions.
9. Prescribing both pressure and velocity may lead to the instabilities.
10. For TYPE = HYDSTAT, the pressure is set using HYDSTAT, the velocity equals the element
velocity. In case of inflow, the density follows from the hydrostatic pressure by using the EOS.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 354 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOWT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 355 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 356 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. LID must be referenced by a TLOAD1 entry.
2. TLOAD1 entries referencing FLOW entries must have the TID field blank or zero.
3. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element with that
boundary condition.
4. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the material number, the density,
and specific energy have to be set. On the other hand, when material flows out of a multi-material
Euler mesh, it is assumed that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element
contributes to the outflow of mass. The materials are transported in proportion to their relative
volume fractions.
5. The boundary condition initiates or determines a wave in compressible material like gas and
water. This can be either an outgoing or an ingoing wave. For stability, it is important that the
waves created are compatible with the flow type near the boundary. Relevant flow types are
subsonic inflow, subsonic outflow, supersonic inflow, and supersonic outflow. For example, for
subsonic inflow, prescribing both pressure and velocity would initiate outgoing waves. Outgoing
waves for an inflow boundary condition is known to be instable. However, for supersonic inflow,
you can specify both pressure and velocity since there are no outgoing waves at a supersonic
inflow boundary.
6. When a TABLEEX is referenced, the EXFUNC user subroutine must be created. See TABLEEX for
more details.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 357 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOWTSQ
Defines the material properties for the in- or outflow of material trough the boundary of an Euler mesh.
Inflow velocity and material properties can be chosen time dependent.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 358 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 359 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. FLOWTSQ can be used to specify flow boundaries for CHEXA’s and also for Euler element created
by the MESH,BOX option.
2. In the OUT file, the total area of boundary faces is printed.
3. FLOWTSQ is not supported by the single material strength Euler solver.
4. If neither the MIN nor MAX value has been set the default value is respectively -1E+20 and 1e+20 for the MIN
and MAX value. If the MIN value has been set the default value of the MAX value is the Min value.
5. It is allowed that the defined square of a FLOWTSQ entry overlaps with FLOW definitions or FLOWDIR
definitions. In that case, the FLOWTSQ definition overrules the other ones. It is not allowed that a square of
one FLOWTSQ overlaps a square of another FLOWSQ entry.
6. The MESH-ID is only used when multiple Euler domains have been defined. If multiple euler domains
have been defined but if the MESH-ID is blank, all Euler domains are considered in assigning the
boundary condition.
7. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element that with the
boundary conditions.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 360 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
8. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the material number, the density and specific
energy have to be set. On the other hand when material flows out of a multi-material Euler mesh it is assumed
that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element contributes to the out flow of mass. The
materials are transported in proportion to their relative volume fractions
9. The boundary condition initiates/determines a wave in compressible material like gas and water. This can be
either an outgoing or an ingoing wave. For stability it is important that the waves created are compatible with
the flow type near the boundary. Relevant flow types are subsonic inflow, subsonic outflow, supersonic
inflow and supersonic outflow. For example for subsonic inflow prescribing both pressure and velocity
would initiate outgoing waves. Outgoing waves for an inflow boundary condition is known to be instable.
However, for supersonic inflow one can specify both pressure and velocity since there are no outgoing waves
at a supersonic inflow boundary.
10. When a TABLEEX is referenced, the user-subroutine EXFUNC must be created. See TABLEEX for
more details.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 361 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FOAM1
Remarks
1. If BULKTYP, BULKQ, or BULKL are blank or zero, the default values are used.
2. The continuation line with bulk-viscosity data can be omitted.
3. Poisson’s ratio for this model is effectively zero. Therefore, only one other elastic constant can be
defined which can be G , the shear modulus, or K , the bulk modulus.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 362 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. For this model, the stress-strain curve is independent of the experimental test performed to obtain
the material data (uniaxial, shear, or volumetric). The most common test is the uniaxial
compression test where the stress-strain characteristic can either be defined in terms of the amount
of crush, which is minus the engineering strain, or in terms of the true strain. Since Poisson’s ratio
is effectively zero the amount of crush is defined as ⎛⎝ 1 – -----
V⎞ V
- , with ------ as the relative volume, and
V 0⎠ V0
the
t
true strain is defined as
∫ -----V- or In ⎛⎝ -----
dV V⎞
- .
V 0⎠
t0
The crush factor must be between 0 and 1. The true strain must always be negative and the stress
positive (absolute value).
5. The yield surface in three-dimensional space is a sphere in principal stresses, and is defined by
2 2 2 2
τ 22 + τ 22 + τ 33 = R s
with
2 2 2 2
ε 11 + ε 22 + ε 33 = R e
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 363 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FOAM2
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 364 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. If BULKTYP, BULKQ, or BULKL are blank or zero, the default values are used.
2. The continuation line with bulk-viscosity data can be omitted.
3. Poisson’s ratio for this model is effectively zero. Therefore, only one other elastic constant can be
defined which can be G, the shear modulus, or K, the bulk modulus.
4. For this model, the stress-strain curve is independent of the experimental test performed to obtain
the material data (uniaxial, shear, or volumetric). The most common test is the uniaxial
compression test where the stress-strain characteristic can either be defined in terms of the amount
of crush, which is minus the engineering strain, or in terms of the true strain. Since Poisson’s ratio
is effectively zero, the amount of crush is defined as ⎛⎝ 1 – -----
V⎞ V
- , with ------ as the relative volume, and
V 0⎠ V0
the
t
true strain is defined as
∫ -----V- or In ⎛⎝ -----
dV V⎞
- .
V 0⎠
t0
The crush factor must be between 0 and 1. The true strain must always be negative and the stress
positive (absolute value).
5. The yield surface in three-dimensional space is a sphere in principal stresses, and is defined by
2 2 2 2
τ 22 + τ 22 + τ 33 = R s
where the radius of the sphere Rs depends on the strains and strain rates as follows:
R s = f 1 ( R e )f 2 ( R r )
with
2 2 2 2
ε 11 + ε 22 + ε 33 = R e
and
·2 ·2 ·2 2
ε 11 + ε 22 + ε 33 = R r
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 365 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
and f 1 is the function supplied in the stress-strain table and f2 (if defined) is the function supplied
in the factor-strain rate table.
6. A minimum (SMIN) or failure (SFRAC) tensile stress can be defined. In the first case this
corresponds to a tensile cut-off where the stress cannot fall below the minimum value. In the
second case, if the stress falls below the failure stress the element fails and cannot carry tensile
loading for the remainder of the analysis. Thus the stress can never become negative again.
7. If TABY is blank, the stress does not vary with strain rate. If TABY has a value, then it references
to a TABLED1 entry, which gives the variation with strain rate of the scale factor applied to
the stress.
8. The unloading behavior is piecewise linear (LINEAR), quadratic (QDRATIC) or exponential
(EXPTIAL). The unloading curve is constructed such that the ratio of the dissipated energy (area
between compressive loading and unloading curve) to total energy (area under the loading curve)
is equal to the energy dissipation factor alpha. In the case of piecewise linear unloading, Dytran
constructs an unloading curve whose segments are parallel to the supplied compression table,
except for the first and last segments, which pass respectively through the origin and the point P
on the compression curve where the unloading starts. In the case of quadratic unloading, Dytran
constructs a quadratic curve starting in the origin and ending in point P. If the quadratic unloading
curve falls below the strain axis, then the unloading stress is set to zero. In the case of exponential
unloading, the unloading curve is constructed in a similarly to quadratic unloading except for the
shape of the curve, which is created from an exponential function instead of a
quadratic polynomial.
9. This material can only be used with Lagrangian solid elements.
10. The behavior of this material is described in Materials.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 366 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FORCE
Remarks
1. At time t , the load F ( t ) is given by F ( t ) = SC A LE ⋅ N ⋅ T ( t ) where S CA LE is the factor; N is the
vector given by N 1 , N 2 , and N 3 ; and T ( t ) is the value at t interpolated from the table referenced
on the TLOADn entry.
2. Concentrated loads can also be defined on the DAREA entry.
3. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
4. If G references a MATRIG, an RBE2-FULLRIG, or a RIGID surface, the load is applied to the
center of the rigid body. If G references a MATRIG, G must be MR<id>, where id is the MATRIG
number. If G references an RBE2-FULLRIG, G must be FR<id>, where id is the RBE2 number.
If G references a RIGID surface, G is the RIGID surface number.
5. If CID is specified, velocity prescriptions are processed in the local coordinate system referenced
by CID. Only velocity prescriptions can be defined in the local coordinate system.
6. If a component field N1, N2, and/or N3 is left blank,
Force prescription: The component of the force is equal to zero.
Velocity prescription: The component of the velocity is not restrained.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 367 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. If the TYPE field on the TLOADn entry is 0, it defines a force applied to a grid point. If the TYPE
field is 2, it defines an enforced motion on the grid point. If the TYPE field is set to 12, it defines
an enforced motion applied to the center of a rigid body, and if the TYPE field is 13, it defines a
force applied to the center of a rigid body.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 368 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FORCE1
Remarks
1. At time t , the load F(t) ) is given by:
F ( t ) = SC A LE ⋅ N ⋅ T ( t )
where S CA LE is the scale factor, N is the unit vector in the direction from G1 to G2, and T (t ) is
the value at time t interpolated from the table referenced in the TLOAD entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOAD entry.
3. The FORCE1 entry defines a follower force in that the direction of the force changes as the grid
points G1 and G2 move during the analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 369 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FORCE2
Remarks
1. At time t, the load F ( t ) is given by F ( t ) = SC A LE ⋅ N ⋅ T ( t ) where S CA LE is the scale factor, N is
the vector product of the vectors from G1 to G2 and G3 to G4 respectively, and T ( t ) is the value
at time t interpolated from the table referenced by the TLOADn entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
3. The FORCE2 entry defines a follower force in that the direction of the force changes as the grid
points G1, G2, G3, and G4 move during the analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 370 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FORCE3
+ CID2 SCALE2 M1 M2 M3
+
Remarks
1. SCALE2 defines the enforced rigid-body motion of the coordinate system referenced by CID1
with respect to the coordinate system referenced by CID2.
2. This boundary condition can be used only to define the enforced velocities of grid points. Thus,
the TYPE field in the TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 entry should be set to 2.
3. LID is referenced by a TLOAD entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 371 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. If CIDx is specified, the velocity components are defined in the local coordinate directions, for
example, if a cylindrical system is referenced, the velocity components define a radial, angular,
and axial velocity.
5. If a component field N1, N2, N3, M1, M2, and/or M3 is left blank, that component of the velocity
is not restrained.
6. The FORCE3 entry is valid for both Lagrangian as Eulerian grid points.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 372 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FORCEEX
+ G1 G2 G3 G4 THRU G5 -etc.-
+ 100 319 728 429 THRU 457
Remarks
1. LID must be referenced by a TLOAD1 entry.
2. FORCEEX can only be used to specify enforced velocities for grid points. The TYPE field on the
TLOAD1 entry must be set to two. The TID on the TLOAD1 entry must be set to zero or blank (no
time variation).
3. The subroutine EXTVEL must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE
FMS statement.
4. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines for a description of how to use user-written subroutines.
5. The constraint name is passed to the subroutine and can be used to identify the constraint.
6. A THRU specification, including the start and finish points in the range, must be on one line.
7. If the THRU specification is used, all the points in the sequence do not have to exist. Those that
do not exist are ignored. The first point in the THRU specification must be a valid grid point. BY
can be used to exclude grid points.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 373 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
8. None of the fields in the list of grid points can be blank or zero, since this designation marks the
end of the list.
9. Any number of continuation lines can be used to define the list of grid points.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 374 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAG
+ TINIT TENV +
+ 293. +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 375 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 376 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 377 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 378 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 379 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See Remark 4.
TENV Environmental Temperature. The value is R>0 Required.
required when heat transfer is used. See
Remark
6.
CONVEC The variation of the heat transfer coefficient for C CONSTA
convection heat transfer. NT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 380 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 381 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The SURFACE entry referenced by the SID field must form a closed volume.
2. The pressure in the gas bag is applied to all the faces of the SURFACE.
3. TABLEEX is valid also in all entries where TABLED1 is used.
4. TINIT is the temperature of the inflowing gas at t im e = 0 . At t im e = 0 , the mass of the gas
inside the gas bag is calculated as
p i n it V
m = ---------------
R T i ni t
where, p i n it
the initial pressure, V the volume, R the gas constant, and T i ni t the initial gas
temperature.
5. The flow through exhaust openings, leakage areas and user-specified outflow rate is accumulated.
The volumetric porosity contributes to the outflow of gas as
p
m· out = ρ * Q = ----------- * Q
R*T
where
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 382 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4 4
q rad = eA r ( T – T env ) Radiation
where h is the convection heat-transfer coefficient (CONVEC, CONVECV), e the gas emissivity
coefficient (RADIAT, RADIATV), A c the air bag surface area for convective heat transfer, A r the
air bag surface area for radiation, and T en v the environmental temperature.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 383 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAGC
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 384 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 385 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Both gbags are triggered before flow between the two gas bags begins.
2. The energy balance and mass flow is as shown in the following graphic:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 386 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. The GBAGC entry is obsolete. It is preferable to model connections between GBAG entries using
the GBAG → GBAGPOR → PORFGBG logic. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 6: Air Bags and
Occupant Safety, Porosity in Air Bags for more details.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 387 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAGCOU
where
P max = maximum Eulerian pressure exerted on the SURFAE
Remarks
1. The SURFACE SID referenced by the COUPLE entry CID and by the GBAG entry GID must be
equal.
2. All Eulerian and general coupling calculations are deactivated after transition from gas dynamics
to uniform pressure.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 388 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAGHTR
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 389 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. A combination of multiple GBAGHTRs with different HTRTYPEs is allowed.
2. All options of HTRTYPE can also be referenced by a COUHTR. It allows for setting up the exact
same model for either a uniform pressure model (GBAG to GBAGHTR) or an Eulerian model
(COUPLE to COUHTR). It is then possible to set up the model using the switch from full gas
dynamics to uniform pressure (GBAGCOU).
3. For the same SUBSURF multiple, different types of heat transfer may be defined.
4. A more detailed description can be found in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 6: Air Bags and
Occupant Safety, Porosity in Air Bags for more details.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 390 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAGINFL
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 391 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The INFLATR, INFLATR1, INFLHYB, or INFLHYB1 inflator geometry and location is defined
by a subsurface (SUBID). The area of the hole through which the gas enters is equal to the area
of the subsurface multiplied by COEFFV. A value of COEFFV = 1.0 opens up the complete
subsurface area, while a value of COEFFV = 0.0 results in a closed inflator area with no inflow.
2. The same INFTYPE entry referenced from this GBAGINFL entry can be referenced by a
COUINFL entry. This allows for setting up the exact same model for either a uniform pressure
model or an Euler Coupled model:
This makes it possible to set up the model using the switch from full gas dynamics to uniform
pressure (GBAGCOU).
3. One GBAG entry can reference more than one COUINFL entry. This allows for modeling of
multiple inflators in an air bag module.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 392 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GBAGPOR
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 393 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 394 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The combination of multiple GBAGPORs with different PORTYPEs is allowed.
2. All options of PORTYPE can also be referenced by a COUPOR. It allows for setting up the exact
same model for either a uniform pressure model (GBAG to GBAGPOR) or an Eulerian model
(COUPLE to COUPOR). It is then possible to set up the model using the switch from full gas
dynamics to uniform pressure (GBAGCOU).
3. The options PORFGBG and PERMGBG can be used to model air bags with
different compartments.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 395 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GRAV
Gravity Field
Defines a gravity acceleration field.
Remarks
1. The gravity acceleration g(t) is defined as
g ( t ) = S CA LE ⋅ N ⋅ T ( t )
where S CA LE is the gravity scale factor; N is the vector defined by NX, NY, and NZ; and T(t) is
the value interpolated at time t from the table referenced by the TLOADn entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
3. The type field on the TLOADn entry must be set to zero.
4. One gravitational field can be defined per problem.
5. The gravitational accelerations are applied to all masses in the problem.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 396 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GRDSET
Remarks
1. Any GRID entry with a blank value of PS is set to the value given on this entry. Note that the
constraints on the GRID and GRDSET entries are not cumulative; i.e., if there is a GRDSET entry
with constraint code 34 and a GRID entry with constraint code 2, the grid point is constrained only
in direction 2.
2. There can only be one GRDSET entry in the input data.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 397 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GRID
Grid Point
Defines the location of a geometric grid point in the model and its constraints.
Remarks
1. All grid-point numbers must be unique.
2. If CP or PS is blank or zero, the value given on the GRDSET entry is used.
3. Grid points can also be constrained using the SPC and SPC1 entries.
4. The values of X, Y and Z depend on the type of the coordinate system CP. Their meaning in each
type of coordinate system is listed below.
Type X Y Z
Rectangular X Y Z
Cylindrical R θ Z
Spherical R θ φ
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 398 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GROFFS
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 399 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGSUPPR
+C RBRCOR VALUE
+ YES 10000
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 400 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See Remark 3.
VALUE Number of steps R > 0.0 See
Remark 3.
Remarks
1. The property type definition and the property number are required. Since property numbers are
unique within a certain class of element types, the property type and the property number uniquely
define to what elements the hourglass suppression method and coefficients apply. The following
property types are valid entries:
It must be noted however, that only shell CQUAD4 and Lagrangian CHEXA and CPENTA
elements can suffer from undesired hourglass modes. All HGSUPPR entries referring to other
types of elements are ignored.
2. There are three types of hourglass suppression methods available in Dytran. These are standard
DYNA viscous (DYNA) hourglass damping, the Flanagan-Belytschko Stiffness (FBS) hourglass
damping, and the Flanagan-Belytschko Viscous (FBV) hourglass damping.
Lagrangian solid elements can address DYNA and FBS suppression; shell elements can address
DYNA and FBV suppression. The default for the Lagrangian solid elements is FBS. The default
for the shell elements is FBV.
The default hourglass suppression method can be globally changed by the PARAM,HGTYPE.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 401 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. The rigid-body rotation correction on the hourglass forces is only necessary in cases where shell
elements undergo a large rigid-body rotation. If the RBRCOR field is set to YES, and the VALUE
field is left blank, the correction is applied during each time step. If the VALUE field is set to a
number, the rotation correction is applied only when the rigid-body rotation would result in a
rotation of the element over 90° in less than VALUE time steps. Usually, if the rigid-body rotation
correction is necessary; 10000 is a good value. This option saves some CPU time.
The RBRCOR option applies to the Key-Hoff shell formulation only; for all other element types
and formulations, the option is ignored.
4. The membrane, warping and twisting coefficients apply to shell elements only; for all other
element types, the data is ignored. The solid damping coefficient applies to solid Lagrangian
elements only; for all other element types, the data is ignored.
The default value of the damping coefficients can be globally changed by PARAM,HGCOEFF.
5. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on
hourglass suppression.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 402 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HTRCONV
Remarks
1. The HTRCONV entry can be referenced from a COUHTR and/or GBAGHTR entry.
2. When used with Euler, the entry can only be used with the single material hydrodynamic Euler
solver using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state. Two of the four gas constants ( γ , R , c v
and/or c p ) have to be defined on the EOSGAM entry.
3. Either HTRCF-C or HTRCF-T must be specified.
4. Energy only transfers out of the air bag if the temperature inside the air bag is higher than the
environmental temperature.
5. A more detailed description of heat transfer by convection can be found in Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 6: Air Bags and Occupant Safety, Heat Transfer in Air Bags.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 403 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HTRRAD
Remarks
1. The HTRRAD entry can be referenced from a COUHTR and/or GBAGHTR entry.
2. When used with Euler, the entry can only be used with the single material hydrodynamic Euler
solver using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state. Two of the four gas constants ( γ , R , c v
and/or c p ) have to be defined on the EOSGAM entry.
3. Either GASEMI-C or GASEMI-T must be specified.
4. Energy only transfers out of the air bag if the temperature inside the air bag is higher than the
environmental temperature.
5. A more detailed description of heat radiation can be found in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 6: Air
Bags and Occupant Safety, Heat Transfer in Air Bags.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 404 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HYDSTAT
Remarks
1. It is assumed that each Euler domain contains at most two Eulerian materials and includes the
GRAV option. One material has to be a fluid using EOSPOL; the other a gas or void. This
EOSPOL material is given by the MID entry. The interface between gas and fluid is the free
surface and is assumed to be normal to the gravity vector as specified on the GRAV entry. For
example if the gravity vector points in the z-direction then the interface between the gas and the
fluid has to be horizontal..
2. The hydrostatic preset changes the density of the fluid like material in order to conform to the
hydrostatic preset. It overrules the material densities as specified on the TICEL and TICVAL
eoptions. Densities of the gas like material are not changed.
3. The free surface has to match with material fractions as defined in the initialization of Euler
elements by the TICEL and TICEUL options. The hydrostatic preset only changes densities; it does
not change material fractions.
4. There are two options to enter the location of the free surface. The first option is to enter a grid
point number. In that case, the CID and XCG-ZCG fields must be left blank. The gridpoint entry
already has the option of using a local coordinate system. When coordinates are used, the GID
field has to be left blank.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 405 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. If there is no structural grid point indicating the free surface, a new grid point can be defined that
is only used for determining the free surface level. If the gravity vector points in the z-direction,
only the z-coordinate of the grid point is used. The x and y coordinate can be chosen arbitrarily.
Similar remarks hold when the gravity vector is in one of the other coordinate directions. The
same holds when using coordinates instead of a grid point.
6. PATM should be equal to the pressure in the air.
7. When coupling surfaces are present, the HYDSTAT ID needs to be referenced by at least one
coupling surface. For each coupling surface, a different HYDSTAT entry can be defined. Several
COUPLE options can refer to the same HYDSTAT ID. If no HYDSTAT ID is specified on a
COUPLE entry, the Euler elements associated to this coupling surface are not initialized with a
hydrostatic preset.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 406 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
IGNORE
Remarks
1. The coupling surface will interact with all Euler elements except the ones defined by the SET1
referring to the SETID.
2. This option can only be used in combination with PARAM, FASTCOUP.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 407 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INCLUDE
Remarks
1. The file must be present in the area where Dytran is executing.
2. A comma cannot be used to separate the fields.
3. BEGIN BULK and ENDDATA can be present in the INCLUDE file.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 408 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLATR
Remarks
1. The INFLATR entry can be referenced from a COUINFL and/or GBAGINFL entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 409 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
2. When used in combination with the single material hydrodynamic Euler solver, an EOSGAM
(ideal gas) equation of state is required. In that case, the material number, MID, can be left blank.
When using the Multi-material solver, the material number, MID, has to point to one of the
Eulerian materials and the equation of state of that material has to be of type EOSGAM.
3. Either TEMP-C or TEMP-T must be specified. The INFLATR entry uses the specified
temperature as the dynamic temperature of the inflowing gas. The dynamic temperature is the
temperature of the moving gas, as opposed to the static temperature which is also known in
literature as total-, rest-, or stagnation temperature and refers to the temperature of the gas when
brought to rest from its moving condition. The INFLATR1 entry uses the static temperature of the
inflowing gas.
4. If the γ , GASNAM field contains a real entry real or is left blank, the inflator gas constants are
given on the INFLATR entry itself, see Remark 5. Otherwise, the entry is read as the name of an
INFLGAS entry. In this case, the remaining entries must be left blank.
5. Specify only two of the four gas constants. They are related as:
cp
γ = ----- > R = cp – cv
cv
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 410 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLATR1
Remarks:
1. The INFLATR1 entry can be referenced from a COUINFL and/or GBAGINFL entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 411 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
2. When used in combination with the single material hydrodynamic Euler solver, an EOSGAM
(ideal gas) equation of state is required. In that case, the material number, MID, can be left blank.
When using the Multi-material solver, the material number, MID, has to point to one of the
Eulerian materials and the equation of state of that material has to be of type EOSGAM. The Multi-
material solver does not allow the use of gas fractions.
3. Either TEMP-C or TEMP-T must be specified. The INFLATR1 entry uses the specified
temperature as the static temperature of the inflowing gas. In literature the static temperature is
also known as total-, rest-, or stagnation temperature and refers to the temperature of the gas when
brought to rest from its moving condition, as opposed to the dynamic temperature which refers to
the temperature of the moving gas. The INFLATOR entry uses the dynamic temperature of the
inflowing gas.
4. If the γ , GASNAM field contains a real entry real or is left blank, the inflator gas constants are
given on the INFLATR1 entry itself (see Remark 5.). Otherwise, the entry is read as the name of
an INFLGAS entry. In this case, the remaining entries must be left blank.
5. Specify only two of the four gas constants. They are related as:
cp
γ = ----- R = cp – cv
cv
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 412 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLCG
+INLC1 cp +
+INLC1 +
Remarks
1. The INFLTANK entry can be referenced from a COUNIFL and/or GBAGINFL entry.
2. When used in an Euler coupled analysis, the entry can only be used with the single material
hydrodynamic Euler solver using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
3. Either INITPRES or INITMAS has to be specified, but not both. The relation between INITMAS
and INITPRES is given by:
IIN IT MA S
IN IT PR E S = R ----------------------------- INI TTE M P
T AN K VO L
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 413 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. The cold gas inflator is a reservoir filled with high pressure gas. It is assumed that the volume
stays constant at TANKVOL. The mass inside the inflator will steadily decrease due to flow into the
Euler domain or to a GBAG. Due to inertia, it can happen that the pressure of the inflator becomes
less than the outside pressure. In that case, some inflow into the inflator occurs. Transport between
inflator and the Euler domain or GBAG is based on the constancy of total temperature. This is
equivalent to the pressure method.
5. If this field contains a real entry real or is left blank, the inflator gas constants are given on the
INFLATR1 entry itself (see Remark 5.). Otherwise, the entry will be read as the name of an
INFLGAS entry. In this case, the remaining entries must be left blank.
6. Specify only two of the four gas constants. They are related as:
cp
γ = ----- R = cp – cv
cv
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 414 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLFRAC
Remarks
1. The INFLFRAC entry must be referenced from an INFLHYB or INFLHYB1 entry.
2. Fraction values of the inflowing gas is linearly interpolated between the specified
time increments.
3. Use as many continuation lines as necessary to completely define the gas fractions. The data for
a time step are preceded by a TIME keyword. Missing entries are set to 0.
4. The order of the gases for which the fractions are specified is identical to the order in which the
gases are specified on the INFLHYB or INFLHYB1 entry.
5. At least one line of gas fractions must be given.
6. If molar fractions are to be used, the universal gas constant must be specified through
PARAM,UGASC.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 415 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. At least one of the fractions for each time step must have a value greater than 0.0.
8. Fractions for each time step should add up to 1.0. If this is not the case, they are scaled so that
they do.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 416 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLGAS
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 417 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. INFLGAS can be referenced by an INFLATR,INFLATR1, INFLHYB, INFLHYB1, or
INITGAS entry.
2. When the molar weight is given, the universal gas constant R uni must be specified using PARAM,
UGASC, so that:
R spec = R uni ⁄ MO LW T
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 418 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLHYB
Remarks
1. The INFLHYB entry can be referenced from a COUINFL and/or GBAGINFL entry.
2. When used in an Euler coupled analysis, the entry can only be used with the single material
hydrodynamic Euler solver using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
3. Either TEMP-C or TEMP-T must be specified. The INFLHYB entry uses the specified
temperature as the dynamic temperature of the inflowing gas. The dynamic temperature is the
temperature of the moving gas, as opposed to the static temperature which is also known in
literature as total-, rest-, or stagnation temperature and refers to the temperature of the gas when
brought to rest from its moving condition. The INFLHYB1 entry uses the static temperature of the
inflowing gas.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 419 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. At least one inflator gas must be specified using an INFLGAS entry. There is no limit to the
number of inflator gases per INFLHYB.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 420 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLHYB1
Remarks
1. The INFLHYB1 entry can be referenced from a COUINFL and/or GBAGINFL entry.
2. When used in an Euler coupled analysis, the entry can only be used with the single material
hydrodynamic Euler solver using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
3. Either TEMP-C or TEMP-T must be specified. The INFLHYB1 entry uses the specified
temperature as the static temperature of the inflowing gas. In literature the static temperature is
also known as total-, rest-, or stagnation temperature and refers to the temperature of the gas when
brought to rest from its moving condition as opposed to the dynamic temperature that refers to the
temperature of the moving gas. The INFLHYB entry uses the dynamic temperature of the
inflowing gas.
4. At least one inflator gas must be specified using an INFLGAS entry. There is no limit to the
number of inflator gases per INFLHYB1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 421 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFLTANK
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 422 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See Remark
5.
SFTP Scale factor for tank pressure R>0 1.0.
See Remark
5.
SFIP Scale factor for inflator pressure R>0 1.0.
See Remark
5.
Remarks
1. The INFLTANK entry can be referenced from a COUINFL and/or GBAGINFL entry.
2. When used in an Euler coupled analysis, the entry can only be used with the single material
hydrodynamic Euler solver using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
3. The initial tank pressure entry (INITPRES) is interpreted as an absolute pressure and used to
define reference pressure at t=0 in the tank. The different between INITPRES and the pressure
value at t=0 from the table will be added to the entire pressure curve of TPTABLE.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 423 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. The end tank pressure entry (ENDPRES) is interpreted as an absolute pressure at t=tend of tank
pressure table (TPTABLE). This value is used for calculation of total generated mass in the tank.
5. This field must be specified only when Inflator Pressure Method (INFPRES) is defined in the
METH-TANK field.
6. The initial inflator pressure entry (INFLPRES) is interpreted as an absolute pressure and used to
define reference pressure at t = 0 in the inflator. The different between INFLPRES and the
pressure value at t = 0 from the table is added to the entire pressure curve of IPTABLE.
7. Specify only two of the four gas constants. They are related as:
cp
γ = ----- R = cp – cv
cv
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 424 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INITGAS
Remarks
1. The INITGAS entry can be used to specify the initial gas composition for a gas bag or for an
Eulerian coupling surface. The INTID must be referenced either from a GBAG cad or a
COUPLE entry.
2. Use as many continuation lines as necessary to completely define the gas fractions.
3. At least one INFLGAS reference must be given.
4. Fractions should add up to 1.0. If this is not the case, they will be scaled so that they do.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 425 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
JOIN
Remarks
1. Grid points with the same number of degrees of freedom (DOF) can be equivalenced in the
preprocessing phase.
2. The JOIN gives rise to a hinge connection. A stiff connection can be achieved by using KJOIN.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 426 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
KJOIN
Remarks
1. To change the stiffness of the join, the STIFFNESS field can be defined.
2. Stiffness is increased by setting INTERFERE to none.
3. The kinematic join acts as a locally inserted stiff element.
4. The STIFFNESS field defines a relative stiffness where the value should be in the interval (-1/2,
1/2). Values less than zero reduce the stiffness, and values greater than zero increase the stiffness.
5. Geometric aspects are automatically taken into account.
6. In cases where the set of grid points for the KJOIN is too large to fit in one SET1 entry, you can
define multiple SET1 entries with the same set number. The SET1 entries that have the same set
number are automatically merged into one set.
7. You can define a hinge connection by using the JOIN entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 427 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MADGRP
Remarks
1. For details of how to use extended coupling to, please refer to the Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 7: User Subroutines, Using Dytran with MADYMO and the Madymo Users Manual.
2. Please specify exactly one element group and one node group when using extended coupling.
3. Only shell elements are supported for extended coupling.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 428 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MAT1
Remarks
1. The material number must be unique for all MAT1 and MAT8 entries.
2. The following rules apply when E, G, or v are blank:
a. E and G cannot both be blank.
b. If v and E or v and G are both blank, then both are set to 0.0.
c. If only one of E, G, or v is blank, it is computed from the equation:
E = 2 ( 1 + v )G
3. Implausible data on one or more MAT1 entries results in a User Warning Message. Implausible
data is defined as any of the following:
E < 0.0 or G < 0.0 and v > 0.5 or v < 0.0 .
4. It is strongly recommended that only two of the values be specified on the MAT1 entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 429 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MAT2
Remarks
1. This material can only be used in combination with a PSHELL entry to activate the classical
lamination theory for shell-structure analysis. If this material is used as transverse shear, then only
G11, G12, and G22 are read. Other material data is ignored. This option is only available for
C0-TRIA, BLT and KEYHOFF shell formulation.
The convention for the GIJ in fields 3 throug 8 are represented by the matrix relationship
as follows:
⎧ ⎫ ⎧ ⎫
⎪ σ1 ⎪ G 11 G 12 G 13 ⎪ ε 1 ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎨ σ2 ⎬ = G 12 G 22 G 23 ⎨ ε 2 ⎬
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎪ τ 12 ⎪ G 13 G 23 G 33 ⎪ γ 12 ⎪
⎩ ⎭ ⎩ ⎭
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 430 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MAT8
Remarks
1. An approximate value for G1,Z and G2,Z is the in-plane shear modulus G12. If test data is not
available to accurately determine G1,Z and G2,Z if the material and transverse shear calculations
are deemed essential, the value of G12 may be supplied for G1,Z and G2,Z. The MD Nastran
defaults for G1,Z and G2,Z are infinite if left blank. Dytran assumes the transverse shear moduli
to be equal to G12.
2. Excess data as defined in the MD Nastran MAT8 continuation lines is ignored. Equivalent entries
can be defined in the MAT8A Bulk Data entry.
3. This material model can only be referenced from a PCOMP entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 431 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MAT8A
+ +
+ +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 432 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Blank No failure
COMBINAT Combination
C See Remark 8.
HASHIN Hashin theory
C See Remark 2.
NV Number of additional history variables for a user 0 < I < 10 0
model. See Remark 8.
S Failure stress for in-plane shear R > 0.0 See Remark 4.
ALPHA Nonlinear shear coefficient. See Remark 5. R ≥ 0.0 0.
TRSFAIL Transverse shear failure. C SUBL
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 433 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The material number must refer to a MAT8 material definition.
2. If a failure theory is selected other than USER or COMBINAT, the theory defines the following
failure modes:
Matrix tension/compression
For an element to fail completely, both fiber and matrix in all sublayers must fail.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 434 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
10. Any failure theory introduces five additional sublayer variables. The PFDST entry introduces
three additional variables. The number of user variables is defined by NV.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 435 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MATINI
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 436 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 437 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All initialization surfaces must form a multifaceted closed volume.
2. In case the surface is defined as a set of segments attached to shell elements you must define the
elements as dummy elements by choosing the DUMMY option on the FORM entry of the
PSHELL1 entry.
3. An initialization surface can only be used to initialize regions in an Eulerian mesh with
appropriate initial conditions. An initialization surface can not be used as a coupling surface,
contact surface or as a rigid surface.
4. The normals of all the segments that form the initialization surface must point in the same general
direction and results in a positive closed volume. Setting the REVERSE option to ON ensures that
this condition is satisfied, regardless of how the segments are defined initially.
5. The COVER option determines how Eulerian elements that are (partially) inside or outside of the
initialization surface are processed.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 438 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MATRIG
Rigid-Body Properties
Defines the properties of a rigid body.
+ VX VY VZ WX WY WZ +
+ 13.3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 439 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. All coordinates are defined in the basic coordinate system.
2. If MASS is blank or zero, the mass is calculated from the density and the geometry of the mesh
defining the rigid body.
3. The continuation lines are not required.
4. The MATRIG definition is used instead of a DYMATn definition and is referenced by properties
PSOLID, PSHELL, PBAR, and PBEAMn. Different properties can refer to the same MATRIG entry
forming one rigid body. The matrmerg or matrmrg1 option (see PARAM,MATRM(E)RG(1))
can be used for merging different MATRIG and RBE2-FULLRIG definitions into one single rigid
body.
5. By using PARAM,RBE2INFO,GRIDON, the grid points of the MATRIG will be listed in the
output file.
6. If the fields VX, VY, VZ, WX, WY, and WZ are blank, the initial conditions of the rigid body are
calculated from the initial velocities on the TIC and TIC1 entries referring to grid points attached
to the rigid body. The net initial conditions are the average of those for all the grid points attached
to the rigid body.
If the initial conditions are set using the VX, VY, VZ, WX, WY, and WZ fields, the TIC and TIC1
entries referring to grid points attached to the rigid body are ignored.
7. If the inertia tensor or the coordinates of the center of gravity are undefined, then they are
computed from the density or mass and the geometry of the mesh defining the rigid body.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 440 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
8. The inertia tensor can only be defined in a local rectangular coordinate system. If the entry for a
local coordinate system is left blank, then the inertia tensor is defined in the global
coordinate system.
9. The behavior of rigid bodies in discussed in Lagrangian Elements.
10. The mass and the location of the Center of Gravity for a rigid body can change from the input
cards defined by the user when the rigid body is attached to elements with elastic-plastic
materials. The node that is shared will get a mass from both the rigid body and from the mass of
the elastic-plastic element. For correct rigid body mechanical, the added mass of the node from
the elastic body needs to be added to the total mass of the rigid body. To this end, also the location
of the center of gravity might change location. However, in cases the rigid model was modeled
with symmetry planes, then it is not desired to recalculate the Center of Gravity. The extra mass
of the elastic-plastic element is always added to the mass of the rigid body.
11. The center of gravity can be defined in a local rectangular coordinate system (CID). However,
XC, YC, and ZC (x, y, and z coordinates of the center of gravity in the basic coordinate system)
should be left blank when XC-LOCAL, YC-LOCAL, ZC-LOCAL (x, y, and x coordinates of the
center of gravity in a local coordinate system) are defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 441 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MESH
Mesh Generator
Defines a mesh.
+ X0 Y0 Z0 DX DY DZ +
+ +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 442 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See Remark 1.
TYPE Type of mesh generation. C Required.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 443 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 444 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See Remark 7.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 445 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The grid points of the mesh are generated at the following locations:
Type = ADAPT:
( x, y, z ) = ( X R E F + i * D X E L, Y RE F + j * DYEL, ZREF + k * DZEL )
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 446 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Grid points and elements located a certain distance outside the coupling surface are not created.
This saves memory and CPU time.
When (XREF, YREF, ZREF) are outside the coupling surface, no actual grid point is created at
this location, but the mesh is shifted appropriately.
Type = BOX:
( x, y, z ) = ( X 0 + i * DXEL, Y0 + j * DYEL, Z0 + k * DZ EL )
Nodes and elements are always created, even if the MESH is referenced from the MESHID of a
COUPLE entry.
One of the following input combinations is required:
TYPE=ADAPT
a. DXEL, DYEL, DZEL or
b. DX, DY, DZ and NX, NY, NZ
JDXEL = DX/NX; DYEL = DY/NY; DZEL = DZ/NZ
TYPE=BOX
a. DXEL, DYEL, DZEL and NX, NY, NZ or
b. DX, DY, DZ and NX, NY, NZ
JDXEL = DX/NX; DYEL = DY/NY; DZEL = DZ/NZ
2. When the starting grid point and/or element number is left blank, the default start number for the
elements and grid-points is equal to the maximum number used +1. For simulations with multiple
coupling surfaces, two methods of treating transport between the Euler meshes are available. One
method supports meshes of TYPE = ADAPT, but does not allow the specification of starting
element or starting grid-point number. This method is the default. The other method only supports
meshes of TYPE = BOX but does allow for the specification of starting element number and
starting grid-point number. This method is activated by PARAMFLOW-METHOD,FACET.
3. The PID should refer to an existing property id, which can handle the property type given
by PROP.
4. To avoid that the Euler mesh is resized every time-step, the functions defined by TID-X, TID-Y,
TID-Z must describe a ‘step-function’, as such in this example:
i. TABLED1,1,,,,,,,,+1
ii. +,0.0,1.0,,,,,,,+
iii. +,1.E-3,1.0,,,,,,,+
iv. +.1.E-3,1.1,,,,,,,+
v. +,2.E-3,1.1,,,,,,,+
vi. +,2.E-3,1.2,,,,,,,+
which specifies the following function:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 447 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. Care must be taken when refining the Euler mesh. To avoid instabilities, it is advised to stay
within the following guidelines.
a. For each refining step, use a scale factor larger than 0.5.
b. Allow the solution to become smooth again after each refining step. For air bag simulations,
use an interval larger than 5 * d ia me t er_ai rb ag / so un dsp ee d .
6. Resizing is not available for the Multi-material solver.
7. In most cases, METHOD=ALL is the preferred method. Using METHOD=MATERIAL may be
helpful in case of instabilities due to presence of void regions.
8. A biased mesh has nonconstant element sizes in selected directories. Neighbor element size can
have a constant ratio or have identical size. In literature, this type of mesh is also referred to as a
nonuniform mesh or a locally refined mesh.
9. A block mesh consists of number of planes in all three directions. For a nonbiased mesh, these
planes are at fixed distance from each other. In a biased mesh, the distance between subsequent
planes can differ. The varying element size is determined by 1. IBIDX. or 2. GROWX or 3.
The constant step size specified by X0, NX, DX. Here, IBIDX overrules GROWX and GROWX
overrules the X0, NX, DX specification. Likewise for the other directions. The locations of the
planes are written out in the OUT file. Intersecting an x-plane with a y-plane and z-plane will give
a grid point. By carrying out all intersections, the grid points are constructed.
10. SUBMESH is used to replace part of the mesh by a finer mesh. It is meant for use with multiple
coupling surfaces. If this is not the case, then PARAM, GRADED-MESHshould be used. It is
required that overlap between the mest and submesh consists of, at least, one layer of fine
elements. Also, the boundary of the submesh should not be on the top of faces of the mesh. To
check the element replace,ent, the simulation can be run with constant pressure. Then velocities
should remain virtually zero. For both the mesh as well as the submesh, a distinct archive is
written out. Visualizing by Patran can be done by:
a. Reading in the archive for the mesh. Delete any elements that show zero mass or pressure and
that are covered by the submesh.
b. Reading in the submesh.
c. Two sets of results are now in the data base.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 448 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
By selecting the results of the mesh and then the results of the submesh, a fringe plot of the whole
domain can be obtained. Since the two meshes do not share grid points, it is beter to plot fringe
plots using element values.
11. To determine a suitable size for the static output box the simulation can be run first without the
STATBOX option. In the OUT file each summary of adaptive meshing gives the smallest box
surrounding all adaptive elements so far. The last summary then yields the dimension of the static
output box. To accommodate for elements that are not completely inside the box, the actual static
output box is automatically extended a little. The actual dimensions are written in the out file after
the first adaptive meshing summary. Is not needed to set the XREF, YREF, and ZREF options. If
they are set the static output box will be compatible with the defined reference point.
12. Static output supports resizing. After each resizing, the current Euler archive is closed and a new
one is opened. Next cycles in the output request are written to this newly opened archive until the
next resize.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 449 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MOMENT
Remarks
1. At time t , the moment M(t) is given by M ( t ) = S CA L E * N * T ( t )
where S CA LE is the scale factor; N is the vector given by N1, N2, and N3; and T(t) is the value
at time t interpolated from the table referenced on the TLOADn entry.
2. Moments can also be defined on the DAREA entry.
3. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
4. If a component field N1, N2, and/or N3 is left blank:
Moment prescription – The component of the moment is equal to zero.
Velocity prescription – The component of the angular velocity is not restrained.
5. If G references a MATRIG, an RBE2-FULLRIG, or a RIGID surface, the load is applied to the
center of the rigid body. If G references a MATRIG, G must be MR<id>, where id is the MATRIG
number. If G references a RBE2-FULLRIG, G must be FR<id>, where id is the RBE2 number.
If G references a RIGID surface, G is the RIGID surface number.
6. If the TYPE field on the TLOAD entry is 0, this defines a moment applied to a grid point. If the
TYPE field is 2, it defines an enforced motion on the grid point. If the TYPE field is 12, it defines
an enforced motion applied to the center of the rigid body, and if the TYPE field is 13, it defines
a moment applied to the center of a rigid body.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 450 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MOMENT1
Remarks
1. At time t , the moment M( t) is given by
M ( t ) = S CA L E * N * T ( t )
where S CA LE is the scale factor, N is the vector from G1 to G2, and T(t) is the value at time t
interpolated from the table referenced by the TLOADn entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
3. The MOMENT1 entry defines a follower moment in that the direction of the moment changes as
the grid points G1 and G2 move during the analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 451 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MOMENT2
Remarks
1. At time t , the moment M(t) is given by:
M ( t ) = S CA L E*N * T ( t )
where S CA LE is the scale factor, N is the vector product of the vectors from G1 to G2 and G3 to
G4. respectively, and T ( t ) is the value at time t interpolated from the table referenced by the
TLOADn entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
3. The MOMENT2 entry defines a follower moment in that the direction of the moment changes as
the grid points G1, G2, G3, and G4 move during the analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 452 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NASINIT
MD Nastran Initialization
Definition of the logistics of a Dytran prestress run.
Remarks
1. The time step is constant during the displacement phase and is defined by PARAM,INISTEP.
2. Damping is optional and is not always necessary.
3. The deformed geometry grid-point data is written out after the displacement phase, if no damping
is requested, or after the relaxation phase, when the DAMP field is set to YES. The same applies
to the solution file. (See also the SOLUOUT and BULKOUT FMS statements.)
4. The displacements from an MD Nastran solution are imposed by an enforced velocity field
calculated from the displacements and control parameters.
5. All boundary conditions and loads defined are deactivated during the displacement phase and are
activated after the displacement phase ends.
6. Note that although the deformed geometry after the displacement phase is exactly the same as the
MD Nastran geometry, the actual stress state may differ due to differences in Dytran and MD
Nastran element formulations.
7. Lagrangian CHEXA, CQUAD4, and CTRIA3 elements can be initialized, but the shell
membranes cannot.
8. For prestressing rotating structures, it is recommended that a centrifugal force field be used, rather
than a rotational velocity field. In the actual transient dynamic analysis, the centrifugal force field
can be replaced by a rotational velocity field with consistent boundary conditions.
9. Make the problem setup for the final transient analysis consistent with the prestress analysis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 453 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PARAM
Parameter
Defines the values for parameters used during the solution.
Remarks
1. A list of the parameters that can be set, along with the parameter names and values, is given in
Chapter 6 : Parameters.
2. PARAM entries do not necessarily have to be located in the Bulk Data Section.
3. PARAM values can be redefined during restarts.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 454 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBAR
Remarks
1. I1 is the moment of inertia about the element z-axis, I zz .
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 455 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBCOMP
+ SHFACT N1 N2 SYMOPT +
+ 1 +
+ Y1 Z1 C1 MID1 +
+ -0.5 1.2 0.1 18 +
+ Y2 Z2 C2 MID2 +
+ 0.2 0.9 0.15 +
+ Yi Zi Ci MIDi
+ ... ... ...
See Remark
2.
A Area of beam cross section R> 0 Required
SHFACT Shear factor for the section R 0.83333
N1, N2 The (y,z) coordinates of neutral axis. See the figure in R 0.0
the CBEAM entry description.
SYMOPT Symmetry option to input lumped areas for the beam 1< I<5 Required
cross section. See Figure 5-12.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 456 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Figure 5-12 PBCOMP Entry SYMOPT Type Examples with Eight Lumped Areas.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 457 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The PID number must be unique with respect to other PBCOMP entries as well as PBEAM entries.
The second continuation entry may be repeated 18 more times. If SECTION = 5 a maximum of
21 continuation entries is allowed; that is, a maximum of 20 lumped areas may be input. If
SECTION=1 through 4, the total number of areas input plus the total number generated by
symmetry must not exceed 20.
2. If the MIDi field on a continuation entry is blank, the value will be that of MID on the parent entry.
MIDi values may be input on continuations without the corresponding Yi, Zi, and Ci values to
allow different stress-strain laws.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 458 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBEAM
Beam Property
Defines the properties of the CBAR and CBEAM element.
+ +
+ +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 459 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This entry is an alternative to thePBARentry and defines exactly the same element and properties.
It is more complicated to use than PBAR and has no advantages. PBEAM is retained for
compatibility with MD Nastran and those modeling packages that write PBEAM entries. Use the
PBAR entry if you can.
2. A Belytschko-Schwer beam is used with a shear factor of 0.83333. The plastic moduli are
assumed to be those for a rectangular section
Zp y = 0.75 * A * I 2
Zp z = 0.75 * A * I1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 460 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBEAM1
+ A I1 I2 J ZPZ ZPY +
+ +
Remarks
1. Only the entries that are relevant for Belytschko-Schwer beam definition are listed. PBEAM1
entries that apply to Hughes-Liu beams appear earlier in this PBEAM1 discussion.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 461 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 462 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 463 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 464 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBEAM1
+ V1 V2 V3 V4
+ 30.1 30.1 10.0 10.0
HUGHES Hughes-Liu
QUAD Type of quadrature: C GAUSS
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 465 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Only the entries that are relevant for the Hughes-Liu beam definition are listed here. PBEAM1
entries that apply to Belytschko-Schwer beams are provided in the previous PBEAM1 description.
For more complex cross-sections with the Hughes-Liu beam definition, please use the Predefined
Hughes Liu Section (HLSECTS) option.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 466 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBEAM1
+ V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 V8 +
+ 30.1 30.1 10.0 10.0 +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 467 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 468 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Only the entries that are relevant for the predefined Hughes-Liu beam definition are listed here.
PBEAM1 entries that apply to Belytschko-Schwer beams are provided in PBEAM1 (Belytschko-
Schwer).
2. The cross sections TUBE and RECT can be defined in the regular Hughes-Liu PBEAM1entry.
3. The following cross sections can be defined using the Dytran database.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 469 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 470 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 471 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBEAML
Remarks
1. For structural problems, PBEAML entries must reference a MAT1 orDMATEP material entry.
2. The property number PID must be unique with respect to all other PBEAMand PBEAML
property numbers.
3. The PBEAML entry is automatically translated into a Hughes-Liu PBEAMentry.
4. See the PBEAM1entry description for a discussion of beam-element geometry. The BAR and
TUBE sections are translated into Hughes-Liu PBEAM1definition with the Gaussian quadrature.
The others are divided into a predefined pattern of integration points.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 472 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. Following is an overview of the available cross sections and the specific definitions valid for these
cross sections.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 473 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 474 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PBELT
Belt Property
Defines the properties of a belt element referenced by a CROD entry.
DENSITY Density of the belt elements as mass per unit length R > 0.0 Required
DAMP1 A damping force is added to the internal force of the R > 0.0 0.1
belt elements to damp out high frequency oscillations.
The damping force is equal to:
where
d ve l = velocity of elongation
dt = time step
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 475 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DAM P 2 * F belt
where
F bel t = is the internal force in the belt element.
SLACK Number of a TABLED1 defining the slack as a function I>0 Blank
of time. The slack must be specified as engineering
strain and will be subtracted from the element strain at
time n as:
Remarks
1. The loading and unloading curves must start at (0.0, 0.0).
2. During loading, the loading curve is applied to determine the force in the belt element. At
unloading, the unloading curve is shifted along the strain axis until it intersects the loading curve
at the point from which unloading commences. The unloading table is applied for unloading and
reloading, until the strain again exceeds the intersection point. Upon further loading, the loading
table is applied. For subsequent unloading, the sequence is repeated.
3. Belt elements are tension only elements.
4. Instantaneous slack of an element can also be initialized per element using theTICEL entry with
the keyword SLACK and a corresponding VALUE.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 476 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PCOMP
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 477 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The default under MID2, MID3, . . ., is the last-defined material, in this case MID1; for T2,
T3, . . ., all these thicknesses are equal to T1.
2. At least one of the three values (MIDi, Ti, THETAi) must be present for a ply to exist. The
minimum number of plies is one.
3. The symmetric laminate option is currently not available.
4. The thickness of the element is the sum of the ply thicknesses regardless of the values on the
CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 478 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PCOMPA
+ SPINCOR
+ YES
See Remark 2.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 479 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
See Remark 4.
SPINCOR Spin correction: C No
Remarks
1. For CQUAD4 elements, the default formulation is Key-Hoff. For CTRIA3 elements, the default
formulation is C0-TRIA. See the Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive
Default Settingon application sensitive defaults.
2. If the failure mode is such that fiber and shear strength or matrix and shear strength are lost in all
layers, the element is not included in the time-step calculation. If the element fails completely, the
element is omitted from the time-step calculations, irrespective of the value entered in this field.
3. If the STRNOUT field is NO, the strain cannot be output.
4. If ICLT is set to 1, the analysis is performed with classical lamination theory (For more detail
about the classical lamination theory, see the Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 5: Classical
Lamination Theory (CLT) for Multilayered Shells In this case, it is not possible to request the total
strain output. The (transverse) shear correction factor input is ignored since it is calculated inside
Dytran. There is no update of the cross-sectional properties due to failure. The failure flag only
indicates that the failure condition is satisfied. Additional output for element variables is
available, namely the stress resultants (NXX, NYY, NXY, MXX, MYY, MXY, QYZ, and QZX). Also
the ABD-Q matrices of each element can be requested for output. These data are only stored in
the first layer. The variable names are AijM, BijM, DijM, and QsijM for the components of the
A-, B-, D- and Q-matrices, respectively. For example, to request the A11 of the A-matrix, the
variable name is A11M01.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 480 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 481 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PDAMP
Remarks
1. This entry defines a linear viscous damper.
2. For a discussion of the various types of damper elements, see Lagrangian Elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 482 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PELAS
Remarks
1. Be cautious when using negative spring-stiffness values because values are defined directly on
some of the CELASn entry types.
2. One or two elastic spring properties may be defined on a single entry.
3. For a discussion of the various types of spring elements, see Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 2: Elements, Lagrangian Elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 483 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PELAS1
Remarks
1. The values in the table are either force and displacement or moment and rotation, depending on
whether the spring connects translational or rotational degrees of freedom.
2. The values in the table are interpolated to determine the force/moment for a particular
displacement/rotation.
3. If UNLOAD table is not defined, unloading occurs corresponding to the LOAD curve.
4. Input for loading and unloading must be consistent. Both curves must be either completed defined
or have only positive values (start from (0.,0.)). When only positive values are defined, the curves
are mirrored automatically.
5. For a discussion of the various types of spring elements, see Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 2: Elements, Lagrangian Elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 484 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PELASEX
Remarks
1. The seven user values are passed to the user subroutine EXELAS.
2. Dytran does no checking on the user values.
3. For a discussion of the various types of spring elements, see Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 2: Elements, Lagrangian Elements.
For a discussion of user-written subroutines, see Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 485 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PERMEAB
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 486 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The PERMEAB entry can be referenced from a COUPOR and/or GBAGPORentry.
2. When used with Euler, the entry can only be used with the single material hydrodynamic Euler or
Roe solver using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
3. Either PERM-C or PERM-T must be specified.
4. The values for the environment p env ( P E NV ) , ρ env ( RHO E NV ) , e env ( S IE E NV ) must be defined
consistent with an ideal gas equation of state:
p env = ( γ env – 1 )ρ env e env
The γ en v is calculated by Dytran, and is used when inflow occurs. Inflow occurs when
p env > p insi de .
5. CP is only required if updating of Euler or gas bag gas constants is done, for example if hybrid
inflators are defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 487 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PERMGBG
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 488 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The PERMGBG entry can be referenced from a COUPOR and/or GBAGPOR entry.
2. When used with Euler, the entry can only be used with the single material hydrodynamic Euler
solver, using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
3. Either PERM-C or PERM-T must be specified.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 489 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PEULER
Remarks
1. Make the property number unique with respect to all other property numbers.
2. The elements that reference this property use the Eulerian formulation.
3. If TYPE is set to HYDRO, only one material number for all the Eulerian elements of TYPE is used
and a hydrodynamic yield model is chosen.
4. If the TYPE is set to either 1stOrder or 2ndOrder, only one material for all Eulerian elements
of TYPE is used and the Riemann solution-based solver is chosen.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 490 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. If TYPE is set to STRENGTH, only one material number for all the Eulerian elements of TYPE is
used and a nonhydrodynamic yield model is chosen.
6. If TYPE is set to MMHYDRO, different material numbers for all Eulerian elements of TYPE are
used and a hydrodynamic behavior is chosen for each material.
7. If TYPE is set to MMSTREN, different material numbers for all Eulerian elements of TYPE are
used and a yield model is chosen for each material.
8. In a multimaterial Euler calculation, the options MMSTREN and MMHYDRO can not be mixed; they
are mutually exclusive.
9. If the material number is blank or zero, the corresponding elements are void. Note that this is not
allowed in the Riemann solution-based Euler solvers, as they do not handle void elements. If you
define void elements and select either the 1stOrder or 2ndOrder scheme, an error message
is issued and the analysis stops.
10. Initial conditions are defined on the TICEL Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 491 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PEULER1
Remarks
1. Remarks 1 through 9 of PEULER apply also here.
2. Initial conditions and/or material assignments are defined on theTICEUL Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 492 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PLOAD
Remarks
1. For quadrilateral surfaces, order the grid points G1 through G4 around the perimeter of the
surface, and number them clockwise or counterclockwise.
2. The direction of positive pressure is calculated according to the right-hand rule using the sequence
of grid points. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 2: Elements, Lagrangian Elements.
3. Reference LID from a TLOADn entry.
4. The pressure p(t) at time t is given by
p ( t ) = S CA LE * T ( t )
where S CA LE is the scale factor and T ( t ) is the value interpolated from the function or table given
on the TLOADn entry at time t.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 493 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PLOAD4
Remarks
1. For solid (CTETRA, CPENTACTETRA) elements, the direction of positive pressure is inwards.
2. For plate elements, (CQUAD4, CTRIA3 the direction of positive pressure is the direction of the
positive normal determined by applying the right-hand rule to the sequence of the element grid-
point connectivity.
3. G1 and G3 are ignored for CTRIA3 and CQUAD4 elements.
4. For the triangular faces of CPENTA elements, G1 is a corner grid-point number that is on the face
being loaded, and the G3 or G4 field is left blank. For the faces of CTETRA elements, G1 is a
corner grid-point number that is on the face being loaded, and G4 is a corner grid-point number
that is not on the face being loaded. Since a CTETRA has only four corner grid points, this grid
point G4 is unique and different for each of the four faces of a CTETRA element.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 494 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. If the pressure is 9999., a pressure load is not applied. Instead, it is translated to a CFACE1 entry.
This makes it easy to generate CFACE1 entries using a standard preprocessor. See Dytran User’s
Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis,Using a Modeling Program with Dytran for details. The
LID field is converted to the number of the set of faces.
6. Reference LID by a TLOAD Bulk Data entry.
7. The pressure p(t) at time t is given by:
p ( t ) = S CA LE * T ( t )
where S CA LE is the scale factor and T ( t ) is the value interpolated from the function or table given
on the TLOADn entry at time t .
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 495 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PLOADEX
Remarks
1. Reference LID by a TLOAD1entry.
2. The EXPLD subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
3. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for a description of user-written subroutines.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 496 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PMARKER
Remarks
1. The PMARKER entry is ignored for elements referring to structural grid points. These structural
grid points move with the structure and the FV velocities do not change their velocity.
2. Type = FIXED: means that the marker is stationary through out the simulation and is, therefore,
not moving with the Euler velocity. If the marker grid is located outside the Eulerian domain(s),
the Marker is allowed to exist. However, no variables are recorded and they appear as zero on the
Time History plots.
3. Type = Moving: marker is moving along with the Eulerian material. When the grid point
approaches a coupling surface, there is no mechanism that prevents the marker from passing
through the coupling surface. When this happens, the marker enters an element that is covered and
motion of the grid point stops. It is allowed that the grid point moves from one Euler domain to
the other through a porous hole or a coupling surface with interactive failure.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 497 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PMINC
Remarks
1. If the pressure in an element falls below the minimum pressure, the element spalls. The pressure
and yield stress are set to zero.
2. The default for the minimum pressure for Lagrangian solids is -1.E20. For Eulerian elements, the
default is 0.0.
3. If an element spalls a void is created. To prevent too small void fractions, a void fraction is put to
zero if it is smaller than FVTOL. The default for FVTOL is 1.E-4 and works only for Eulerian
elements. This value should be decreased in case of large mass increase of material without any
reason. Voids can be created during transport of material, because of a material failure and by
unloading.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 498 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. With FVTOL2 =0, any void fraction in an element will lead to failure, and then no tensile stresses
are possible. In simulations in which tensile conditions are present, it can be required to allow for
tensile stresses in the presence of a small void fraction not exceeding a threshold. This threshold
is given by FVTOL2. A good value for FVTOL2 = 2*FVTOL = 2.E-4. FVTOL2 is only used for
Eulerian materials. FVTOL2 should be larger than FVTOL.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 499 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
POREX
Remarks
1. The porosity ID (PID) must be referenced by a COUPOR entry.
2. The subroutine EXPOR must be present in a Fortran source file that is referenced by a
USERCODE File Management Statement in the input file.
3. See the explanation in Chapter 7: User Subroutines on how to use user-written subroutines.
4. The porosity name specified in the NAME field of the POREX entry is passed to the user-written
subroutine and can be used to identify the porosity model.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 500 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORFCPL
Remarks
1. The PORFCPL entry can only be referenced from COUPOR entry.
2. This option can only be used in combination with PARAM, FASTCOUP, and EOSGAM material.
3. The pressure method used to calculate the material transport through a porous (sub) surface is
described in the Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 4: Fluid Structure Interaction, General
CouplingFor more detail on modeling flow between Eulerian domains, see PARAM, FLOW-
METHOD.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 501 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORFGBG
Remarks
1. The PORFGBG entry can be referenced from a COUPOR and/or GBAGPORentry,
2. When used with Euler, this entry can only be used with the single material hydrodynamic Euler
solver, using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 502 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORFLCPL
Remarks
1. The PORFLCPL entry can only be referenced from COUPOR or GBAGPOR entry.
2. This option can only be used in combination with PARAM, FASTCOUP.
3. The velocity method used to calculate the material transport through a porous (sub) surface is
described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 4: Fluid Structure Interaction, General Coupling.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 503 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORFLGBG
Remarks
1. The PORFLGBG entry can be referenced from a COUPORand/or GBAGPORentry,
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 504 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
2. Once gas from a GBAG enters a Eulerian domain, it is treated as Eulerian material. For the single
material Euler solver, only one Eulerian material is present and the material number, MID, can be
left blank. Since GBAG material is an ideal gas, it is required that Eulerian material also uses an
EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of sate. When using the multi-material solver, the material number,
MID, has to point to one of the Eulerian materials and the equation of state of that material has to
be of type EOSGAM.
3. The velocity method used to calculate the material transport through a porous (sub)surface are
described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 4: Fluid Structure Interaction, General Coupling.
4. For flow between two uniform pressure air bags, the material transport is based on the theory of
one-dimensional gas flow through a small orifice, and depends on the pressure difference. This is
equivalent to the PORFLGBG entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 505 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORFLOW
PRESSURE Pressure
DENSITY Density
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 506 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Reference FID by a COUPOR entry.
2. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element that the c
segment is intersecting.
3. The SURFACE can be only a general coupling surface (see the COUPLE entry).
4. The different methods used to calculate the material transport through a porous (sub)surface are
described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 4: Fluid Structure Interaction, General Coupling.
5. METHOD=VELOCITY is valid for all equation of state models.
METHOD=PRESSURE is valid for EOSGAM (ideal gas) in combination with the single material
hydrodynamic Euler solver.
6. Alternative methods are available to define holes and permeable sections in an air bag. See the
entries: COUPOR, GBAGPOR, PORHOLE, PERMEAB, PORFGBG and PERMGBG
7. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the material number, the density,
and specific energy have to be set. On the other hand, when material flows out of a multi-material
Euler mesh, it is assumed that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element
contributes to the outflow of mass. The materials are transported in porportion to their relative
volume fractions.
8. Prescribing both pressure and velocity may lead to the instabilities.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 507 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORFLOWT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 508 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 509 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Reference FID by a COUPOR entry.
2. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element that the
(SUBSURF)SURFACEsegment is intersecting.
3. The SURFACE can be only a general coupling surface (see the COUPLEentry).
4. The different methods used to calculate the material transport through a porous (sub)surface are
described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 4: Fluid Structure Interaction, General Coupling.
These are METHOD=VELOCITY and METHOD=PRESSURE. For PORFLOWT, the VELOCITY
method is used. The PRESSURE method is not available.
5. Alternative methods are available to define holes and permeable sections in an air bag. See the
entries: COUPOR, GBAGPOR, PORHOLE, PERMEAB, PORFGBG, and PERMGBG.
6. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the material number, the density,
and specific energy have to be set. On the other hand, when material flows out of a multi-material
Euler mesh, it is assumed that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element
contributes to the outflow of mass. The materials are transported in porportion to their relative
volume fractions.
7. The boundary condition initiates or determines a wave in compressible material like gas and
water. This can be either an outgoing or an ingoing wave. For stability, it is imortant that the
waves created are compatible with the flow type near the boundary. Relevant flow types are
subsonic inflow, subsonic outflow, supersonic inflow, and supersonic outflow. For example, for
subsonic inflow, prescribing both pressure and velocity would initiate outgoing waves. Outgoing
waves for an inflow boundary condition is known to be instable. However, for supersonic inflow,
you can specify both pressure and velocity since there are no outgoing waves at a supersonic
inflow boundary.
8. When a TABLEEX is referenced, the EXFUNC user subroutine must be created. See TABLEEX for
more details.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 510 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORHOLE
Remarks
1. The PORHOLE entry can be referenced from a COUPOR and/or GBAGPORentry.
2. When used with Euler, this entry can only be used with the single material hydrodynamic Euler
solver, using an EOSGAM (ideal gas) equation of state.
3. The values for the environment p en v (PENV), ρ env (RHOENV), e env (SIEENV) must be defined
consistent with an ideal-gas equation of state:
p env = ( γ env – 1 )ρ env e env
The γ en v is calculated by Dytran, and is used when inflow occurs. Inflow occurs when
p env > p insi de .
4. CP is only required if updating of Euler or gas bag gas constants is done, for example if hybrid
inflators are defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 511 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORHYDST
Remarks
1. Reference FID by a COUPORentry.
2. The velocity and outflow density have the same value as the element that the
(SUB)SURFACEsegment is intersecting.
3. The SURFACE can be only a general coupling surface (see the COUPLE entry).
4. It is required that the coupling surface refers to a HYDSTAT entry. This HYDSTAT entry will be
used to prescribe a hydrostatic pressure profile on the subsurface. For example, the water level
and atmospheric pressure are taken from the HYDSTAT entry. This defines the pressure and the
inflow density.
5. In contributions of the surface to the Euler elements, the pressure gradient across the surface is
taken into account. Therefore, splitting up of the surface and creating new PORHYDST entries
does not increase the accuracy of the prescribed pressures. If the water level and atmospheric
pressure are the same in the whole region outside the coupling surface, using one PHORHYDST
entry is sufficient.
6. The atmospheric pressure is prescribed on those parts of the surface that are above the water level.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 512 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PORLHOLE
+ MID
+ 3
Remarks
1. The PORLHOLE entry can be referenced from a COUPOR and/or GBAGPOR entry.
2. When used in combination with the single material hydrodynamic Euler solver, an EOSGAM
(ideal gas) equation of state is required. In that case, the material number, MID, can be left blank.
When using the multi-material solver, the material number, MID, has to point to one of the
Eulerian materials and the equation of state of that material has to be of type EOSGAM.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 513 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. The values for the environment p env (PENV), ρ env (RHOENV), e env (SIEENV) must be defined
consistent with an ideal-gas equation of state:
p env = ( γ env – 1 )ρ env e env
The γ env is calculated by Dytran, and is used when inflow occurs. Inflow occurs when
p env > p insi de .
4. CP is only required if updating of Euler or gas bag gas constants is done, for example if hybrid
inflators are defined.
5. The velocity method used to calculate the material transport through a porous (sub)surface are
described in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 4: Fluid Structure Interaction, General Coupling.
6. For in and out flow of an uniform pressure air bag (GBAG), the material transport is based on the
theory of one-dimensional gas flow through a small orifice, and depends on the pressure
difference. This is equivalent to the PORHOLE entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 514 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PROD
Rod Property
Defines the properties of a rod that is referenced by theCRODentry.
Remark
All PROD entries must have unique property numbers.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 515 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PSHELL
Shell-Element Properties
Defines the properties of shell elements.
+ MID4 ICLT
+ 103
Remarks
1. The property number must be unique with respect to all other properties.
2. Shell of constant thickness with three-point Gauss integration and a transverse shear correction
factor of 0.83333 are assumed. For shells using the classical lamination theory option no shear
correction factor is applied. The transverse shear stiffness is input as material property using a
MAT2 entry. For CQUAD4 elements, the formulation is Key-Hoff and for CTRIA3 elements the
formulation is C0-TRIA.
3. If the thickness is set to 9999, all the elements with this property ID are not treated as CQUAD4and
CTRIA3 elements but are converted to CSEGentries. This allows CSEG to be defined easily using
standard preprocessors. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Modeling of
Surfaces and Faces for details.
4. Material entries that can be referenced by shell elements defined on the PSHELL entry can be
found in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 3: Materials.
5. If the thickness is set to blank or 0.0, the thickness on the CTRIA3 and CQUAD4 must be defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 516 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
6. See also Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive Default Setting.
7. If ICLT is set to 1, the shells will be analyzed using the classical lamination theory. In this case
MID1, MID2, MID3 and MID4 refer to membrane, bending, transverse shear and membrane-
bending coupling materials, respectively. All these materials must be filled in and they refer to a
MAT2 entry. In this case, the material angles in the element connectivity entries are ignored. More
information about Classical Lamination Theory for Shells can be found in the Dytran Theory
Manual, Chapter 5: Classical Lamination Theory (CLT) for Multilayered Shells
The element outputs are NXX, NYY, NXY, MXX, MYY, MXY, QYZ, and QZX. These are general
forces per unit length. For more detail description about these forces, see the Dytran
Theory Manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 517 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PSHELL1
Shell-Element Properties
Defines the properties of Lagrangian shell elements that are much more complicated than the shell
elements defined using the PSHELL entry.
BLT Belytschko-Lin-Tsay
KEYHOFF Key-Hoff
C0-TRIA C0 triangle
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 518 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NOAVOID No avoid
ADDRES Stores grid-point addresses in memory C See Remark
10.
SAV Save addresses.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 519 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. Shells of constant thickness with three-point Gauss integration are more easily defined using the
PSHELL entry.
2. Material entries that can be referenced by shell elements can be found in Materials.
3. For CQUAD4 elements, the default formulation is KEYHOFF. For CTRIA3elements, the default
formulation is CO-TRIA. See also Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive
Default Settings.
4. Make the property number unique with respect to all other properties.
5. If the thickness T is set to 9999., all elements with this property number are not treated as
CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements but are converted to CSEG entries. This conversion allows
CSEGs to be defined easily using standard preprocessors. See Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Using a Modeling Program with Dytran for details.
6. Membrane elements can only be triangular and must reference a DMAT or DMATEL material
entry. In case the HUGHES shell formulation is used, only an elastic material can be referred to.
7. Dummy elements are used to define rigid bodies or to achieve a closed volume when defining
coupling surfaces. Do not use them to create CSEG entries.
8. If the thickness is set to blank or 0.0, the thickness is defined on the CTRIA3and CQUAD4 entry.
9. Specifying QUAD and NUMB is not necessary if FORM is MEMB.
10. The following defaults apply:
11. When shell elements undergo large twisting, the linear transverse shear calculations must be used
(TRANSHR). It increases accuracy at the expense of more computer time.
12. The default vector length for vector machines is used whenever LENVEC is not defined.
Increasing the vector length is usually more efficient, but requires more memory. In some
problems a recurrence in the force update may inhibit vectorization on vector machines.
Decreasing the vector length may avoid the recurrence. Examine the problem output for
information on this recurrence.
13. The options for SPINCOR are:
NO No SPINCOR correction is applied
YES A SPINCOR correction is applied.
When SPINCOR = NO, slight asymmetric forces are applied to the shell element’s grid points.
This approach is, in general, acceptable up to about 10° in plane shear angle.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 520 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
The SPINCOR option is required for fabric models and is turned on by default to accurately keep
track of the fiber directions.
14. REF defines the location of the integration pints in the thickness direction. An example for three
integration points (x):
x
REF= MID G1 *----------x-----------* G2
x
REF=TOP G1 *----------x-----------* G2
x
x
x
x
REF= BOT G1 *----------x-----------* G2
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 521 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PSOLID
Remarks
1. The property number must be unique with respect to all other property numbers.
2. Material entries that can be referenced by Lagrangian solid elements are given in Dytran Theory
Manual,Chapter 3: Materials.
3. IN is a sort of minimum number of integration points in which the element does not have zero
energy displacement patterns. For CHEXA (CPENTA, it is 1 x 1 x 1. Therefore, the right value for
IN is 1 or 2. The ISOP option is for choosing how the element strains should eventually be
calculated. For now, when IN = 2, the right option for ISOP is 1 for full integration and 0 for
reduced integration. When IN = 1, the correct option for ISOP is 1.
The default for CTETRA uses linear tetrahedron FE scheme (IN = 1 and ISOP = 1). The
collapsed hexahedron scheme for CTETRA (IN = 2 and ISOP = 0) is deactivated. Please use
PARAM,OLDLAGTET,1 to activate it. If PARAM is set, then old scheme for CTETRA is default.
But, it is still possible to use the new TET by using a separate PSOLID with the right IN =1 and
ISOP = 1 combination.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 522 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
The default for CHEXA and CPENTA uses reduced integration scheme (IN = 2 and
ISOP = 0). IN = 2 or TWO and ISOP = 1 or FULL means using two integration network.
If other combinations are used, they are set to default.
Only limited features are supported for elements with the IN = 2 and ISOP = FULL scheme.
The current version supports only MATRIG,DMATEL, DMAT-EOSPOL-SHREL-YDLVM, and
DMAT-EOSPOL-SHRLVE.
To activate the CTETRA element based on linear tetrahedrom FE formulation, use IN = 1 and
ISOP = 1.
4. Use the PEULER entry to define the properties of the Eulerian elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 523 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PSPR
Remarks
1. This entry defines a linear-elastic spring with failure. PSPR1 can be used to define
nonlinear springs.
2. The behavior of this spring is discussed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 2: Elements,
Lagrangian Elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 524 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PSPR1
Remarks
1. The values in the table are interpolated to determine the force for a particular displacement.
2. If the UNLOAD table is not defined, unloading occurs corresponding to the LOAD curve.
3. Input for loading and unloading must be consistent. Both curves must be either completed defined
or have only positive values (start from (0.,0.)). When only positive values are defined, the curves
are automatically mirrored.
4. The behavior of this spring is discussed in Dytran User’s Guide, Lagrangian Elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 525 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PSPREX
Remarks
1. The seven user values are passed to the EXSPR user subroutine.
2. Dytran does no checking of the user values.
3. For a discussion of the various types of spring elements, see Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 2: Elements, Lagrangian Elements
4. For a discussion of how to use user-written subroutines, see Chapter 7: User Subroutines in
this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 526 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PVISC
Linear-Damper Properties
Defines the properties of a linear viscous damper.
Remarks
1. This entry defines a linear viscous damper. PVISC1can be used to define nonlinear dampers.
2. The behavior of this type of damper is discussed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 2: Elements,
Lagrangian Elements
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 527 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PVISC1
Remarks
1. This entry defines the properties of a nonlinear damper. Use the PVISC entry to define
linear dampers.
2. The values in the table are interpolated to get the force for a particular velocity.
3. The behavior of this damper is discussed in Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 2: Elements,
Lagrangian Elements.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 528 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PVISCEX
Remarks
1. The seven user values are passed to the user subroutine EXVISC.
2. Dytran does no checking on the user-supplied values.
3. For a discussion of the various types of damper elements, see Dytran User’s Guide,
Chapter 2: Elements, Lagrangian Elements. For a discussion of user-written subroutines, see
Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 529 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PWELD
Spotweld Property
Defines the properties of a spotweld connection between two grid points. It is referenced by the CROD
or CBAR entry.
+ FAILTIME
+
Remarks
1. A spotweld is treated as a rigid body with its inertia properties calculated by lumping the
properties of the end points.
A set of spotwelds and/or BJOINs connected to each other is treated as one rigid body.
Lumping of the initial positions and velocities:
The lumped rigid-body mass is not zero:
• The initial positions and velocities are lumped using mass-weighting.
• If a grid point has zero mass, it’s initial position and velocity is ignored.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 530 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CBAR Shear force in the spotweld in the local y-direction, see CBAR for
sign convention
ZFORCE CROD Shear force in the spotweld in direction of shear vector at end point 2
CBAR Shear force in the spotweld in the local z-direction, see CBAR for
sign convention
XMOMENT Torque in the spotweld
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 531 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
1 = Failed on TAILTENS
2 = Failed on FAILCOMP
3 = Failed on FAILSHEA
4 = Failed on FAILTORQ
5 = Failed on FAILBEND
6 = Failed on FAILTOTF
7 = Failed on FAILTOTM
8 = Failed on FAILTIME
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 532 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PWELD1
Skin-Stringer Delamination
Defines the properties of a skin-stringer connection with delamination or rupture criteria. The PWELD1
entry is referenced by a CROD entry.
+ FAILTIME POSITION
+ UPPER
Remarks
1. Connecting beam and shell grid points by a CROD element that references a PWELD1 entry
defines a spotweld connection. The PWELD1 entry defines the failure criteria for the
spotweld connection.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 533 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
2. The spotweld connection is treated as a rigid body with the properties calculated by lumping the
properties of the end points it connects.
When the lumped rigid-body mass is not equal to zero:
• The initial positions and velocities are lumped using mass weighting.
• If a grid point has a zero mass, its initial position and velocity are ignored.
When the lumped rigid-body mass is equal to zero:
• The initial positions and velocities are lumped by averaging.
• Boundary conditions defined for the grid points of the connection are combined
when possible.
3. The end point a of the CROD is the connecting point of the skin (shell element), and end point 2
is the connecting point of the stringer (beam element).
4. The failure force and/or moment criteria are defined per unit length, where the length is defined
by the length of all beam (stringer) elements connected to the spotweld element. Each stringer
contributes half of its length to the spotweld. The resulting forces and moments per unit length,
acting on the spotweld are checked against the failure criteria as defined on the PWELD1 entry.
5. The position of the beam (stringer) element with respect to the shell (skin) element it is connected
to, should be defined by considering the orientation of the element’s local y-z coordinate axes.
The normal to the skin coincides with the z s axis. The upper side of the skin is defined by the
direction the normal points to. Figure 5-13 illustrates the definition of the upper- and the lower-
side positioning of the connection.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 534 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
6. The direction of the normal at the location of the spotweld connection is defined as the average
of the normal vectors of all connected shell (skin) elements. The average direction is used in
the calculation of the failure criteria. The length of the spotweld element is small and assumed to
be zero. As a result, the forces acting at the end points of the spotweld do not introduce
additional moments.
7. In case the position is defined as MID, the direction of the spotweld element cannot be determined.
As a result, the tensile, compressive and shear force components, as well as the torque and
bending moment components cannot be computed. The failure criteria is based on the total force
and/or moment. Note that the output for the force components is the total force, and the output for
the moment components is the total moment.
8. The total force acting on the spotweld is checked against:
FAILTENSL
FAILCOMPL
FAILSHEAL
FAILTOTL
The total moment acting on the spotweld is checked against:
FAILTORQL
FAILBENDL
FAILTOTML
The spotweld connection fails if any of the above criteria is met.
9. All failure criteria are checked simultaneously. If any of the failure criteria is met, the connection
will fail.
10. Tensile and compressive loading is evaluated in the direction of the normal to the surface. The
shear load is evaluated in the plane of the surface. A positive load on the spotweld element in the
direction of the normal (the XFORCE) indicates tensile loading. A negative load indicates
compressive loading. Note that you input both the tensile and compressive failure criteria as
positive numbers.
11. The shear load is evaluated in the plane to the normal. The output value on the connecting element
is always positive, as the direction of the shear in the plane is irrelevant for failure.
12. The torque is evaluated as the moment about the normal to the surface. The bending moment is
evaluated in the plane to the normal. The output of the moments on the connecting element is
always positive, as the direction of the moments is irrelevant for failure.
13. An overview of the generated spotwelds can be requested by the entry PARAM,INFO-BJOIN.
See the reference page for more details.
14. You can access the results of the spotweld elements for output by requesting results for the
corresponding CROD elements. The variables listed below are available only for CROD elements
that have been used to define a spotweld element:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 535 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
0 Not failed
1. Failed on tension
2. Failed on compression
3. Failed on shear
4. Failed on torque
5. Failed on bending
6. Failed on total force
7. Failed on total moment
8. When you have not defined any failure criteria, the output results on the CROD elements that
define the connection are all zero. The failure evaluation and computation is skipped in this case
for performance reasons. If you want to see the actual load on the connecting elements, but do no
wish to introduce any failure, you have to define at least one criterion with a large enough value
to ensure there is no failure. Any value less than 1.0E20 suffices.
9. Spotwelds for a skin-stringer connection can also be defined using a BJOIN entry with the
TYPE set to RUPTURE. Note that in case you use the BJOIN option, you do not have access to
the results on the connection as you have when using the PWELD1 definition. The
BJOINconnection does not use the CRODelements as the connecting entities and therefore no
output on the connection is available.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 536 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PWELD2
+ FAILTIME
Remarks
1. The PWELD2 connection can only be used for a shell (facing) to solid (core) element connection.
2. The sandwich structure is modeled using shell and solid elements. The connection of the facing
and the core is modeled by connecting the shell and solid element’s grid points with CROD
elements. The CROD elements should refer to a PWELD2 entry.
3. When the facing-core connection has not yet failed, it is treated as a rigid body with the properties
calculated by lumping the properties of the end points it connects.
When the lumped rigid-body mass is not equal to zero:
• The initial positions and velocities are lumped using mass weighting.
• If a grid point has a zero mass, its initial position and velocity are ignored.
When the lumped rigid-body mass is equal to zero:
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 537 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 538 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
0 Not failed
1. Failed on tension
2. Failed on compression
3. Failed on shear
4. Failed on torque
5. Failed on bending
6. Failed on total force
7. Failed on total moment
8. When you have not defined any failure criteria, the output results on the CROD elements that
define the connection will all be zero. The failure evaluation computations are skipped in this case
for performance reasons. If you want to see the actual load on the connecting elements, but do not
wish to introduce any failure, you have to define at least one criterion with a large enough value
to ensure there is no failure. Any value less than 1.0E20 suffices.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 539 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RBC3
Rigid-Body Constraint
Defines a three-point constraint on a RIGID surface, a MATRIG, or RBE2-FULLRIG rigid body.
+ X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3 +
+ +
+ Z1 Z2 Z3
+
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 540 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. If G1, G2, and G3 are specified, then the RBC3 coordinate system is determined by the grid points.
The position vectors for G1, G2, and G3 are denoted by v1, v,2 and v3, respectively. If G1, G2,
and G3 are not specified, then the coordinate system is either specified by the vectors v1 = (X1,
Y1, Z1), v2 = (X2, Y2, Z2) and v3 = (X3, Y3, Z3) if X1 through Z3 are specified, or by the
vectors v1 = (0, 0, 0), v2 (1, 0, 0), and v3 = (0, 1, 0), by default. The local x-axis is the normalized
vector v2-v1. The local z-axis is the normalized cross product of the vectors v2-v1 and v3-v1 and
is thus perpendicular to the plane spanned by these vectors. The local y-axis is the cross product
of the local z- and x-axis.
2. The grid points G1, G2, and G3 must be unique. Also, the vectors (X1, X2, X3), (Y1, Y2, Y3),
and (Z1, Z2, Z3) must be unique.
3. The translational and rotational constraints are applied to the center of gravity of the rigid body
in the local coordinate system.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 541 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RBE2
Rigid-Body Element
Defines a set of grid points that form a rigid element.
Remarks
1. The element number should be unique with respect to all other rigid element numbers.
2. The RBE2 definition allows particular degrees of freedom of a set of grid points to be coupled so
that the grid points always move the same amount. The motion of the set of grid points is the
weighted average of the motion of all the grid points for the degrees of freedom coupled through
the RBE2 definition.
3. The component numbers refer to the basic coordinate system.
4. Loads, initial velocities, or constraints should be applied to the first (master) grid point. They are
then applied to the coupled degrees of freedom for all the grid points defined on the RBE2 entry.
5. Both rotational and translational degrees of freedom can be coupled.
6. Grid points associated with rigid surfaces cannot be part of an RBE2 grid point list.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 542 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. Instead of defining coupled components, it is possible to define the RBE2entry as a single rigid
body by using the FULLRIG option. The geometric properties of the rigid body are calculated
from the geometry and the mass of the grid points.
8. Grid points referred to by the JOIN entry cannot be part of an RBE2 grid point list.
9. It is possible to merge an RBE2entry with a MATRIG entry by using the FULLRIG option and
PARAMMATRMERG or PARAM,MATRMRG1. A normal RBE2 entry (with constraint) however
cannot be merged with a MATRIG entry or an RBE2-FULLRIG entry.
10. By using PARAM,CFULLRIG, all 123456 constraints on a normal RBE2 are automatically
converted to the FULLRIG option.
11. By using PARAM,RBE2INFO,GRIDON, the grid points of the RBE2are listed in the output file.
12. Lagrangian Elements for a description of the use of RBE2.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 543 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RBHINGE
+ G5 -etc.-
+ 2
Remarks
1. When grid points are part of a rigid body and a deformable structure, they transfer rotational
momentum if they posses six degrees of freedom. This is the case when they are connected to a
beam/bar, tria or quad shell element. Using the RBHINGE entry specifies rotational degrees of
freedom that can be defined as behaving as a hinge.
RBHINGE is not needed for grid points that have only three degrees of freedom, since the hinge
is defined by default.
2. The component number refers to the global coordinate system.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 544 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RCONN
Rigid Connection
Defines a rigid connection between the different parts of Lagrangian meshes (tied surfaces).
+ +
+ +
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 545 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The RCONN entry can be used to define three types of connection as described in Dytran Theory
Manual, Chapter 3: Constraints and Loading, Lagrangian Elements.
2. Two Surfaces Tied Together
Define slave and master segments representing the two surfaces to be tied together. There
should not be a gap between the two sets of segments. The two surfaces are tied together during
the analysis.
3. Grid Points Tied to a Surface
If STYPE is set to GRID and OPTION is set to NORMAL, the slave entities comprise discrete
grid points that are tied to the master surface during the analysis. The grid points must lie on
the surface.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 546 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 547 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RCONREL
Remark
The SETC entry can only contain the name of one ellipsoid.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 548 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RELEX
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 549 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Force models
Coupling
Ellipsoids
End ellipsoids
End coupling
Remarks
1. This entry should only be used when Dytran is used with MADYMO or ATB.
2. Rigid ellipsoids can be defined directly within Dytran using the RELLIPS entry.
3. RELEX and RELLIPSentries can not be mixed in the same model. A mixture of MADYMO and
ATB ellipsoids is not allowed.
4. For ATB, only the segment contact ellipsoid can be used. The name of the contact ellipsoid is
equal to the name of the segment, as specified on the first field of the B.2 entry in the ATB
input file.
5. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 7: Interface to Other Applications, ATB Occupant Modeling
Program for instructions on how to use ATB.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 550 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RELLIPS
Rigid Ellipsoid
Defines an analytical rigid ellipsoid.
+ XL YL ZL XS YS ZS +
+ 0. 0. 1. 1. 0. 0. +
+ VX VY VZ WA WB WC
+ -0.1
Remark
RELEX and RELLIPS entries cannot be mixed in the same model.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 551 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RFORCE
Remarks
1. The rotational velocity is calculated as
W ( t ) = T ( t ) * S C AL E * N
where S CA LE is the scale factor, N the directional vector (NX, NT, NZ), and T ( t ) the value at
time t interpolated from the table or function referenced by the TLOADn entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
3. The type field on the TLOADn entry must be set to zero.
4. Only one centrifugal force field can be defined in the problem.
5. Centrifugal forces act on all Lagrangian structural elements and rigid surfaces.
6. The rotation is input in revolutions per unit time.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 552 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RIGID
Rigid Surface
Defines a rigid surface.
+ VX VY VZ CID WX WY WZ +
+ +
Remarks
1. A CID of zero references the basic coordinate system.
2. The default for IXX, IYY, and IZZ is 1.E10; the default for IXY, IXZ, and IYZ is zero.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 553 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. The mass of the rigid surface is distributed to the grid points on the surface.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 554 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RJCYL
Remarks
1. The geometry of the joint changes during the analysis as the grid points move.
2. G1 and G3 are grid points belonging to the first rigid body; G2 and G4 are grid points belonging
to the second rigid body.
3. The vector from G1 to G3 determines the axis of sliding. Spring forces are calculated between G1
and G2 and between G3 and G4 to keep all four points on the axis of sliding.
4. If the initial position of grid points G2 and/or G4 is off the axis of sliding a force in the joint
is initialized.
5. The absolute stiffness of the rigid body joints is calculated automatically by Dytran. The stiffness
of the joints is taken such that a stable solution is guaranteed. This stiffness calculation takes into
account the fact that a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 555 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
6. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is multiplied by a factor defined on PARAM,
RJSTIFF. By default, RJSTIFF = 1.0. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the
stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken by using this parameter because too high a value might
lead to an unstable calculation.
7. Although the joint is designed for usage with rigid bodies, it is allowed to use finite-element
grid points.
8. RJCYL can be applied to rigid bodies defined by the RIGID entry as well as to rigid bodies defined
by the MATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 556 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RJPLA
Remarks
1. The geometry of the joint changes during the analysis as the grid points move.
2. G1 and G3 are grid points belonging to the first rigid body; G2 and G4 are grid points belonging
to the second rigid body.
3. The vector from G1 to G3 defines the normal to the plane on which the two bodies can slide
relative to each other. G2 should lie on the plane through G1. Spring forces are calculated between
G1 and G2 and between G3 and G4 to keep all four points in the plane of sliding.
4. If the initial position of grid points G2 and/or G4 is off the normal to the plane of sliding, a force
in the joint is initialized.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 557 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is calculated automatically by Dytran. The stiffness
of the joints is taken such that a stable solution is guaranteed. This stiffness calculation takes into
account the fact that a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
6. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is multiplied by a factor defined on PARAM,
RJSTIFF. By default, RJSTIFF = 1.0. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the
stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken by using this parameter because too high a value might
lead to an unstable calculation.
7. Although the joint is designed for usage with rigid bodies, it is allowable to use finite-element
grid points.
8. RJPLA can be applied to rigid bodies defined by the RIGID entry as well as to rigid bodies defined
by the MATRIG or RBE2FULLRIG entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 558 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RJREV
Remarks
1. The geometry of the joint changes during the analysis as the grid points move.
2. G1 and G3 are grid points belonging to the first rigid body; G2 and G4 are grid points belonging
to the second rigid body. G1 and G2 should be coincident, and G3 and G4 should be coincident.
3. The vector from G1 to G3 determines the axis about which the two bodies can rotate. Spring
forces are calculated between G1 and G2 and between G3 and G4 to keep all four points on the
axis of rotation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 559 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is calculated automatically by Dytran. The stiffness
of the joints is calculated so that a stable solution is guaranteed. This stiffness calculation takes
into account the fact that a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
5. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is multiplied by a factor defined on PARAM,
RJSTIFF. By default, RJSTIFF = 1.0. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the
stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken by using this parameter because too high a value might
lead to an unstable calculation.
6. Although the joint is designed for usage with rigid bodies, it is allowed to use finite-element
grid points.
7. RJREV can be applied to rigid bodies defined by the RIGID entry as well as to rigid bodies defined
by the MATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 560 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RJSPH
Remarks
1. The geometry of the joint changes during the analysis as the grid points move.
2. G1 belongs to the first rigid body, G2 belongs to the second rigid body. G1 and G2 should be
coincident. Spring forces are calculated between G1 and G2 so that the two bodies can rotate
about the joint.
3. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is calculated automatically by Dytran. The stiffness
of the joints is taken such that a stable solution is guaranteed. This stiffness calculation takes into
account the fact that a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
4. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is multiplied by a factor defined on PARAM,
RJSTIFF. By default, RJSTIFF = 1.0. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the
stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken by using this parameter because too high a value might
lead to an unstable calculation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 561 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. Although the joint is designed for usage with rigid bodies, it is allowable to use finite-element
grid points.
6. RJSPH can be applied to rigid bodies defined by the RIGID entry as well as to rigid bodies defined
by theMATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 562 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RJTRA
Remarks
1. The geometry of the joint changes during the analysis as the grid points move.
2. G1, G3, and G5 are grid points belonging to the first rigid body; G2, G4, and G6 are points
belonging to the second rigid body.
3. The vector from G1 to G3 determines the axis along which the two bodies can slide relative to
each other. The vectors from G1 to G5 and from G2 to G6 are perpendicular to the axis of sliding.
Spring forces are calculated between G1 and G2, between G3 and G4, and between G5 and G6 to
keep the first four grid points on the axis of sliding and the other two grid points on a vector that
is parallel to the axis of sliding.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 563 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. If the initial position of grid points G2 and/or G4 is off the axis of sliding a force in the joint is
initialized. If the initial vector from G5 to G6 is not parallel to the vector from G1 to G3, a force
in the joint is initialized.
5. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is calculated automatically by Dytran. The stiffness
of the joints is calculated so that a stable solution is guaranteed. This stiffness calculation takes
into account the fact that a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
6. The absolute stiffness of the rigid body joints is multiplied by a factor defined on PARAM,
RJSTIFF. By default, RJSTIFF = 1.0. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the
stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken by using this parameter because too high a value might
lead to an unstable calculation.
7. The grid points used in the definition of the joint do not have to be rigid-body joints, but may also
be finite-element grid points.
8. RJTRA can be applied to rigid bodies defined by the RIGID entry as well as to rigid bodies defined
by the MATRIGor RBE2-FULLRIG entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 564 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RJUNI
Remarks
1. The geometry of the joint changes during the analysis as the grid points move.
2. G1 and G3 are grid points belonging to the first rigid body; G2 and G4 are grid points belonging
to the second rigid body. G1 and G2 should be coincident, while G3 and G4 cannot be coincident.
3. G3 and G4 define the orientation of the rotation of the joint, as shown in the figure above. Spring
forces are calculated between G1 and G2 as in the spherical joint and between G3 and G4, based
on the Pythagorean theorem.
4. The absolute stiffness of the rigid-body joints is calculated automatically by Dytran. The stiffness
of the joints is taken such that a stable solution is guaranteed. This stiffness calculation takes into
account the fact that a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 565 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. The absolute stiffness of the rigid body joints is multiplied by a factor defined on PARAM,
RJSTIFF. By default, RJSTIFF = 1.0. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the
stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken by using this parameter because too high a value might
lead to an unstable calculation.
6. Although the joint is designed for usage with rigid bodies, it is allowable to use finite-element
grid points.
7. RJUNI can be applied to rigid bodies defined by the RIGIDentry as well as to rigid bodies defined
by the MATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 566 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RPLEX
FORCE MODELS
COUPLING
PLANES
END PLANES
END COUPLING
Remarks
1. This entry should only be used when Dytran is used with MADYMO.
2. All planes attached to an ellipsoid in ATB are automatically visualized when the ellipsoid is asked
for in an output request.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 567 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. The mesh density of the plane can be changed by using PARAM,MESHPLN,x, where x is the
mesh density. See also PARAM,MESHPLN.
4. Rigid ellipsoids can be defined directly within Dytran using the RELLIPS entry.
5. RELEX and RELLIPS entries can not be mixed in the same model. A mixture of MADYMO and
ATB ellipsoids is not allowed.
6. For ATB, only the segment contact ellipsoid can be used. The name of the contact ellipsoid is
equal to the name of the segment, as specified on the first field of the B.2 entry in the ATB
input file.
7. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 7: Interface to Other Applications, ATB Occupant Modeling
Program for instructions on how to use ATB.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 568 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RUBBER1
Remarks
1. The continuation line with the bulk-viscosity data can be omitted.
2. The constitutive behavior of this material is defined as a total stress/total strain relationship. The
nonlinear elastic material response is formulated by a strain-energy density function for large-
strain components rather than by Hooke’s law.
The strain-energy density function is formulated according to the Mooney-Rivlin model and is
defined as
1 2
W ( I 1 ,I 2 ,I 3 ) = A ( I 1 – 3 ) + B ( I 2 – 3 ) + C ---2- – 1 + D ( I 3 – 1 )
I3
The constants C and D are defined as:
1 A ( 5v – 2 ) + B ( 11v – 5 )
C = --- A + B D = ------------------------------------------------------------
2 2(1 – 2v)
where A , B , and v are input parameters.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 569 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 570 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SECTION
Cross Section
Defines a cross section of the model for force output.
Remarks
1. The cross sections for which output is required are referenced in a SET command in Case Control
Section. The SET entry is referenced by the CSECS Case Control command.
2. The cross section is defined as a consecutive sequence of elements extending across the model.
In addition, a consecutive sequence of grid points attached to one side of the elements must be
defined. The GID field is required together with EID, the list of elements.
3. For compatibility with Dyna, the method of specifying three EIDs (i.e. one for one-dimensional
elements, one for plate elements and one for hexahedral elements) is retained.
4. Cross sections cannot be defined for Eulerian models.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 571 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SET1
Set of Numbers
Defines a set of grid points, elements, etc., for use by other entries (e.g., WALL, SURFACE).
Remarks
1. Use as many continuation lines as necessary.
2. If the THRU specification is used, all the items in the sequence between the beginning and the end
of the range do not have to exist. Items that do not exist are ignored. BY can be used as an
increment to exclude grid points.
3. SET1 Bulk Data entries with the same number are merged into one set.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 572 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SETC
List of Names
Defines a list of names (character strings) for use by other entries.
Remarks
1. Use as many continuations as required to define the complete list of names. A blank field
terminates the list.
2. The SETC entry may be referred to from outside the Bulk Data Section.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 573 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SETTING
Application-Sensitive Defaults
Defines application-sensitive defaults for element formulation, element options, hourglass control and
material behavior.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 574 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The application-sensitive defaults are set according to the specification in the TYPE field. If
no application type is specified, the setting is STANDARD. The default settings concern the
element formulation, element formulation options, hourglass control, material-plasticity
calculation method, and strain dependency of the thickness of shell elements. See Dytran
User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive Default Setting for more details on
application-sensitive defaults.
2. If no property type and property number are supplied, the setting is done for all properties in the
model. If the property type and the property number are defined, the setting applies to the
elements that have the specified property. As such it is possible to define a global application
setting and have a different setting for certain properties in the model.
3. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive Default Setting for more details on
application-sensitive defaults.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 575 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHEETMAT
Sheet-Metal Material
Defines the properties of an anisotropic plastic material for Lagrangian shell elements.
+ a b c n k m +
+ 0.0 570E3 0.017 0.359 0.014 0.389 +
+ TYPEHRD +
+ ISO +
+ C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 +
+ 0.244 -0.195 0.857 3.439 -11.92 +
+ D2 D3 D4 D5
+ -0.417 -1.567 -4.849 -6.061
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 576 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 577 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. SHEETMAT materials may only be referenced by PSHELL and PSHELL1 entries.
2. The necessary number or combination of elasticity constants depends on the field ELASTIC. If
ELASTIC = ISO then only EXX and NUXY (or GXY) must be defined. For ELASTIC = PLANISO,
only EXX (or EYY), EZZ, NUXY (or GXY), NUXZ (or NUYZ), and GXZ (or GYZ) must be defined.
3. The field ELASTIC provides you with an input check on the consistency of the elasticity
constants. Planar isotropic material is equivalent to transversely isotropic material, which means
that the through-the-thickness (elastic) properties may differ from the in-plane isotropic
(elastic) properties.
4. Due to anisotropic behavior, the rolling direction must be specified. The projection of the vector
(XMAT, YMAT, ZMAT) on the surface of each element is used to determine the angle between the
element and the material coordinate system. This angle can be overwritten using the THETA field
on the CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 entries. Both the constitutive law and the output of variables are
applied with respect to this material coordinate system (see Remark 10.).
5. For a description of the anisotropic-plastic model including the power-law yield function, see
Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 3: Materials. The power-law stress constant, a, is not necessarily
the initial yield stress: the value of a is allowed to be equal to zero if the value of the hardening
parameter, b, and the strain offset, c, are unequal to zero.
6. Strain-rate dependence is not accounted for by default.
7. The field TYPEYLD provides you with an input check on the consistency of the anisotropic
parameters. Normal anisotropic material is equivalent to transversely anisotropic or planar
isotropic material which means that the through-the-thickness yielding properties may differ from
the in-plane, isotropic, yielding properties. Planar anisotropic material is characterized by three
orthogonal axes of anisotropy (in rolling, transverse and through-the-thickness direction), about
which the yielding properties have twofold symmetry.
8. The necessary number of anisotropic-yielding parameters depends on the field TYPEYLD. For
TYPEYLD = ISO, all fields for R0, R45, and R90 can be left blank because the default
corresponds to von Mises yielding (R0 = R45 = R90 = 1.0). For TYPEYLD = NORMANI, only
R0 must be defined while the other two fields can be left blank due to their equality. The input of
all three anisotropic parameters is needed for TYPEYLD = PLANANI.
9. C1 through C5 and D2 through D5 do not affect the material behavior but are used to fit the lower
bound of experimental results for diffuse and localized necking represented by two
polynomial lines:
F LD ( e 2 ) = C 1 + C2 e2 + C 3e 22 + C 4e 23 + C 5e 24 for e2 > 0
10. The output of variables related to SHEETMAT is defined with respect to the material coordinate
system (see Remark 4.). There are a number of specific output variables useful for this material:
Element Variables
Q1, Q2 Direction cosines/sines between the element coordinate system and the
material coordinate system
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 578 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Sublayer Variables
TXX Stress - XX component
TYY Stress - YY component
TXY Stress - XY component
TYZ Stress - YZ component
TZX Stress - ZX component
EFFST Effective Stress
EFFPL Effective Plastic Strain
YLDRAD Radius of Yield Surface
EPSXX Strain - XX component
EPSYY Strain - YY component
EPSXY Strain - XY component
EPSZZ Strain - ZZ component
EPZZ Plastic Strain – ZZ component
EPSMX Strain - Major Principal Strain
EPSMN Strain - Minor Principal Strain
FLP Forming-Limit Parameter
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 579 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHREL
Remark
Shear model numbers must be unique.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 580 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHREX
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
2. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines for a description of how to use user-written subroutines.
3. This shear model is applicable only for Lagrangian solid elements and Eulerian elements with
shear strength.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 581 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHRLVE
Remarks
1. Shear model numbers must be unique.
2. The spring-damper analog of this model is
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 582 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
The above equation for the deviatoric stress is the integral form of the differential equation
· ·· ·
σ' i j + β σ' i j = 2η 0 ε + ( 2 η 0 β + 2 G 0 )ε + 2G ∞ β ε
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 583 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHRPOL
Remarks
1. Shear model numbers must be unique.
2. The shear modulus is computed from
G = G0 + G 1 γ + G 2 γ 2 + G 3 γ 3
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 584 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SPC
Single-Point Constraint
Defines sets of single-point constraints.
Remarks
1. SPC degrees of freedom may also be specified as permanent constraints on the GRID entry.
2. Continuation lines are not allowed.
3. Select single-point constraints in the Case Control Section (SPC = SID) to be used by Dytran.
4. A single-point constraint is treated as a zero-velocity boundary condition. For this reason, make
SPCs consistent with other velocity boundary conditions and velocity initial conditions.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 585 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SPC1
Single-Point Constraint
Defines a single-point constraint for a set of grid points.
Remarks
1. As many continuation lines as desired may appear.
2. SPC degrees of freedom may be redundantly specified as permanent constraints on the
GRIDentry.
3. If the THRU specification is used, grid points in the sequence between the beginning and the end
of the range are not required. Grid points that do not exist are ignored. BY can be used to exclude
grid points within this range.
4. Single-point constraints must be selected in the Case Control Section (SPC = SID) if they are to
be used by Dytran.
5. None of the fields in the list of grid points can be blank or zero, since this marks the end of the list.
6. A single-point constraint is treated as a zero-velocity boundary condition. For this reason, make
SPCs consistent with other velocity boundary conditions and velocity initial conditions.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 586 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SPC2
Single-Point Constraint
Rotational boundary constraint on grid points.
+ TYPE2 VALUE2 +
+ CONSTANT 0. +
+ G1 G2 THRU G3 BY G5 -etc-
+ 10 13 THRU 56 BY 4
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 587 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The angular velocity is specified in radians per unit time.
2. The SPC2 entry is valid for both Lagrangian as Eulerian grid points.
3. If the TYPE2 field is set to FREE, the referenced grid points move in a radial direction according
to the acceleration caused by forces in the radial direction.
4. You can use as many continuation lines as required.
5. If the THRU specification is used, grid points in the sequence between the beginning and the end
of the range are not required to exist. Grid points that do not exist are ignored.
6. Select the rotational constraints in the Case Control Section (SPC = SID) if they are to be used
by Dytran.
7. None of the fields in the list of grid points can be blank or zero, since this marks the end of the list.
8. Both Lagrangian and Eulerian grid points can have a rotational constraint. In the case of Eulerian
grid points, this results in a moving Eulerian mesh.
9. For six degree of freedom grid points, the angular velocities are also constrained consistent with
the defined velocity field.
10. The velocity in axial direction is constrained to zero.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 588 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SPC3
Single-Point Constraint
Defines a single-point constraint in a local coordinate system or a cascade of two local
coordinate systems.
+ G1 G2 THRU G3 BY G4 -etc.-
+ 5 6 THRU 18 BY 3
Remarks
1. CID1 references the primary system. In this system the grid point constraints are applied. The
CID2 system defines a secondary system that constrains the motion of the primary system and
the grid points defined on the entry.
2. The SPC3 entry is valid for both Lagrangian as Eulerian grid points.
3. As many continuation lines as desired may appear.
4. If the THRU specification is used, grid points in the sequence between the beginning and the end
of the range are not required. Grid points that do not exist are ignored. (See Remark 3. of SPC1.)
5. Select the single-point constraint in the Case Control Section (SPC = SID) if it is to be used
by Dytran.
6. None of the fields in the list of grid points can be blank or zero, since this marks the end of the list.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 589 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. If CID1 or CID2 is blank, the basic system is used. If C1 is blank, no constraints are applied in
the primary system. If C2 is blank, no constraints are applied in the primary system with respect
to the secondary system.
8. If CID1, CID2, and C2 are left blank, the constraint acts as defined by an SPC1 entry.
9. If a component references an angular velocity, the units are radians per unit time.
10. A single-point constraint is treated as a zero velocity boundary condition. For this reason, make
SPCs consistent with other velocity boundary conditions and velocity initial conditions.
11. CID2 = 0 is not allowed. Instead define a new local coordinate system at (0., 0., 0.) and refer to
this coordinate system on CID2.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 590 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SPHERE
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 591 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SUBSURF
Multifaceted Subsurface
Defines a multifaceted subsurface for contact and coupling interfaces.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 592 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. You can use as many continuation lines as necessary to define all of the segments in the surface.
2. CSEGs are defined indirectly using CQUAD4 and/or CTRIA3elements with a 9999. thickness.
CFACE1 are entries defined indirectly using PLOAD4 entries with a 9999. pressure. This allows
CSEG and CFACE1 entries to be easily defined using standard preprocessors that can generate
CQUAD4, CTRIA3 and PLOAD4 entries.
3. The subsurface SSID can be referenced from the following entries:
SURFACE To define a surface that has the same segments as this subsurface.
CONTINI To define the initial contact between Lagrangian surfaces. The surface SID must
then be used in a CONTACT entry.
COUPOR To define the porosity of a coupling surface. The surface SID must then be used
in a COUPLE entry.
COUOPT To define the options used in a coupling surface. The surface SID must then be
used in a COUPLE entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 593 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SURFACE
Multifaceted Surface
Defines a multifaceted surface for contact and coupling interfaces as well as rigid-surface geometry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 594 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. You can use as many continuation lines as necessary to define all of the segments in the surface.
2. CSEGs are defined indirectly using CQUAD4 and/or CTRIA3elements with a 9999. thickness.
CFACE1are entries defined indirectly using PLOAD4entries with a 9999. pressure. This allows
CSEG and CFACE1 entries to be easily defined using standard preprocessors that can generate
CQUAD4 CTRIA3, and PLOAD4 entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 595 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TABFILE
Remark
The text file has to consist of a number of data lines and may include comment lines. Each comment line
has to start with $. Every data line has to consist of two numbers. These will be interpreted as XVALUE
and the YVALUE of a TABLED1. Examples 3.4 and 3.5 illustrate the use. The table can be checked in the
Out file. Blank lines are not supported. The first line of a file can start with XYDATA. It will be ignored.
Example
TABFILE,200,rho.xyd
Contents rho.xyd:
$ density as function of radius
0.00125 0.50041467
0.0037499995 0.52369827
0.0062499996 0.52935588
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 596 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TABLED1
Table
Defines a tabular function.
+ X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 +
+ -3.0 6.9 2.0 5.6 3.0 5.6 XSMALL ENDVAL +
+ X5 Y5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 X8
+ XLARGE EXTRAP XOFFSET .05 YOFFSET .04 ENDT
Remarks
1. The values of Xi must be in ascending or descending order but not both.
2. At least two entries must be present.
3. The end of the table is marked by the characters ENDT in the field following the last table entry
or by a blank field.
4. The table is used according to
y = f(x)
where x is input to the table and y is output. Linear interpolation is used within the table to
determine y . Outside the table, the last entry for y is taken.
5. Instead of a numerical value for a y entry, the keyword FREE can be entered. The value of FREE
in the table can be used together with constraints and loading to switch these on and off. FREE
means that the constraint or loading is not active during the time interval for which the FREE entry
is defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 597 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Xi Yi Meaning
XSMALL ENDAVL or If x if outside the table from the smallest value, the first entry for y
is taken.
EXTRAP If x is outside the table from the smallest value, y is extrapolated.
XLARGE ENDAVL or If x is outside the table from the largest value, the last entry for y
is taken.
EXTRAP If x is outside the table from the largest value, y is extrapolated.
XOFFSET value x-axis of table is offset by the specified value.
YOFFSET value y-axis of table is offset by the specified value.
XSCALE value x-axis of table is multiplied by the specified value.
YSCALE value y-axis of table is multiplied by the specified value.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 598 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TABLEEX
User-defined Function
Specifies that a user routine is being used to define an arbitrary function.
Remarks
1. The subroutine EXFUNC must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE
FMS statement.
2. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for a description of how to use
user-written subroutines.
3. Since tables and user-defined functions belong to the same group, the table numbers must
be unique.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 599 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TIC
Remarks
1. Initial conditions for grid points that are not specified on TICn or TICGP entries are assumed to
be zero.
2. Initial conditions to be used by Dytran must be selected in the Case Control Section (TIC = SID).
3. Only Lagrangian grid points can have initial conditions specified by the TIC Bulk Data entry.
4. Only one TIC entry per grid point is allowed. When more than one velocity component needs to
be initialized, TICGP offers a more general way of initializing grid-point velocities.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 600 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TIC1
+ G5 G6 THRU G7 BY G8 -etc.-
+ 2 8 THRU 17 BY 3
Remarks
1. Initial conditions for grid points that are not specified on TICn or TICGP entries are assumed to
be zero.
2. Only one TIC1 entry per grid point is allowed. When more than one velocity component needs
to be initialized, TICGP offers a more general way of initializing grid-point velocities.
3. If the THRU specification is used, all grid points in the sequence between the beginning and
the end of the range do not have to exist. Grid points that do not exist are ignored. The first grid
point in the THRU specification must be a valid grid point. BY enables grid points to be ignored
in this range.
4. None of the fields in the list of grid points can be blank or zero since this marks the end of the list.
The initial conditions to be used by Dytran must be selected in the Case Control Section
(TIC = SID).
5. Only Lagrangian grid points can have initial conditions specified by the TIC1 Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 601 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TIC2
+ G1 G2 THRU G3 BY G4 -etc.-
+ 1 2 THRU 10000 BY 23
Remarks
1. The rotational velocity w is calculated as:
w = SC A LE * N
where S CA LE is the scale factor and N is the vector defined by NX, NY, NZ.
2. Any number of TIC2 entries can be used.
3. The rotational velocity is defined in radians per unit time.
4. For six degree of freedom grid points, the angular velocities are also initialized.
5. Initial conditions for grid points that are not specified on TIC or TICGP entries are assumed to be
zero.
6. If the THRU specification is used, all grid points in the sequence between the beginning and
the end of the range do not have to exist. Grid points that do not exist are ignored. The first grid
point in the THRU specification must be a valid grid point. BY enables grid points to be ignored
in this range.
7. None of the fields in the list of grid points can be blank or zero, since this marks the end of the list.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 602 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
8. The initial conditions to be used by Dytran must be selected in the Case Control Section
(TIC = SID).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 603 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TIC3
+ G1 G2 THRU G3 BY G4 -etc.-
+ 1 2 THRU 1000 BY 23
Remarks
1. Any number of TIC3 entries can be used.
2. The rotational velocity components are defined in radians per unit time.
3. For six degree of freedom grid points, the angular velocity components are also initialized.
4. Initial conditions for grid points that are not specified on TIC or TICGP entries are assumed to be
zero.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 604 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. If the THRU specification is used, the grid points in the range definition are not required to exist.
Grid points that do not exist are ignored. The first grid point in the THRU specification must be a
valid grid point. The BY option enables grid points to be ignored in this range.None of the fields
in the list of grid points can be blank or zero, since this indicates the end of the list.
6. The initial conditions to be used by Dytran must be selected in the Case Control Section
(TIC = SID).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 605 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TICEEX
Remarks
1. The subroutine EXINIT must be present and referenced in the input file by the USERCODE
FMS statement.
2. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for a description of how to use
user-written subroutines.
3. Initial conditions to be used by Dytran must be selected in the Case Control Section
(TIC = SID).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 606 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TICEL
Remarks
1. Initial conditions for elements that are not specified on TICEL entries are assumed to be zero
except density, which is set to the reference density.
2. Initial conditions to be used by Dytran must be selected in the Case Control Section
(TIC = SID).
3. As many continuation lines as required can be used to specify all the variables being initialized.
A blank field terminates the list.
4. Element variables for Eulerian elements can be initialized with a TICEL or a TICEULentry. The
TICEL entry initializes a set of elements, while theTICEUL entry initializes either a set of
elements or geometrical regions (sphere, cylinder,...). When a Euler element is part of both a
TICEL and a TICEUL entry, the TICEL entry takes precedence, and overrules the TICEUL
initialization for the element.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 607 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TICEUL
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 608 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. When the material number is left blank or zero, the Eulerian elements inside the region will
be void.
2. All level indicators LEVELi must have different values. The level indicator can be negative.
3. See also the parameter MICRO for the accuracy of the initial value generation.
4. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 3: Constraints and Loading, Eulerian Loading and Constraints
for instructions on how to use the geometric shapes on the TICEUL entry for arbitrary initial value
generation in Eulerian regions.
5. Element variables for Eulerian elements can be initialized with a TICELor a TICEUL entry. The
TICEL entry initializes a set of elements, while the TICEUL entry initializes either a set of
elements or geometrical regions (sphere, cylinder, box, ...). When an Euler element is part of both
a TICEL and a TICEUL entry, theTICEL entry takes precedence and overrules the TICEUL
initialization for the element.
6. For the Euler solvers, you can, in addition to the “normal” element variables that the solver has
defined, also define an initial radial velocity field. You have to enter the location of the center
from where the radial emerges, the velocity to be applied to the element center and the decay
coefficient for the velocity field. The center is defined by the keywords X-CENTER, Y-CENTER,
Z-CENTER, the radial velocity by R-VEL and the decay coefficient by DECAY. You have to input
these keywords in the above order, and have every keyword followed by its value. For more
information, please refer to the Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 3: Constraints and Loading,
Eulerian Loading and Constraints and the TICVAL or TICEL information in this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 609 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TICGEX
Remarks
1. The subroutine EXINIT must be present in the input file, and it must be referenced by the
USERCODE FMS statement.
2. See Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for a description of how to use
user-written subroutines.
3. Initial conditions must be selected in the Case Control Section (TIC = SID) to be used
by Dytran.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 610 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TICGP
Remarks
1. Initial conditions for grid-point components that are not specified on TIC or TIGGP entries are
assumed to be zero.
2. Select initial conditions to be used by Dytran in the Case Control Section (TIC = SID).
3. Use as many continuation lines as required to specify all the variables being initialized. A blank
field terminates the list.
4. The NAMEi on the TICGP entry can also be CID1 or CID2. In that case, VALUEi denotes the
number of a defined coordinate system. Velocities are initialized according to the type of defined
coordinate system. If coordinate systems are used, the velocity components must follow the CID
definition immediately. All other variables must be defined before the first CID definition. Only
for Lagrangian grid points the velocity can be defined in a local coordinate system.
For example:
TICGP, 1, 1,PMASS,10.,CID1,1,YVEL,10.
5. All velocity components defined and preceding a coordinate system reference are overruled by
the definition following the coordinate system reference.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 611 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TICVAL
Remarks
1. Initial conditions for geometric regions that are not specified on TICVAL entries are assumed to
be zero except density, which is set to the reference density.
2. For the Euler solvers, one can, in addition to the “normal” element variables that the solver has
defined, also define an initial radial velocity field. You have to enter the location of the center
from where the radial emerges, the velocity to be applied to the element center, and the decay
coefficient. The center is defined by the keywords X-CENTER, Y-CENTER, Z-CENTER, the
radial velocity by R-VEL and the decay coefficient by DECAY. You have to input these keywords
in the above order, and have every keyword followed by its value. For more information, please
refer to the Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 3: Constraints and Loading, Eulerian Loading and
Constraints. Note that the dimension of RVEL changes with the value of DECAY. For example
when DECAY equals 2, the dimension of RVEL is 1/length2.
3. Note that the initialization of geometric regions is based on the fraction of the element that lies
within the region. When, for example, an element is only partly covered by the geometric region,
the initialization will be done according to the mass that lies within the defined region.
4. As many continuation lines as required can be used to specify all the variables to be initialized. A
blank field terminates the list.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 612 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. TYPE = RADIAL allows to map results of a spherical symmetric 1-D solution onto a full 3-D
model. For each initialized variable, a 1-D table has to be defined that specifies the variable value
for a number of distances from the center. The center is by default (0,0,0) but can be changed by
setting X-CENTER, Y-CENTER, Z-CENTER. The velocity is a radial velocity and has to be
specified as R-VEL. Its value is a TABLE ID.
6. PARAM SPHERSYM can be used to define a proper 1-D spherical mesh and speeds up the run by
taking only the mesh-size in radial direction into account. With Patran, radial profiles can be
created and written out to .xyd files. These files can be used to define tables by the TABFILE
entry. For details refer to Examples 3.4 and 3.5.
7. Radial initialization of JWL is supported. The entries DESTPH and the JWL entry from the 1-D
spherical solution stage have to be included in the remap run. Alternatively, the 1-D solution may
be run with JWL and the follow-up run with ideal gas, provided that all JWL material has fully
ignited. Radial initialization of EOSIG is not supported. In the follow-up run, ideal gas material
has to be used instead of IG material.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 613 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TLOAD1
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 614 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. See the FORCEn, MOMENTn, DAREA, PLOADn, GRAV, RFORCE,ATBACC FLOW, FORCEEX,
and FLOWEX, entries for a description of how the loading or motion is calculated.
2. There can be one or more TLOAD1 entries in a set.
3. Transient loads to be used by Dytran must be selected in the Case Control Section
(TLOAD = SID).
4. TID must be blank if it references a FLOW or FLOWEX entry.
5. If TYPE is 0, the LID field can reference any of the entries: FORCEn, MOMENTn, GRAV,
RFORCE, DAREA, or PLOADn and apply the appropriate type of load.
If TYPE is 2, the LID field can only reference DAREA, FORCE, MOMENT, FORCE3, or
FORCEEX entries and applies enforced velocity to the specified grid points.
If TYPE is 4, the LID field can only reference FLOW or FLOWEX entries and applies a flow
boundary condition to the specified Eulerian faces.
If TYPE is 12, the LID field can only reference the DAREA, FORCE, or MOMENT entries and
applies an enforced velocity to the center of the specified rigid body.
If TYPE is 13, the LID field can only reference the FORCE or MOMENT entries and applies a
force or moment to the center of the specified rigid body.
6. If more than one velocity boundary condition (TYPE = 2) is applied to a grid point, the boundary
conditions can only be merged when the boundary conditions are consistently defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 615 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TLOAD2
πP
Y ( t ) = A t B e ct cos ⎛ 2 πF t + ---------⎞ for 0 ≤ t ≤ T2 – T1
⎝ 180⎠
+ C B
+ .0 2.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 616 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. See the FORCEn, MOMENTn, DAREA, PLOADn, GRAV, RFORCE, ATBACC, FLOW, FORCEEX,
and FLOWEX entries for a description of how the loading or motion is calculated.
2. There can be one or more TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 entries in a set.
3. Select transient loads to be used by Dytran in the Case Control Section (TLOAD = SID).
4. If TYPE is 0, the LID field can reference any of the entries: FORCEn, MOMENTn, DAREA,
PLOAD, GRAV, or RFORCE and applies the appropriate type of load.
If TYPE is 2 or 3, the LID field can only reference DAREA, FORCE, MOMENT, or FORCEEX
entries and applies enforced velocity or acceleration to the specified grid points.
If TYPE is 12, the LID field can only reference the DAREA, FORCE, or MOMENT entries and
applies an enforced motion to the center of gravity of the specified rigid bodies.
If TYPE is 13, the LID field can only reference the FORCE or MOMENT entries and applies a
force or moment to the center of the specified rigid body.
5. If more than one velocity boundary condition (TYPE = 2) is applied to a grid point, the boundary
conditions are constant velocity boundary conditions and are consistently defined.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 617 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
VISCDMP
Dynamic Relaxation
Defines the dynamic relaxation for the various types of Lagrangian elements, rigid bodies, and ellipsoids.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 618 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. A dynamic relaxation factor defined for a certain element type applies to all elements of that type
present in the problem.
2. See also Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Dynamic Relaxation for general information
on dynamic relaxation in Dytran.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 619 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
WALL
+ METHOD FS FK EXP
PENALTY 0.2
Remarks
1. A rigid plane of infinite size is generated that the grid points cannot penetrate. The plane is fixed
in space.
2. The grid points can slide on the wall and separate from it.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 620 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. A (moving) rigid plane of finite size can be modeled by using a rigid surface and a
master-slave contact.
4. For the wall definition using penalty method, output can be requested by referencing it in a SET
command in the Case Control Section. The keywords for output are WALLS and WALLOUT.
5. The coefficient of friction is given by:
– βv
μ = μk + ( μs – μk ) e
where
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 621 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
WALLDIR
Defines a barrier for transport in an Eulerian mesh. The boundary consists of all Eulerian boundary faces
that point in a specific direction. Useful to define a barrier when a FLOWDEF has been defined. Can be
used to model a floor in blast wave simulations.
Remarks
1. WALLDIR can be used to specify flow boundaries for CHEXA’s and also for Euler element
created by the MESH,BOX option.
2. In the OUT file, the total area of boundary faces is printed.
3. WALLDIR is not supported by the single material strength Euler solver.
4. WALLDIR overrules FLOW and WALLET definitions, but FLOWSQ overrules WALLDIR.
5. The MESH-ID is only used when multiple Euler domains have been defined. If multiple euler
domains have been defined but if the MESH-ID is blank, all Euler domains will be considered in
assigning the boundary condition.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 622 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
WALLET
Remarks
1. Material cannot pass through any of the faces referenced by the SID field.
2. Barriers can be modeled on the outside as well as the inside of an Eulerian mesh.
3. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 3: Constraints and Loading, Eulerian Loading and Constraints
for a more detailed description of the use of Eulerian barriers.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 623 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDEX
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
2. See User-written Subroutine Notes in Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for a description
of how to use user-written subroutines.
3. This yield model is applicable only for Lagrangian solid elements and Eulerian elements with
shear strength.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 624 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDEX1
YLDEX1 YID
YLDEX1 200
Remarks
1. This model is only supported by the multi-material Euler solver with strength.
2. The subroutine must be present in the file referenced by the USERCODE FMS statement.
3. See User-written Subroutine Notes in Chapter 7: User Subroutines in this manual for a description
of how to use user-written subroutines.
4. This yield model is applicable only Eulerian elements with shear strength.
5. The damage variable is determined by either FAILJC or FAILEX2. In the EXYLD1 subroutine, the
yield stress can be reduced depending on the magnitude of the damage variable. In that case the
NOFAIL option should be set on the FAILJC or FAILEX2 entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 625 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDHY
Remark
This yield model should be used for fluids that have no shear strength.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 626 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDJC
+ TMELT TROOM
+ 1500. 273.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 627 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This yield model is described in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Yield Models.
The yield stress is computed from
·
ε ⎞⎞
σ y = ( A + B ε p ) ⎛ 1 + C ln ⎛ ----
n m
- ( 1 – T* )
⎝ ⎝ ε· ⎠ ⎠
0
where
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 628 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDMC
Remarks
1. For a description of the yield models, see Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Yield
Models.
The yield stress depends on the pressure as:
σ y = M IN ( Y1, ( Y2 + Y 3 * P ) )
2. This yield model is applicable only for Eulerian materials with shear strength.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 629 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDMSS
+ ALP0 Ds
+ -0.37 0.0
Remarks
1. This material model can be used to model Snow material.
2. In addition to deviatoric plastic strain there is also volumetric plastic strain. This volumetric strain
is stored in the VOLPLS output variable. The deviatoric strain is stored in the EFFPLS variable.
3. For detail description of each parameter in this model, the user should refer to the Theory Manual
in which the mechanical properties of snow are described.
4. If Cc is set to zero, then the material behaves as a Drucker-Prager model. Ac, Bc, Fc*, and ALP0
are ignored.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 630 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. The T value must be consistently converted from the cohesion data, C DP , of the Drucker-Prager
model as follows:
T = C DP ⁄ K c
6. FTU, hydrostatic tensile strength, may not be greater than T divided by 3. Otherwise, it is set to
that value.
7. The softening modulus is used to update the hardening parameter q t ; see Theory Manual. It can
be requested as output using the FTU variable. The corresponding accumulated-plastic-
volumetric-tensile-strain variable is SOFTE.
8. This material model is valid for the Euler with Strength processor and the Multi-material Euler
with Strength solver.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 631 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDPOL
Remarks
1. This yield model is described in Yield Models at the beginning of this chapter.
The yield stress is computed from
σ y = M IN ( σ max, A + B ε p + C ε p2 + Dε p3 + Eε p4 + F ε p5 )
where
2. For a description of all of the yield models, see Yield Models in Chapter 4: Models of the Dytran
Theory Manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 632 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDRPL
Remarks
1. This yield model is described in Yield Models at the beginning of this chapter.
The yield stress is computed from
·
σ y = M AX ( C, A + B ε pn ε m )
where
2. For a description of all of the yield models, see Yield Models in Chapter 4: Models of the
Dytran Theory Manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 633 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDSG
+ TMELT TROOM
1500 273
Remarks
1. This material model can be used to model metals for a wide range of strain rates.
2. This yield model is described in Yield Models in Chapter 4: Models of the Dytran Theory Manual.
The yield stress is computed from:
A4
AT = A1 ( 1 + A 3 εp )
ρ
σ y = min ( A 2 ,A T ) 1 – H ( T – T r ) + B p ⎛⎝ ---------⎞⎠ ,( T < T m )
ρ ref
σ y = 0, T ≥ T m
where
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 634 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Tm = melt temperature.
p = pressure.
ρ = density.
A 1, … ,A 4 ,H and B are constants.
3. The reference and quasi-static strain rate are per unit time.
4. For a description of all of the yield models, see Yield Models at the beginning of this chapter.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 635 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDTM
Remarks
1. This material model can be used to model metals for a wide range of strain rates.
2. This yield model is described in Yield Models at the beginning of this chapter.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 636 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
T = temperature
Tr = room temperature
T mr = melt temperature
A, B, D, m, E, and k are constants
3. The reference and quasi-static strain rate are per unit time.
4. For a description of all of the yield models, see Yield Models at the beginning of this chapter.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 637 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDVM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 638 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. A bilinear stress-strain characteristic is used by specifying YIELD and EH:
2. A piecewise linear, stress-strain characteristic is used by specifying TABLE and TYPE (beams
and shells only)
σi j = [ ( σi – σi – 1 ) ( ε – εi – 1 ) ⁄ ( ε i – εi – 1 ) ] + σi – 1
The stress-strain characteristic used internally in Dytran is in terms of true stress and equivalent
plastic strain. However, for convenience, the stress-strain characteristic can be input in any of the
following ways (see Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Yield Models):
3. For a description of all of the yield models, see Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Yield
Models.
4. With Lagrangian and Eulerian solid elements, only an elastic perfectly plastic yield model is
currently used. Only the YIELD field is used.
5. If TABLE is blank or zero, a bilinear stress-strain curve is assumed. If TABLE has a value, it refers
to a TABLED1 entry giving the stress-strain curve for the material.
6. If TABLE is defined, the value of YIELD is left blank, since it is determined from the
stress-strain curve.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 639 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7. If TABY is blank or zero and D and P are blank or zero, the yield stress does not vary with strain
rate. If TABY has a value, then it references a TABLED1 entry, which gives the variation of the
scale factor applied to the yield stress with strain rate. (D and P must be blank or zero.)
If TABY is blank or zero and D and P are defined, the enhancement of the yield stress with strain
rate is calculated as
·
σd ε 1⁄p
------ = 1 + ⎛ ----p-⎞
σy ⎝ D⎠
·
where σ d is the dynamic stress, σy is the static yield stress (YIELD), and εp is the equivalent
plastic strain rate.
8. If TYPE is PLAST or PMOD, Young’s modulus must be defined. If TYPE is ENG or TRUE and
Young’s modulus is defined it overrides the value calculated from the stress-strain curve. See
Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Yield Models for more details.
9. Note that for values exceeding the maximum x-value of either of the TABLED1 entries (see
TABLE and TABY fields), linear extrapolation is used based upon the last two points specified in
the TABLED1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 640 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
YLDZA
+ D
+ 0.0
Remarks
1. This material model can be used to model to model Fcc (iron and steels) and Bcc (aluminum and
alloys) metals.
2. This yield model is described in Yield Models at the beginning of this chapter.
The yield stress is computed from
·
ε
– mT + CT ln -----
·
ε0
σ y = ( A + B ε pn )ε for Fcc metals
⎛ ⎛ ε· ⎞ ⎞
⎜ – mT + CT ln ⎜ -----
· ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ ε 0⎠ ⎠
σ y = ( A + B ε pn ) + De for Bcc metals
where
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 641 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 642 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 643 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Chapter 6 : Parameters
Dytran Reference Manual
6 Parameters
J
Parameters Summary 648
J
ALEITR 653
J ALETOL 654
J
ALEVER 655
J
ATB-H-OUTPUT 656
J ATBAOUT 657
J
ATBSEGCREATE 658
J
ATBTOUT 659
J AUTHINFO 660
J
AUTHQUEUE 661
J
AXIALSYM 662
J BULKL 664
J
BULKQ 665
J
BULKTYP 666
J CFULLRIG 667
J
CLUFLIM 668
J
CLUMPENER 669
J COHESION 670
J
CONM2OUT 671
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 644 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J CONTACT 672
J
COSUBCYC 677
J
COSUBMAX 678
J COUFRIC 679
J
DELCLUMP 680
J ELDLTH 681
J
ERRUSR 682
J
EULER-BOUNDARY 683
J EULSTRESS 684
J
EULTRAN 685
J
EXTRAS 686
J FAILDT 687
J
FAILOUT 688
J
FASTCOUP 689
J FBLEND 690
J
FLOW-METHOD 691
J
FMULTI 695
J GEOCHECK 696
J
GRADED-MESH 697
J
HGCMEM 698
J HGCOEFF 699
J
HGCSOL 700
J
HGCTWS 701
J HGCWRP 702
J
HGSHELL 703
J
HGSOLID 704
J HGTYPE 705
J
HICGRAV 706
J
HVLFAIL 707
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 645 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J HYDROBOD 708
J
IEEE 709
J
IGNFRCER 710
J IMM 711
J
INFO-BJOIN 713
J INISTEP 714
J
INITFILE 715
J
INITNAS 719
J LIMCUB 721
J
LIMITER 722
J
MATRMERG 723
J MATRMRG1 724
J
MAXSTEP 725
J
MESHELL 726
J MESHPLN 727
J
MICRO 728
J
MINSTEP 729
J MIXGAS 730
J
NASIGN 731
J
NZEROVEL 732
J OLDLAGTET 733
J
PARALLEL 734
J
PLCOVCUT 735
J PMINFAIL 736
J
RBE2INFO 737
J
RHOCUT 738
J RJSTIFF 739
J
RKSCHEME 740 197
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 646 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J ROHYDRO 741
J
ROMULTI 742
J
ROSTR 743
J RSTDROP 744
J
SCALEMAS 745
J SHELLFORM 747
J
SHELMSYS 748
J
SHPLAST 749
J SHSTRDEF 750
J
SHTHICK 751
J
SLELM 752
J SNDLIM 753
J
SPHERSYM 754
J
STEPFCT 755
J STEPFCTL 756
J
STRNOUT 757
J
TOLFAC 758
J UGASC 759
J
VARACTIV 760
J
VDAMP 763
J VELCUT 764
J
VELMAX 765
J
VISCOPLAS 766
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 647 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
The PARAM entry in the Bulk Data Section of the input file is used to change a number of the values that
control the analysis. This section describes all possible options and values that can be set with the
PARAM entry.
All the options are set to default values if no PARAM entry with that option is present in the input file.
You therefore only need to include a PARAM entry if you want to change one of the defaults. Normally,
the default values work well and need not be altered.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 648 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Parameters Summary
The following PARAM entries are available:
Contact Control
CONTACT Sets the contact defaults
LIMCUB Contact cube-sort algorithm
Coupling Subcycling
COSUBCYC Growth of subcycling in coupling
COSUBMAX Subcycle limit
Blending Control
DELCLUMP Delete clump factor
FBLEND Blend fraction
CLUMPENER Kinetic energy calculation method for Eulerian blended clumps
Time-Step Control
INISTEP Initial time step
MAXSTEP Maximum time step
MINSTEP Minimum time step.
SCALEMAS Mass scaling definition
STEPFCT Time-step scale factor
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 649 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Limits
FMULTI Dimensioning of multimaterial overflow array
MICRO Microzoning parameter
RHOCUT Global minimum density for Eulerian elements
ROHYDRO Minimum density for hydrodynamic, single-material Eulerian elements
ROMULTI Minimum density for multimaterial Eulerian elements
ROSTR Minimum density for single material Eulerian elements with strength
SNDLIM Minimum value of speed of sound
VELCUT Velocity cutoff
VELMAX Maximum velocity for Eulerian and Lagrangian elements
Restart Control
RSTDROP Type of elements dropped when restarting
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 650 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Miscellaneous
AUTHQUEUE Licensing queuing control
CFULLRIG Converts 123456 constraints to FULLRIG for RBE2
EULTRAN Switch for the multimaterial Euler transport scheme
EXTRAS Extra input constants
FASTCOUP Fast coupling algorithm
GEOCHECK Defines geometry consistency check
HYDROBOD Defines a body force for single hydro material in Euler
LIMITER Defines type of scheme used in the Euler solver
MATRMERG Merges MATRIG and RBE2FULLRIG assemblies
MATRMRG1 Merges MATRIG and RBE2 FULLRIG assemblies
RJSTIFF Rigid-joint stiffness
RKSCHEME Defines the type of time scheme used in the Euler solver
VARACTIV Activation or deactivation of grid-point, element, or face variables
Shell Options
SHELMSYS Shell-element system definition
SHPLAST Type of plane-stress plasticity for shells
SHTHICK Shell-thickness modification option
SHELLFORM Sets the default shell formulation
Dynamic Relaxation
VDAMP Defines dynamic-relaxation parameter
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 651 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Airbag Control
PLCOVCUT Defines time that PLCOVER will be cut
UGASC Universal gas constant
ATB Positioning
ATBSEGCREATE Creates grids and elements for ATBSEG
Output Control
ATB-H-OUTPUT Writes ATB output to Dytran time-history files
ATBTOUT Frequency of output written to main output file of ATB
ATBTOUT Frequency of output written to the time-history files of ATB
AUTHINFO Licensing information control
CONM2OUT Conm2 summary output
ELDLTH Show list of Lagrangian elements with time step in ascending order
ERRUSR Error message redefinition
FAILOUT Failed element output parameter
IEEE IEEE binary data output format
IGNFRCER Ignores warnings
INFO-BJOIN Lists the generated BJOIN s and spot welds
MESHELL Mesh density for covering rigid ellipsoids
MESHPLN Mesh density for covering of rigid planes
NASIGN Echo ignored data entries
PARALLEL Parallel execution information
RBE2INFO Lists MATRIG and RBE2 grids in the output file
SHSTRDEF Composite shell stress and strain output
SLELM Store shell sublayer variables
STRNOUT Shell sublayer strain output
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 652 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Prestressing Analysis
INITFILE Defines method of initialization from a solution file
INITNAS Defines the type of displacement initialization file
Parameter Descriptions
The parameters are listed in alphabetical order. The entry and the examples are shown in free format,
although small or large fixed format entries can also be used.
The default value indicates the value used if no PARAM entry is present. The type column indicates the
type of data you must supply. This can be I (Integer), R (Real), or C (Character). In addition, a range of
permissible values may also be indicated for example, I > 0 means that you must supply an integer that
is greater than zero.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 653 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ALEITR
Remarks
1. In most applications, one iteration should be sufficient. If not, the number of iterations can be
increased to a maximum of six.
2. Less mesh iterations reduce the computational effort.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 654 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ALETOL
Remark
Grid points in the ALE interface with coordinates that fall within the tolerance are recognized to be an
ALE interface pair.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 655 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ALEVER
Remark
The V2.2 option should be used in problems where the pressure levels are expected to be low. The V2.1
method is faster and consumes less CPU time, but it can lead to spurious pressure levels in a low pressure
level calculation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 656 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATB-H-OUTPUT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 657 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATBAOUT
Remarks
1. Only active when field 3 on the A5 card of the ATB input file is set to a value of -1.
2. Controls the frequency of the output of segment acceleration, velocity and displacement, joint
forces and moments.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 658 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATBSEGCREATE
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 659 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ATBTOUT
Remarks
1. Only active when field 26 on the A5 card of the ATB input file is set to a value of –1.
2. Controls the frequency of all output requested on the H-cards, and of the tabular time-histories
that are controlled by field 18 on the A5 card of the ATB input file.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 660 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
AUTHINFO
Remark
You can use this parameter to obtain extra licensing information if a FLEXlm licensing problem is
experienced. Under normal circumstances, where FLEXlm licensing is not a problem, this parameter is
not used.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 661 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
AUTHQUEUE
Remarks
1. When a job is waiting for a seat to become available, it consumes computer resources such as
memory, disk space, etc. Too many jobs waiting for licenses could have a severe impact on
the system.
2. A maximum of 100 Dytran jobs can be queued.
3. If queueing is enabled, Dytran waits in the queue until the license of the desired type has been
released by any other job(s) currently holding it. If queueing is disabled, Dytran searches for any
next applicable free Dytran license with which the run could be started. When no more of
the desired Dytran licenses are found, the job terminates. Note that a job requiring a 'basic' license
could also run using a 'standard' license although that one would obtain more tokens
than necessary.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 662 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
AXIALSYM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 663 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remark
1. Only available for Eulerian elements and does not support Lagrange elements. The effect of this
parameter is not limited to the solvers. Also, Euler archives will reflect the modified Euler
mesh geometry.
2. The Euler mesh cannot only be symmetric but can also be a rectangular mesh comprising of one
layer. Using the angle specified by PHI, this Euler mesh is mapped into a 2-D axial
symmetric mesh.
3. The Euler mesh has to consist of one layer.
4. Rectangular meshes that can be made 2d symmetric using the angle PHI should satisfy:
• All boundary Euler faces are aligned with a coordinate direction
• Only one layer thick
• The axial symmetry axis is either on the boundary of the Euler mesh or outside the Euler mesh.
It is not allowed that the axial axis is inside the Euler mesh.
Initialization of Euler element using geometric regions as defined by the TICEUL entry is carried
out onto the transformed 2d axial mesh.
5. In the time step computation the circumferential mesh-size will not be taken into account.
6. Use the PHI2 option with caution. Euler initialization is done using the mesh rotated by the angle
PHI2. So after including the angle PHI2 or modifying its value, the Euler initialization should
be revised.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 664 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BULKL
Remarks
1. The default value works well for the majority of problems.
2. The value defined on this entry is used as the default whenever BULKL is blank on the DMATxx
material entries.
3. When BULKL is specified on a material definition entry, the default value is overridden for that
specific material.
4. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on bulk viscosity.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 665 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BULKQ
Remarks
1. The default value works well in the majority of situations.
2. The value defined on this entry is used as the default whenever BULKQ is blank on the DMATxx
material entries.
3. When BULKQ is specified on a material definition entry, the default value is overridden for that
specific material.
4. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on bulk viscosity.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 666 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
BULKTYP
Remark
See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on bulk viscosity.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 667 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CFULLRIG
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 668 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CLUFLIM
PARAM, CLUFLIM,0.22
Remark
DIV-
The Volume strain rate ---------- in clumps will be limited by
Δt
⎛ DI V-⎞
---------- min ⎛⎝ 1 ,-----------------------------⎞⎠ ⎛ -----------⎞
U DIV
⎝ Δ t ⎠ L im = C LUF LIM ⎝ Δ t ⎠
∑ Un c f el * V ol el
el ∈ cl ump
------------------------------------------------------------
U =
∑ V o l el
el ∈ clump
Here Un c f and V ol denote the uncovered fraction and volume of an element inside the clump.
Therefore, only when the average uncover fraction falls below CLUFLIM, the volume strain rate
is limited.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 669 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CLUMPENER
Remarks
1. With the release of Dytran 2002 R1, the default method has been switched from SUM to AVERAGE
to minimize the possible occurrence of negative internal energy locally in Eulerian elements
during the analysis.
2. For normal analysis, the default method AVERAGE will work correctly. Only in cases where
you want to repeat an older analysis, you should use the method SUM to obtain the same results
as before.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 670 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COHESION
PARAM,COHESION,8e+10,8e+5,2
Remarks
1. Only used when Coulomb friction coefficients have been specified for a COUPLE entry.
2. During tension any relative tangential velocity between coupling surface and Eulerian material
V rel , tan gen ti al⎞
will yield a shear stress whose magnitude equals F R IC ⋅ mi n ⎛ 1 ,--------------------------------
- . This is a viscous-like
⎝ R E F V EL ⎠
friction law.
3. This shear force opposes the relative tangential movement along the coupling surface.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 671 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONM2OUT
Remark
When PARAM,CONM2OUT is set to NO, there is no summary of the concentrated mass. This means that
the mass, momentum, and energy of the concentrated masses, is not added to the material and cycle
summaries. Setting PARAM,CONM2OUT,NO saves memory and CPU time.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 672 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CONTACT
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 673 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
THICK 1.0
GAP 0.0
PEN FACTOR
PENV 0.4
INFO,[G1, Information on the contact state of grid points G1, G2, ... C,I
G2, ...] is printed to ASCII files, named CNT...
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 674 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 675 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
(Default = 10)
ZERO 0.0
(Default = 0)
See Remark
Remarks
1. This parameter is important for initialization of BPLANE contact. The faces of the contact surface
will be enlarged with a value of TOLPR1. However, this might not be enough when the air bag is
offset folded. On the other hand, a large value of TOLPR1 might induce hooking. Therefore, a
new parameter is introduced called TOLFAC. The value of TOLFAC scales the value of TOLPR1
only at initialization, such that the contact is correctly found.
2. Recommended value is 100 in an air bag analysis
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 676 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
.The PARAM, FORCE check takes up some CPU time and, therefore, do not make this value too
small. Furthermore, when the check is performed at each cycle, the force will be too limited and
the bag will not unfold. Recommended values are between 5 and 200. The same problems can
occur for SCALE. In case this value is too small, the bag will not unfold either. The minimum
value for air bags that should be used is about 5. The maximum is about 20. When this value is
too big a difference will not be noticed. TYPE ZERO is a bigger restriction. In some cases, TYPE
FMAXF might yield better results.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 677 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COSUBCYC
Remarks
1. The subcycling algorithm automatically estimates the number of subcycles to be used. This is
updated throughout the calculation. This parameter controls how much the number of subcycles
can grow. For example, COSUBCYC is set to 1, and the current number of time steps between
updates of the coupling geometry is 4. If Dytran estimates that the subcycling interval should be 7,
the subcycling interval is increased by 1 until a value of 7 is reached.
2. There is no control on the amount by which the subcycling interval can decrease.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 678 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COSUBMAX
Remarks
1. Updating the coupling geometry takes a lot of CPU time. Subcycling gives substantial savings in
CPU time for coupled calculations.
2. The smaller the value of this parameter, the greater the accuracy of the analysis and the greater
the cost. Conversely, larger values offer significant CPU savings, but very large values give
incorrect results.
3. If the geometry of the coupling surface is changing rapidly, smaller values of PARAM,
COSUBMAX should be used.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 679 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUFRIC
In Dytran 2005r3, the Coulomb friction scheme was updated to fully reflect friction between metals. The
Coulomb friction of Dytran 2005 is more suitable for friction with nonmetals like soil and sticky fluids.
This PARAM deactivates the Dytran 2005r3 scheme and uses the Dytran 2005 scheme instead. The main
difference between the schemes is the treatment of tensile reconditions. In Dytran 2005r3 and beyond, a
tensile condition will result in zero load on the structure part. In Dytran 2005 under tensile condition, a
tensile load was applied. In addition the onset of sliding in the friction model was applied differently. In
stead of using this PARAM one may also consider using PARAM,COHESION.
PARAM,COURFIC,NO-METAL
Remarks
Only used when Coulomb friction coefficients have been specified for a COUPLE entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 680 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
DELCLUMP
Remark
Also see the FBLEND parameter.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 681 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ELDLTH
Remarks
1. When the value is set to zero, a list of all Lagrangian (structural) elements is printed to the
output file.
2. Spring and damper elements are not shown in the list.
3. When you use this feature to determine the initial time step, you should be aware that the time
step listed includes the time-step safety factor.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 682 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ERRUSR
I Informative
W Warning
E Error
F Fatal
C Catastrophic
N Nastran–ignore
prints Number of times the message is printed I 5
Remarks
1. An error name consists of a maximum of eight characters. The entry is also used as a wildcard by
entering less than eight characters. The string then is matched with the actual names, and every
match redefines the actual message.
2. See Chapter 8: Diagnostic Messages in this manual.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 683 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EULER-BOUNDARY
Remarks
1. The finite volume representation, in general, assumes that element values are constant within each
element. While this assumption is adequate for the large majority of applications, fluid models
involving hydrostatic pressure gradients require that the pressure gradient also be recognized to
exist within the element. When element-internal hydrostatic gradients are not accounted for, the
calculation is less accurate and suffers from numerical symptoms like pair forming of element
pressures. By activating the EXTRAPOLATION option, hydrostatic gradients inside the element
are taken into account. For meshes without bias, EXTRAPOLATION option only modifies the
numerical schemes along the boundary.
2. When coupling surfaces are used, PARAM,FASTCOUP has to also be activated.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 684 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EULSTRESS
Remarks
1. Only used for the MMSTREN solver.
2. Stresses are a material property and when material flows in or out an element the stress state in
the element is changed. This is analogous to temperature and energy. Not the temperature is
transported, but energy. After transporting energy the temperature is recomputed by dividing the
energy by element mass and specific heat. In case of stress, the “energy” is given by mass times
stress. After transporting this “energy” the new stress follows by dividing it by mass. As shown
in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 6: The Standard Euler Solver, Euler With Strength, this gives
a correct updating procedure for stresses. There it also proven that stress times mass is conserved
during transport.
3. In most simulations, variations in density are small and one can replace multiplication by mass by
a multiplication by volume. This method is activated by the VOLUME option which is also the
default option. Using the MASS option may have some influence on simulations with large density
variations. The MASS option gives the most accurate results.
4. The transport logic of the effective plastic strain is identical to that of stresses. When using the
MASS option, the plastic strain is computed more accurately when material is compressed.
5. The Euler with Strength solver always uses the MASS option, by default.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 685 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EULTRAN
Remarks
1. The default value of IMPULSE is sufficient for most Euler problems. Especially problems where
the reference density of the different materials varies widely (for example, orders of magnitude)
are required to use the default option.
2. In case the IMPULSE option (default) is used, the Euler transport scheme computes that the face
velocity uses an impulse weighted average of the material velocity in the left and the right element
adjacent to the face.
3. In case the AVERAGE option is used, the Euler transport scheme computes the face velocity as
one-half times the sum of the material velocity in the left and the right element adjacent to
the face.
4. Does not apply to the single material hydrodynamic solver and the Roe solver.
5. The FAIL option requires a failure model for at least one Eulerian material. In case of the default
NOFAIL, then failed Euler material can support shear stress again as soon as new material enters
the Euler element. Thus the information that part of the material inside the Euler element has
failed is lost. The FAIL option activates transport of fail fraction and thereby keeps track of
material that has failed. In this way only the failed part of the element can no longer supports shear
stresses. In more detail, the yield stress in the material is scaled by (1-failfrac), where failfrac
denotes the fail fraction of the material. The fail fraction of the first material in an element can
be retrieved from Euler archive or time-history results files in the DAMAGE variable. The value of
fail fraction DAMAGE is between zero and one.
6. The FAIL option cannot be combined with the Johnson-Cook failure model (FAILJC).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 686 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXTRAS
Remark
Usage in a user subroutine as follows:
SUBROUTINE EXCOMP (...)
COMMON/MSCD_EXTRAS/NMEXTR, IDEXTR
.
.
.
CHARACTER*16 CARGET, CVAR
.
.
.
IF (IDEXTR.GT.0) THEN
DO NV = 1,NMEXTR
CVAR = CARGET (IDEXTR, NV,’USER’)
IF (CVAR(1:8).EQ.’MASSFLOW’) THEN
VALMF = XARGET (IDEXTR, NV,’USER’)
ELSEIF (CVAR(1:4).EQ.’MASS’) THEN
VALMS = XARGET (IDEXTR, NV,’USER’)
ENDIF
ENDDO
ENDIF
RETURN
.
.
.
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 687 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILDT
Remarks
1. This failure model is valid for all Lagrangian solid (CHEXA)and shell (CQUAD4 )elements.
2. All elements for which the time step falls below the specified value are removed from
the computation.
3. Although it is not usually necessary to limit the element time-step for Lagrangian elements, there
are occasions where specifying a minimum time-step can be advantageous for computational
performance, for example, when adaptive contact is used.
4. Note that this parameter should be used with care as you may influence the results of the analysis
when you set the time-step criterion to a too high value. You then run the risk that elements are
removed from the analysis while they may still be relevant.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 688 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FAILOUT
Remarks
1. When the NO option is chosen, the archives are written out as one file per requested time step
regardless of the number set in the SAVE command for the archive files that appear in the Case
Control Section.
2. Failed elements are NOT filtered when written to a RESTART file or a TIMEHISTORY file.f
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 689 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FASTCOUP
Remarks
1. Default value for option1 is INPLANE and for option2 NOFAIL.
2. When option1 is set to INPLANE or when option 1 is blank, a small offset is given to coupling
surface segments that are on top of a face of an Eulerian element. This is done because coupling
surfaces segments on Eulerfaces make the Euler element volume computation invalid. Also
boundary conditions on these segments are not correctly imposed. The net effect of these
problems is unpredictable. The problem can either run correctly, or remain stable but give false
results or become instable. The option NO-OFFSET is obsolete and should not be used.
3. Option2 can only be used in combination with PARAM, LIMITER, ROE, or MMHYDRO or
MMSTREN. The coupling surface must consist of CQUADs and/or CTRIAs and a failure model for
the material of the surface must be defined.
4. This parameter can only be used when the Eulerian mesh is aligned with the basic coordinate
system axes.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 690 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FBLEND
Blend Fraction
Eulerian elements with uncovered fractions smaller than FBLEND are blended with adjacent elements to
form a clump so that they do not control the time step.
Remarks
1. The default value is satisfactory for virtually all calculations.
2. Elements are blended only if they would have controlled the time step otherwise.
3. Elements with uncovered fractions greater than FBLEND are not blended and are allowed to
control the time step.
4. Large values of FBLEND produce a larger time step but many blends. Small values produce a
smaller time step and fewer blends.
5. In a calculation with a coupling surface, STEPFCT is smaller or equal FBLEND to avoid
instabilities (see PARAM,STEPFCT).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 691 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FLOW-METHOD
Remarks
1. For a detailed description of the theory involved, see Reference [18.]
2. This parameter applies to simulations where:
• two coupling surfaces share a common set of facets.
• each coupling surface has it’s own Euler domain.
• material flows from one Euler domain into the other through the open area represented by the
common set of facets.
Flow will only occur if:
• the common facets are defined as ‘open’, using PORFLCP or PORFCPL.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 692 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
• the common facets open up due to failure of a shell structure, using COUP1INT.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 693 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
COUP1INT/CO
Material UP1FL
flow (Failure of
through a FLOW- FLOW- PORFLCPL PORFCPL shell elements
coupling METHOD = METHOD (velocity (Pressure creates the
Euler Solver surface POLPACK = FACET based based) opening)
HYDRO YES YES NO YES YES Only for flow-
method =
polpack
HYDRO – YES YES YES YES YES YES
Roe solver –
1st Order
HYDRO – YES YES YES YES YES YES
Roe solver –
2nd Order
MMHYDRO YES YES NO YES NO Only for flow-
method =
polpack
STRENGTH NO - - - - -
MMSTREN YES YES NO YES NO Only for flow-
method =
polpack
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 694 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. The Euler domains are shown below with the support types for each:
5. An Euler domain is associated with a coupling surface by specifying the MESHID or SET1ID on
the COUPLE option.
6. FLOW-METHOD = POLPACK has the following limitations:
• The entries NSTGP and NSTEL on all MESH entries should be left blank. It is not allowed to
specify for any MESH entry the starting element number or starting grid point number.
• There are restrictions on output requests. See the section “Output” of GettingStarted-Multiple-
Coupling-Surfaces.
• Flow faces and wallets are not supported.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 695 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FMULTI
Remark
The multimaterial Eulerian elements use an overflow array in which to store material data. This array can
hold FMULTI times the total number of Eulerian elements. In a problem where more than 10% of the
elements have more than one material, the default value of FMULTI must be increased.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 696 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GEOCHECK
Remarks
1. The defined geometry is checked for consistent connectivity of the hexagonal elements. If an
inconsistency is detected, the connectivity is corrected. CFACE entries with references to
elements that have been corrected are corrected as well.
2. If a hexagonal mesh is generated with other commercial preprocessors, this parameter can correct
the connectivity of the hexagonal elements in case problems are encountered with face generation
or volume computation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 697 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GRADED-MESH
Remarks
1. This parameter can be used to build block-structured meshes.
2. It does not support multiple coupling surfaces.
3. All Euler elements have to be orthogonal.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 698 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGCMEM
Remarks
1. The default value applies to all types of hourglass suppression methods and should be used unless
there is a good reason to define the hourglass damping coefficient by another means.
2. The value specified on this entry is used whenever the coefficient is not explicitly defined on the
HGSUPPR entry.
3. If this entry is omitted, the default value of the coefficient used in the hourglass suppression
method for shell elements is either equal to the default value of 0.1 or is equal to the default value
defined on a PARAM,HGCOEFF entry.
4. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 699 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGCOEFF
Remarks
1. The default applies to all types of hourglass suppression methods and should be used unless there
is good reason to define the hourglass damping coefficient by another means.
2. The value specified on this entry is used whenever the coefficients are not explicitly defined on
HGSUPPR entries or on a HGCMEM HGCWRP, HGCTWS, or HGCSOL entry.
3. If this entry is omitted, the default value of the hourglass damping coefficients is either equal to
the default value of 0.1 or is equal to the value specified on a HGCMEM, HGCTWS ,HGCWRP,
or HGCSOL PARAM entry.
4. The value of the coefficients can be explicitly defined for each property by using an
HGSUPPR entry.
5. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 700 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGCSOL
Remarks
1. The default value applies to all types of hourglass suppression methods and should be used unless
there is a good reason to define the hourglass damping coefficient by another means.
2. The value specified on this entry is used whenever the coefficient is not explicitly defined on the
HGSUPPR entry.
3. If this entry is omitted, the default value of the coefficient used in the hourglass suppression
method for solid elements is either equal to the default value of 0.1 or is equal to the default value
defined on a PARAM,HGCOEFF entry.
4. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 701 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGCTWS
Remarks
1. The default value applies to all types of hourglass suppression methods and should be used unless
there is a good reason to define the hourglass damping coefficient by another means.
2. The value specified on this entry is used whenever the coefficient is not explicitly defined on the
HGSUPPR entry.
3. If this entry is omitted, the default value of the coefficient used in the hourglass suppression
method for shell elements is either equal to the default value of 0.1 or is equal to the default value
defined on a PARAM,HGCOEFF entry.
4. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 702 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGCWRP
Remarks
1. The default value applies to all types of hourglass suppression methods and should be used unless
there is a good reason to define the hourglass damping coefficient by another means.
2. The value specified on this entry is used whenever the coefficient is not explicitly defined on the
HGSUPPR entry.
3. If this entry is omitted, the default value of the coefficient used in the hourglass suppression
method for shell elements is either equal to the default value of 0.1 or is equal to the default value
defined on a PARAM,HGCOEFF entry.
4. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 703 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGSHELL
Remarks
1. The type of hourglass suppression method defined on this entry is used as the default whenever
the type fields on the HGSUPPR for shell properties are left blank.
2. If this entry is omitted, the default suppression method used for shell elements is either FBV or
the default method defined on the PARAM,HGTYPE entry.
3. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 704 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGSOLID
Remarks
1. The type of hourglass suppression method defined on this entry is used as the default whenever
the type fields on the HGSUPPR for solid properties are left blank.
2. If this entry is omitted, the default suppression method used for solid elements is either FBS or
the default method defined on the PARAM,HGTYPE entry.
3. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 705 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HGTYPE
Remarks
1. The type of the hourglass suppression method defined on this entry is used as the default
whenever the type fields in the HGSUPPR entries are left blank.
2. If this entry is omitted, the type can be defined on a PARAM,HGSHELL entry for shell elements,
a PARAM,HGSOLID entry for solid elements, or on the HGSUPPR entries; otherwise the defaults
apply. For shell elements the default is FBV; for solid elements, the default is FBS.
3. See Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4 : Models, Artificial Viscosities for details on hourglass
suppression methods.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 706 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HICGRAV
Remark
1. The value set by this parameter will be used by all HIC output requests.
2. This parameter can only be set once in the input deck.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 707 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HVLFAIL
Remarks
1. Lagrangian elements (CHEXA) that have a material model with a failure model fail when the
hydrodynamic volume limit is reached and the parameter is set to YES.
The elements can fail only when the following items are presented in the input:
a. The material model has a hydrodynamic volume limit (HVL).
b. A failure model is defined.
c. PARAM, HVLFAIL, YES
Example
PARAM, HVLFAIL, YES
DMAT, 1, 7850, 101, 102, 103, 104
EOSPOL, 101, 175.E9,,,,,,+
+, 1.1
SHREL, 102, 80.77E9
YLDVM, 103, 1.E20
FAILMPS, 104, 1.E20
2. The hydrodynamic volume limit by default allows for 10% expansion.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 708 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
HYDROBOD
Remark
This parameter defines a constant body force load in Euler for single hydro material only.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 709 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
IEEE
Remarks
1. On computers that, by default, write binary data in IEEE format, the parameter will have no effect.
2. Binary IEEE files can be transported to all IEEE computer systems. (Note that this in only valid
for ARCHIVE and TIMEHISTORY files.)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 710 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
IGNFRCER
Ignores Warnings
Ignores certain errors for FORCE and MOMENT entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 711 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
IMM
Remarks
1. Method ZERO is best suitable when initially more than a couple of elements with zero or near zero
area are present in the model.
2. The Initial Metric Method is described in the Dytran User’s Guide in Chapter 6: The Standard
Euler Solver, Initial Metric Method for Air Bags.
3. The default for Option2 depends on Option1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 712 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 713 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INFO-BJOIN
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 714 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INISTEP
Remarks
1. This parameter is required to start an analysis.
2. See Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Controlling the Analysis for details on time step control.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 715 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INITFILE
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 716 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
• One-dimensional elements
• Shell elements (including composites)
• Membrane elements
• Lagrangian solid elements
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 717 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
• One-dimensional elements
• Shell elements (including composites)
• Membrane elements
• Lagrangian solid elements
• Eulerian elements
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 718 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The user is responsible for consistency upon choosing the V2 definition.
2. See Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Restarts and Prestress Analysis for more detailed
information about prestress analyses.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 719 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
INITNAS
Remarks
1. When Dytran uses the results of an MD Nastran analysis to start a transient analysis from a
prestressed state, the grid-point displacement field, as computed by MD Nastran, is read from a
formatted file written either by MSC.XL, MD Patran, or MD Nastran.
The format of the formatted import files is as follows:
MSC.XL Export File:
Record 1: Header 1
Record 2: Header 2
Record 3: Header 3
Record 4: Header 4
Record 5: Header 5
Record 6: Header 6
Record 7: Header 7
Record 8: Header 8
Record 9 to n+8: Grid point X-Dis Y-Dis Z-Dis(A8, 3A15)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 720 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 721 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
LIMCUB
Remark
Each slave node has to search for master nodes that are close enough to have potential contact. It is too
expensive to have each slave node check each master node. To limit the number of checks, the space in
which the nodes reside is subdivided into cubes. This subdivision is done so that the slave nodes have to
check only the master nodes in their own cube and those in the neighboring cubes. The maximum number
of cubes used to subdivide the space is equal to the value of LIMCUB.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 722 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
LIMITER
Remarks
1. By default, the standard Euler solver is used.
2. By default, second order spatial accuracy is used. The temporal accuracy is defined using the
PARAM,RKSCHEME entry.
3. When type ROE is defined, no void elements are allowed and it cannot be used in combination
with EOSJWL. Also, ALE and options concerning air bag analyses are not supported.
4. For more details on the Euler solver see Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 6: Standard Euler Solver.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 723 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MATRMERG
Remarks
1. FR<id1> must be a nonexisting RBE2-FULLRIG. The properties of FR<id1> (as mass, center
of gravity, and moments of inertia) are computed by Dytran from the properties of each rigid body
mentioned on the entry. Rigid body output can be asked for FR<id1>, and loads or rigid body
constraints can be applied to FR<id1>. The other MATRIGs and RBE2-FULLRIGs mentioned
on the MATRMERG entry disappear after they have been merged.
2. Instead of supplying rigid body names, the AUTO option can be used. After all the normal
PARAM,MATRMERG and PARAM,MATRMRG1 entries have been applied, a
PARAM,MATRMERG,AUTO merges all the resulting MATRIGs and RBE2-FULLRIGs which
have common grid points into a new rigid assembly called FM<id>, where the id is a new FM
number starting from 1. As it is not known at the start of an Dytran analysis how many FM-
assemblies will be created, no rigid body output can be asked for FM<id>, and no constraints or
loads can be applied to FM<id>. The MATRIGs and RBE2-FULLRIGs, which have been merged
by the AUTO option into a new FM<id> assembly, disappear.
3. To supply predefined properties for the merged assembly, PARAM,MATRMRG1 can be
used, where the first rigid body mentioned on the entry must be an existing RBE2-FULLRIG
or MATRIG.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 724 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MATRMRG1
Remark
MR<id1> or FR<id1> must be an existing MATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG, respectively. For a
FULLRIG, the properties of FR<id1> (as mass, center of gravity and moments of inertia) are computed
by Dytran from the properties of each rigid body mentioned on the entry. For a MATRIG, the mass of
MR<id1> is either the predefined mass on the MATRIG (id1) entry or the predefined density on the
MATRIG (id1) entry times the total volume of all MATRIG members in the MATRMRG1 entry. The
center of gravity and moments of inertia of MR<id1> are either predefined on the MATRIG (id1) entry,
or are otherwise computed from the properties of each rigid body on the entry. The other MATRIGs and
RBE2 FULLRIGs mentioned on the MATRMRG1 entry disappear after they have been merged.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 725 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MAXSTEP
Remark
If the time step calculated by Dytran is greater than MAXSTEP, the time step is set to MAXSTEP.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 726 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MESHELL
Remarks
1. The mesh density factor is applied for both ellipsoids in a contact definition and for output
purposes. For ellipsoids in contact, the default value results in 18 by 36 elements. When you have
ellipsoids for output only, the default value results in 8 by 16 elements.
2. The default value is sufficient for most cases. When you increase the value, the representation of
the (hyper) ellipsoids is better, but the contact computation will be more expensive, and the
archive files will be larger.
3. In case the ellipsoids are meshed for output purposes only, the number of elements in the direction
of the ellipsoid’s short axis equals 2 . (value-1). The number of elements in the direction of the
ellipsoid’s long axis is twice the number in the direction of the ellipsoid’s short axis.
4. When the ellipsoids are meshed for contact purposes, the number of elements in the direction of
the ellipsoid’s short axis equals 2 . (2 . value-1). The number of elements in the direction of the
ellipsoid’s long axis is twice the number in the direction of the ellipsoid’s short axis.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 727 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MESHPLN
Remark
The default is sufficient in most cases.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 728 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MICRO
Micro-zoning Parameter
Defines the accuracy of the initial conditions in Eulerian elements, when using the geometrical
shape definition
Remarks
1. MICRO3 is the number of micro zones into which an element is subdivided during initial
condition generation.
2. The default MICRO = 10 results in material fractions as accurate as 0.001. If a higher accuracy is
required, a greater value for MICRO can be used, but the CPU time for the generation
increases rapidly.
3. Micro zoning is only used when the initial conditions of the Eulerian material are specified on a
TICEUL entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 729 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MINSTEP
Remarks
1. When the elements become very distorted, in a poorly designed mesh for example, or when they
have endured a very large distortion, the time step may drop dramatically. The analysis continues,
however, and a lot of computer resources may be wasted. This option allows you to specify a
minimum time step that causes the analysis to terminate.
2. See Chapter 9: Running the Analysis, Terminating the Analysis for details on analysis termination.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 730 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MIXGAS
Remarks
1. This parameter is only defined for use with GBAG gas bag definitions and/or the single-material
Euler solver.
2. This parameter can be used in conjunction with INFLATR,INFLATR1, INFLHYB, and INFLHYB1
inflator definitions and with PORLHOLE, PERMEAB, PERMGBG, and PERMGBG
porosity definitions.
3. By default, PARAM,MIXGAS is set to YES if any INFLHYB, INFLHYB1, or INFLGAS entries
are present.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 731 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NASIGN
Remarks
1. The echo of the ignored data entries is output to a file with the extension IGN.
2. Large input that originates from MD Nastran or Dytran may produce a large amount of output and
slow down the input processing.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 732 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
NZEROVEL
Remarks
1. This parameter applies only to nodes of Lagrangian elements.
2. Specifying NO reduces the CPU overhead time.
3. When the velocity of a node is set to zero, effectively the node is constraint, like an SPC or SPC1.
4. Special attention is necessary for the contact definition. If the failed node is not taken out of the
contact, it behaves as a rigid boundary constraint. Choose the appropriate METHOD for the
SLVACT entry on the CONTACTbulk data entry option.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 733 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
OLDLAGTET
1 = activate
Remark
The current default integration scheme for Lagrangian CTETRA elements use linear tetrahedron FE one.
It is more consistent (in terms of accuracy) and efficient (both in memory and CPU time) compared with
the collapsed hexahedron scheme. The old scheme based on collapsed hexahedron with reduced
integration is deactivated. If the old scheme is activated, it is used as default. But, it is still possible to use
the new scheme for CTETRA by using separate PSOLIDwith IN = 1 and ISOP = 1 combination.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 734 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PARALLEL
Remarks
1. A summary on the parallel operation when using the shared-memory mode can be requested by
including a PARAM,PARALLEL,INFPAR,ON entry in the input file. This request is not
available in a restart of an analysis.
2. Currently, the information on the parallel sections is available for the shell solver only.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 735 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PLCOVCUT
Remark
See also the COUPLE and COUOPT Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 736 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
PMINFAIL
Remarks
1. Lagrangian elements (CHEXA) that have a material definition with a failure model will fail when
the parameter is set to YES and the spall limit (minimum pressure) is reached, even when the other
failure criterion is not yet reached.
2. The spall limit is set on the PMINC entry. (See also the DMATentry).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 737 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RBE2INFO
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 738 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RHOCUT
Remarks
1. Any Eulerian element with a density less than RHOCUT is considered to be empty. All of its
variables are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
2. In the Eulerian transport calculation, if the material is flowing from element A to element B, and
a. If the density of element B after transport is less than RHOCUT, then no transport is done.
b. If the density of element A after transport is less than RHOCUT, then all of the mass is
transported to element B.
3. A reasonable value of RHOCUT is 1.E–5 times the initial density.
4. If only RHOCUT is defined, all Eulerian elements use the RHOCUT value as cutoff density. If
RHOCUT is omitted, all Eulerian elements use a cutoff density automatically set to 1.E–5 times a
characteristic density. For single-material Eulerian elements, this characteristic density is the
reference density.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 739 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RJSTIFF
Rigid-joint Stiffness
Defines the stiffness of a rigid joint.
Remarks
1. The absolute stiffness of rigid joints is calculated automatically by Dytran. The stiffness of joints
is taken so that a stable solution is guaranteed. The stiffness calculation takes into account the fact
that a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
2. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken
because too high a value may lead to an unstable calculation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 740 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RKSCHEME
Remarks
1. This parameter can only be used in combination with PARAM,LIMITER,ROE. The default
number of stages depends on the spatial accuracy of the solution scheme. One stage is used for
first order spatial accuracy, and three stages for second order spatial accuracy.
2. For more details on the Runge-Kutta time-integration scheme see Dytran Theory Manual,
Chapter 6: Standard Euler Solver.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 741 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ROHYDRO
Remarks
1. Hydrodynamic, single-material Eulerian elements with a density less than ROHYDRO are
considered to be empty. All of the variables are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
2. In the Eulerian transport calculation, if the material is flowing from element A to element B, and
a. If the density of element B after transport is less than ROHYDRO, then no transport is done.
b. If the density of element A after transport is less than ROHYDRO, then all of the mass is
transported to element B.
3. By default, the cutoff density for hydrodynamic Eulerian elements is set to 1.E–5 times the
material reference density.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 742 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ROMULTI
Remarks
1. Multimaterial Eulerian elements with a density less than ROMULTI are considered to be empty.
All of the variables are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
2. In the Eulerian transport calculation, if the material is flowing from element A to element B, and
a. If the density of a specific material in element B after transport is less than ROMULTI, no
transport is done.
b. If the density of a specific material in element A after transport is less than ROMULTI, all of
the mass of that material is transported to element B.
3. By default, the cut-off density is set for each material separately as 1.E–5 times the material
reference density.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 743 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
ROSTR
Remarks
1. Single-material Eulerian elements with shear strength with a density less than ROSTR are
considered to be empty. All of the variables are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
2. In the Eulerian transport calculation, if the material is flowing from element A to element B, and
a. If the density of element B after transport is less than ROSTR, then no transport is done.
b. If the density of element A after transport is less than ROSTR, then all of the mass is
transported to element B.
3. By default the cut-off density for Eulerian elements with shear strength is set to 1.E–5 times the
material reference density.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 744 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RSTDROP
Remarks
1. All elements of the specified type are removed from the calculation. It is not possible to drop a
part of a Eulerian or Lagrangian mesh.
2. If Lagrangian solids or membranes are dropped from a coupled calculation, the surfaces should
also be dropped to prevent surfaces being present that are not attached to anything.
3. The EULER option only works for a Eulerian mesh containing a single hydrodynamic material.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 745 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SCALEMAS
Remarks
1. Numerical mass is added to all Lagrangian solid, triangular, quadrilateral, rod, bar and beam
elements such that its time step never becomes less than:
dt = STEPFCT*DTMIN.
where
dt = timestep of calculation
STEPFCT = timestep safety factor (see PARAM,STEPFCT)
DTMIN = value specified on the PARAM,SCALEMAS entry
If the added mass of a certain element exceeds the maximum percentage (MXPERC) of its
original mass, no more mass will be added, and subsequently, the time step may decrease again.
2. The value of STEPS determines the checking frequency against the mass scaling criterion; the
check is done for every defined number of STEPS. STEPS = 1 is recommended.
3. The values for DTMIN, MXPERC, and STEPS are required input.
4. By requesting MSMASS in an output request, the ratio of scaled mass to original mass of the
elements can be retrieved. By making fringe plots of this parameter, a check can be made if mass
has not been added in a critical area.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 746 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. See Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 8: Prestress Analysis and Example Input Data, Mass Scaling
Definition for instructions on how to use this entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 747 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHELLFORM
Remarks
1. The PARAM,SHELLFORM changes the default formulation for quadrilateral shell elements. All
shell properties entries that do not explicitly define the formulation, use the default as specified
on the PARAM entry.
2. Triangular shell elements have only one formulation (C0-TRIA). Therefore, the PARAM is
ignored for triangular elements.
3. For more information, see also Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive
Default Setting.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 748 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHELMSYS
Remarks
1. SIDE21 puts the x-axis along side21 of the element, whereas MIDSIDES puts the x-axis along
the vector connecting the midpoints of the side14 and side32.
2. Using the SIDE21 option for the BLT shell will result in the same Belytschko-Lin-Tsay
implementation as BELY.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 749 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHPLAST
Remarks
1. The RADIAL approach does not require iterations and, therefore, is the most efficient. It is,
however, an approximation.
2. The other two approaches iterate to find the solution. ITER is the best since it takes as many
iterations as are necessary. On vector machines, such as CRAY, this is inefficient since it cannot
be vectorized. VECT always performs three vectorized iterations, which is more efficient.
However, three iterations may not be enough, and inaccuracies could occur.
3. For more information, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive Default Setting.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 750 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHSTRDEF
Remark
The default setting can be overruled per property on a PCOMPAentry on the STRDEF field.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 751 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SHTHICK
Remarks
1. The YES option gives a true large-strain shell but requires some extra computation.
2. The NO option should give adequate results as long as the membrane strains are not very large
(i.e., not more than 5–10%).
3. This option applies to all the formulations of the shell elements, except for the PCOMP . The
thickness of PCOMP shell elements will always remain constant.
4. For more information, see Dytran User’s Guide, Chapter 5: Application Sensitive Default Setting.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 752 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SLELM
Remarks
1. This parameter applies only to shell elements.
2. The shell sublayer variables are primarily stored in sublayer arrays. They can be copied into the
element arrays only for specific output purposes.
3. Specifying NO reduces the CPU overhead time.
4. Irrespective of the entry on this parameter, sublayer variables are accessible in the sublayer arrays.
For example, requesting TXX1 retrieves the stress from the element array, whereas TXX01
retrieves it from the sublayer arrays.
5. MD Nastran initialization always causes SLELM = YES.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 753 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SNDLIM
Remarks
1. This parameter is used to avoid the possibility of division by zero in the time step calculation.
2. SNDLIM has the units of velocity.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 754 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SPHERSYM
Enables an efficient and accurate 1D spherical symmetric solution for Eulerian materials. A much larger
time step becomes possible by basing the time step only on the mesh-size in radial direction.
PARAM,SPHERSYM,RECT,X,2 PHI : 0
Remarks
1. Only available for Eulerian elements and does not support Lagrange elements. The effect of this
parameter is not limited to the solvers. Also Euler archives will reflect the modified Euler mesh
geometry.
2. The Euler mesh can already be symmetric but also a rectangular mesh comprising of one row of
elements can be used. Using the angle specified by PHI this Euler mesh is mapped into a 1D
spherical symmetric mesh.
3. The Euler mesh has to consist of one row of elements.
4. In the time step computation only the mesh-size in radial direction will be taken into account.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 755 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
STEPFCT
Remarks
1. The actual time step used in Dytran is the product of the internal time step and the time step
safety factor.
2. The default value works well in the majority of situations and gives an efficient solution while
maintaining a stable solution.
3. In a calculation with a coupling surface,FBLEND must be greater than or equal to STEPFCT to
avoid instabilities (see PARAM,FBLEND).
4. For many calculations, STEPFCT can be set to 0.9, unless you are running a problem that has
coupling surfaces defined.
5. A different parameter can be used to set the time step safety factor for Lagrangian elements (see
PARAM, STEPFCTL).
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 756 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
STEPFCTL
Remarks
1. For many calculations, STEPFCTL can be set to 0.9
2. PARAM,STEPFCT can be used to set the time step safety factor for all elements (see
PARAM,STEPFCT). The default for STEPFCT is 0.666
3. The actual time step used in Dytran is the product of the internal time step and the time-step
safety factor. If STEPFCTL is used, the Lagrangian elements will use this value for the safety
factor. The Eulerian elements will still use STEPFCT. The timestep used in Dytran is the
minimum value of the two products. To this end, an efficient solution, while also maintaining a
stable solution, is achieved.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 757 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
STRNOUT
Remarks
1. A limited output set saves memory.
2. Perfectly elastic materials only have the limited output set.
3. Total strain output for shell composite materials can be requested from the PCOMPA Bulk
Data entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 758 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TOLFAC
Remarks
1. This parameter is important for initialization of BPLANE contact. The faces of the contact surface
are enlarged with a value of TOLPR1. However, this might not be enough when the air bag is
offset folded. On the other hand, a large value of TOLPR1 might induce hooking. Therefore a new
parameter is introduced called TOLFAC. The value of TOLFAC scales the value of TOLPR1 only
at initialization, such that the contact is correctly found.
2. A correct value of TOLFAC can be up to 1000. or even higher.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 759 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
UGASC
Remarks
1. This entry must be used if the molar weight is used on an INFLGAS entry, or if molar gas fractions
are given on an IINFLFRAC entry.
2. Specify only one universal gas constant per problem.
3. In SI units, R equals 8.3145 J mol-1 K-1.
Using the tonne, mm, s system of units R has a value of 8314.5 tonne mm2 s-2 mol-1 K-1.
In imperial units, R equals 1.9859 Btu lbmol-1 ºR-1 or 1545.3 ft lbf lbmol-1 ºR-1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 760 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
VARACTIV
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 761 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
MEMTRIA Membrane
ELEM Element
FACE Face
varname Name of the variable C Required
datatype Data type of the variable: C FLT
INT Integer
FLT Float
CHAR Character
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 762 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. The ALL entry activates all variables for all elements, regardless of whether they are used or not.
The ALLPRINT prints a summary of all element variables, regardless whether there are any
elements of a certain type or not. If ALL or ALLPRINT is entered, then no subsequent entries
are required.
2. All entries are required if ALL or ALLPRINT are not specified, except for newname, which
defaults to the original name.
3. When a variable is renamed, all subsequent references must be made to the new name; e.g., in
output requests.
4. The deactivate option is potentially dangerous, since some options may require the variable in an
indirect way. It is advised, therefore, not to deactivate standard Dytran variables.
5. This PARAM entry is a convenient way to introduce new variables to an entity, which can be used
in user subroutines. The new variables is written to restart files and can be requested for output.
6. See the EEXOUT e subroutine as an example of how to address a newly created variable.
7. In the print file of an Dytran run, a summary is given for all variables of the element types that are
used in the calculation (except when ALLPRINT was specified). The format of the printout is:
###-(CHAR)-NAME
where
### = the variable ident number when the variable is active. If the variable has been
deactivated, ### is printed as <~>
CHAR = N if the variable is standard Dytran
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 763 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
VDAMP
Remarks
1. The dynamic relaxation parameter is connected to the system natural frequency, ω , as β = ε ωΔ t ,
where ε denotes a percentage of critical damping. The damping occurs by factoring the velocities
every time step as follows:
F1 = ( 1 – β ) ⁄ ( 1 + β )
F2 = 1 ⁄ ( 1 + β )
n+1⁄2 n–1⁄2 n n
v = F1 v + F2 a Δ t
where v is the velocity, a is the acceleration, and β is the dynamic relaxation parameter.
2. At the restart of an analysis with dynamic relaxation, the dynamic relaxation can be switched off
by PARAM,VDAMP or PARAM,VDAMP,OFF.
3. For a more comprehensive description of dynamic relaxation, see Dytran Theory Manual,
Chapter 4: Models, Dynamic Relaxation.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 764 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
VELCUT
Velocity Cutoff
Defines the minimum velocity.
Remark
Any velocity less than VELCUT is set to zero. It is mainly used to eliminate harmless but annoying small
values of velocity caused by round-off error and numerical dispersion.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 765 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
VELMAX
Maximum Velocity
Defines the maximum velocity in Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes.
Remarks
1. Although it is not usually necessary to limit the velocity in Eulerian meshes, there are occasions,
in regions of near-vacuous flow for example, where specifying a maximum velocity can be
advantageous. The same applies to Lagrangian meshes, in contact regions for example. This
parameter should be used with care.
2. Because very high velocities occur mostly in Eulerian elements with very small mass, the mass
in these elements can be removed to keep the analysis stable. This option is not available for
Lagrangian solid elements.
3. VELMAX must be greater than the minimum velocity specified by PARAM,VELCUT.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 766 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
VISCOPLAS
Remarks
1. The strain rate dependent plasticity is normally calculated by scaling up the basic yield stress
without strain rate effect. Then the trial stresses are mapped back to the scaled-up yield surface.
This algorithm may lead to premature instability. Another technique is to calculate the so-called
viscous-plastic strain rate using “overstress” formula. And then the stresses are updated based on
this viscous-plastic strain. This technique seems to be more stable then the previous one. For shell
elements, this option works when combined with PARAM,SHPLAST,RADIAL. Only
DYMAT24 and Johnson-Cook models are supported. For solid elements, this option works only
for DYMAT24.
2. For shell elements, PARAM,VISCOPLAS,1, in combination with
PARAM,SHPLAST,RADIAL, will use consistent plane stress plasticity algorithm both for
strain rate dependent and independent plasticity. This new algorithm is more accurate than
3-D approach.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 767 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
7 User Subroutines
J
EEXOUT 773
J
EXALE 777
J EXBRK 780
J
EXCOMP 783
J
EXELAS 790
J EXEOS 793
J
EXEOS1 798
J
EXFAIL 802
J EXFAIL1 804
J
EXFAIL2 808
J
EXFLOW 811
J EXFLOW2 814
J
EXFUNC 818
J
EXINIT 820
J EXPBAG 823
J
EXPLD 825
J
EXPOR 826
J EXPOR2 832
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 768 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
J EXSHR 836
J
EXSPR 839
J
EXTLU 842
J EXTVEL 844
J
EXVISC 846
J EXYLD 849
J
EXYLD1 852
J
GEXOUT 857
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 769 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
User-written subroutines are a powerful feature in Dytran that allow you to customize the program to
your particular needs and provide capabilities that are not possible with the standard program.
The following user subroutines may be used:
The user-written subroutines are very simple to use. Some knowledge of Fortran programming is
required to write the subroutine, but the incorporation of the routines into Dytran is automatic on most
computers. Any Dytran user with a working knowledge of Fortran should not have problems using this
facility. Dytran uses a Fortran 90 compiler and there is no guarantee that another Fortran complier version
will link properly.
Care should be exercised when using user-written subroutines, however. It is possible to corrupt the data
stored within Dytran, rendering the results meaningless. User subroutines should be used only if you are
experienced in the use of Dytran and fully understand the implications of what you are doing.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 770 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 771 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 772 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. You can define your own common block definition to store data that you wish to keep over the
time step.
4. You can define your own variables to be used by Dytran by the PARAM,VARACTIV entry. Please
refer to the Parameter section in the Reference Manual for details on how to add your own
variables. You can store data that is important for your user subroutine. When you add new
variables to the default set that Dytran offers, you can also add them to the output request and post-
process the results.
5. Do not mix integer and float data. Although it is allowed as standard Fortran, it is best to separate
the data types.
6. Do not perform I/O-actions (like with READ, WRITE or PRINT statements) in a loop. It
considerably slows down the performance of the loop.
7. Do not make calls to other subroutines from within a loop if possible. This considerably slows
down the performance of the loop.
8. Use the appropriate precision for your calculations. Dytran is full double precision. When you use
the include file spdbl in your subroutine, the precision is set correctly for the machine that you
are using Dytran on. The include file is part of the installation and the compiler script “knows”
where to look for the include files.
9. Be careful with fixed-size arrays. These arrays are statically allocated when the program starts.
The memory is occupied during the course of your calculation. Note that integer data uses 32 bits
per word, float data 64 bits in double precision. Thus, an array of 1,000,000 float words requires
8 MB of memory.
10. Document your user subroutine with comments. It makes it easier for others, including yourself,
to understand the meaning of the content of the subroutine.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 773 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EEXOUT
Calling Sequence
CALL EEXOUT (NAME, LENNAM, NEL, CEL, NETYPE, LIEL, LXEL)
Input
NAME Character string. Output name specified on the ELEXOUT entry.
LENNAM Integer variable. Length of NAME.
NEL (*) Integer array. Element number.
CEL (*) Character *8 array. Unused.
NETYPE Integer variable. Type of element:
2 One-dimensional element
3 Triangular shell
4 Quadrilateral shell
5 Triangular membrane
6 Dummy triangle
7 Dummy quadrilateral
8 Lagrangian solid
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 774 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any ELEXOUT Case Control commands.
2. The subroutine can be used to calculate results based on the data available in Dytran.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
4. This subroutine is vectorized. All the input data is stored in arrays that must be dimensioned. The
start and end of the arrays are given by the variables LST and LFIN in the common block
/MSCD_LOCLOP/. All of the entries in the arrays between LST and LFIN must be output. See
the following examples.
Example 1
This example calculates the magnitude of the velocity in Eulerian elements and stores the result in the
user variable EXUSER2.
SUBROUTINE EEXOUT
+(NAME, LENNAM, NEL, CEL, NETYPE, LIEL, LXEL)
*
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H, O-Z)
*
DIMENSION NEL (*), LIEL (*), LXEL (*)
CHARACTER *(*) CEL (*), NAME
*
COMMON/MSCD_LOCLOP/LST, LFIN
COMMON/MSCD_ILGMEM/IDUM1,IDUM2,IDUM3,IDUM4,ILGDAT(1)
COMMON/MSCD_XLGMEM/XLGDAT(1)
*
IF (NETYPE.NE.9) GOTO 9900
*
*The magnitude of the velocity of the Eulerian elements is computed
*and stored in the user variable EXUSER2
*
DO 100 NZ = LST, LFIN
XVEL = XLGDAT (LXEL (NZ)+1)
YVEL = XLGDAT (LXEL (NZ)+2)
ZVEL = XLGDAT (LXEL (NZ)+3)
VEL = XVEL*XVEL + YVEL*YVEL + ZVEL*ZVEL
XLGDAT (LXEL (NZ) + 25) = SQRT (VEL)
*
100 CONTINUE
*
9900 RETURN
END
Example 2
This example shows how the shell element sublayer data can be retrieved from memory to organize
user-defined editing. The example applies to any shell element either defined by a PSHELLn or
PCOMPn entry.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 775 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
SUBROUTINE EEXOUT
+(EDTNAM,LENNAM,NZONE,CZONE,NZTYPE,LBIZON,LBXZON)
*
* single or double defined below
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
DIMENSION NZONE(*),LBIZON(*),LBXZON(*)
CHARACTER*(*) EDTNAM
CHARACTER*(*) CZONE(*)
*
COMMON /MSCD_LOCLOP/ LST,LFIN
COMMON /MSCD_NCYVAR/ IDUM1,NCYCLE
COMMON /MSCD_XCYVAR/ RDUM1,RDUM2 ,RDUM3,RDUM4,RDUM5,TIME
*
CHARACTER*16 CVAR
DIMENSION CVAR(6)
*
DIMENSION XVAR(1024)
DIMENSION DATA(5,1024,6)
*
LOGICAL LHERE
*
DATA LHERE /.TRUE./
*
* Define the sublayer output here by variable name
*
CVAR(1) = ’TXX’
CVAR(2) = ’TYY’
CVAR(3) = ’TXY’
CVAR(4) = ’FAIL’
CVAR(5) = ’EXY’
CVAR(6) = ’MXTFI’
*
****************************************************************
******
* Make a loop over the sublayers, variables
* The routine will retrieve the variable from the designated
* sublayer for the entire string of elements in one call
* The data array will contain all requested data after the
* loops over the sublayers and the variables requested
****************************************************************
******
*
* Loop over the sublayers
*
DO 300 ISUB = 1,5
*
* Loop over the variables
*
DO 200 NVAR = 1,6
*
* Call a predefined user routine
*
CALL GET_ELEMENT_SUBL_VARS
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 776 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
+ (NZONE,XVAR,CVAR(NVAR),ISUB)
*
* Arguments: element list, float data list, variable name list,
* and sublayer number
*
* Make a loop over the elements in the edit list
*
DO 100 NZ = LST,LFIN
*
* Store all data for the list in the data array
*
DATA(ISUB,NZ,NVAR) = XVAR(NZ)
*
100 CONTINUE
200 CONTINUE
300 CONTINUE
*
* If we come here for the first time write the header
*
IF (LHERE) THEN
OPEN(UNIT=90,FILE=’SUBLAYERS’,STATUS=’UNKNOWN’)
WRITE(90,’(9A)’,IOSTAT=IOS)
+ ’ Time ’,
+ ’ Element ’,
+ ’ Sublayer ’,
+ ’ Txx ’,
+ ’ Tyy ’,
+ ’ Txy ’,
+ ’ Fail ’,
+ ’ Exy ’,
+ ’ Mxtfi ’
*
* And a dummy line
*
WRITE(90,’(A)’) ’ ’
LHERE = .FALSE.
ENDIF
*
* Write it all to a file
*
DO 400 ISUB=1,5
DO 500 NZ=LST,LFIN
NZON = NZONE(NZ)
WRITE(90,’(E15.8,2I15,6E15.8)’,IOSTAT=IOS)
+ TIME,NZON,ISUB,(DATA(ISUB,NZ,NVAR),NVAR=1,6)
500 CONTINUE
400 CONTINUE
*
9900 CONTINUE
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 777 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXALE
Calling Sequence
CALL EXALE (CNAME, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, ISTART, IEND,
Input
CNAME Character string
Name specified on the ALEGRID entry
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of CNAME
TIME Real variable
Time at the current time step
NCYCLE Integer variable
Number of the current time step
ISTART, IEND Integer variables
Grid-point loop counters
IUSER(*) Integer array
Grid-point numbers
XPOS(*), Real arrays
YPOS(*), Grid-point coordinates in basic coordinate system
ZPOS(*)
XVG(*), Real arrays
YVG(*), Grid-point velocity components during last time step
ZVG(*)
Output
XVG(*), Real arrays
YZG(*), Grid-point velocity components for current time step
ZVG(*)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 778 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any ALEGRID entries with the TYPE set to USER.
2. The subroutine is used to calculate the grid-point motion in an ALE calculation according to a
user-specified prescription.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
4. This routine is part of a vectorized process. As a result, the routine can be called more than once
per time step.
Example
SUBROUTINE EXALE( CNAME,LENNAM,TIME,NCYCLE,ISTART,IEND,
+ IUSER,XPOS,YPOS,ZPOS,XVG,YVG,ZVG )
*
* single or double defined below
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
* declare argument as arrays and data-type here....
CHARACTER*(*) CNAME
*
* -----------------------------------------------------------------
*
* cname = name of the exale definition
* lennam = length of the character string
* time = current problem time
* ncycle = current time step number
* istart = start of the grid point loop
* iend = end of the grid point loop
* iuser = array with grid point user numbers
* xpos = x-position of the list of grid points
* ypos = y-position of the list of grid points
* zpos = z-position of the list of grid points
* xvg = x-velocity of the list of grid points
* yvg = y-velocity of the list of grid points
* zvg = z-velocity of the list of grid points
*
* ----------------------------------------------------------
-------
*
*
* local dimensions and declarations
*
DIMENSION IUSER(*)
DIMENSION XPOS(*),YPOS(*),ZPOS(*)
DIMENSION XVG(*) ,YVG(*) ,ZVG(*)
*
* data statements
*
* statement functions
*
* executable statements
*
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 779 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
FACTOR = 1.51
X = 18.02775637
*
* compute cosine and sine for this cycle
RXCOS = X*COS(FACTOR*TIME)
RXSIN = X*SIN(FACTOR*TIME)
*
* jump to the motion prescription according to the name
IF (CNAME(1:LENNAM) .EQ. ’EXALE1’) GOTO 1000
IF (CNAME(1:LENNAM) .EQ. ’EXALE2’) GOTO 2000
*
1000 CONTINUE
DO 100 NP = ISTART,IEND
XVG(NP) = RXCOS*RXSIN
YVG(NP) = 0.0
ZVG(NP) = RXSIN
100 CONTINUE
*
GOTO 9900
*
2000 CONTINUE
DO 200 NP = ISTART,IEND
XVG(NP) = RXCOS
YVG(NP) = 0.0
ZVG(NP) = RXSIN*RXCOS
200 CONTINUE
*
9900 CONTINUE
*
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 780 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXBRK
Calling Sequence
CALL: EXBRK(TIME, ICYCLE,NMSETS,ILIST,IFAIL,CSETNM,
+FX1,FY1,FZ1,FX2,FY2,FZ2,
+XM1,YM1,ZM1,XM2,YM2,ZM2,
+FAIL1,FAIL2,FAIL3,FAIL4,FAIL5,FAIL6,
+ICONN1,ICONN2)
Input
TIME Real Variable. Current time in computation.
ICYCLE Integer variable. Current time-step number.
NMSETS Integer variable. Number of “bjoin” pairs in the current user-defined string.
ILIST Integer array. Contains the set numbers of the “bjoin” pairs in the string.
CSETNM Character array. Contains the name of the user-defined criterion for the
“bjoin” pair.
FX1,FY1,FZ1 Real arrays. Contain the force components of the first grid point of the
“bjoin” pairs.
FX2,FY2,FZ2 Real arrays. Contain the force components of the second grid point of the
“bjoin” pairs.
XM1,YM1,ZM1 Real arrays. Contain the moment components of the first grid point of the
“bjoin” pairs.
XM2,YM2,ZM2 Real arrays.Contain the moment components of the second grid point of the
“bjoin” pairs.
ICONN1,ICONN2 Integer arrays. Contain connectivity data for the first and the second grid point
of the “bjoin” pairs. Data concerns the grid point user number, the number of
connected elements, and the connected element user numbers.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 781 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
IFAIL Integer array. Global failure flag for the “bjoin” pairs.
FAIL1-FAIL6 Real arrays. Contain the component failure flags for the “bjoin” pairs. The
data is used for degradation of the join. Forces and moments are multiplied by
these values.
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any references to the EXBRK in the input data file.
2. The subroutine is called every time step. The forces and moment on the grid points of the “bjoin”
pairs are passed to the subroutine. You must return the global failure flag and the component
failure switches. Dytran uses them upon return from the subroutine.
3. There can be more than one failure criterion defined in the EXBRK subroutine. The criteria can be
distinguished by their user-defined names.
Example
This subroutine defines a failure criterion on the force x-components.
SUBROUTINE EXBRK
+ (TIME,ICYCLE,NMSETS,ILIST,IFAIL,CSETNM,
+ FX1,FY1,FZ1,FX2,FY2,FZ2,
+ XM1,YM1,ZM1,XM2,YM2,ZM2,
+ ICONN1,ICONN2 )
*
#include "spdbl"
*
DIMENSION ILIST(*),IFAIL(*)
DIMENSION ICONN1(8,*),ICONN2(8,*)
DIMENSION FX1(*),FY1(*),FZ1(*)
DIMENSION FX2(*),FY2(*),FZ2(*)
DIMENSION XM1(*),YM1(*),ZM1(*)
DIMENSION XM2(*),YM2(*),ZM2(*)
DIMENSION FAIL1(*),FAIL2(*),FAIL3(*)
DIMENSION FAIL4(*),FAIL5(*),FAIL6(*)
CHARACTER*8 CSETNM(*)
*
FMAX = 12000.0 ** 2
DO 100 N=1,NMSETS
NPAIR = ILIST(N)
IF (IFAIL(NPAIR).EQ.0) GOTO 100
DFX = (FX1(NPAIR)-FX2(NPAIR))**2
IF (CSETNM(N).EQ.’CRIT_1’) THEN
IFAIL(NPAIR) = 0
WRITE(6,*)
+ ‘Grid point pair (Point 1 =’,ICONN1(1,N),
+ ‘Point 2 = ‘,ICONN2(1,N),’) Failure.’
ENDIF
CONTINUE
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 782 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 783 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXCOMP
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXCOMP (CNAME, YMX, YMY, XNUY, SXY, SYZ, SZX,
Input
CNAME Character string. Material name.
YMX Real variable. Young’s modulus in fiber direction.
YMY Young’s modulus in matrix direction
XNUY Poisson’s ratio v yx
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 784 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
New Stresses
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 785 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if USER is specified on the FT field on the MAT8A Bulk
Data Entry.
2. The subroutine returns the stress tensor and failure flags.
3. Failure flags FAIL and FAIL2 are used by Dytran to zero out the hourglass forces and to enforce
time step skipping for “1D elements” (if requested).
4. The total strains are supplied only if requested on the PCOMPA entry. Do not use the total strains
when they are turned off.
5. Additional sublayer variables are only available when requested on the PCOMPA entry. The
pointers LBUSER are set to a large value if the variables are not defined.
6. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
7. If IPREC = 1, the Dytran object library is single precision; if IPREC = 2, it is double precision.
8. If your input refers to EXCOMP on a MAT8A entry and the material number (MID) is set to
99999999, the demo example will run.
9. EXCOMP does not necessarily need to define a composite material. Any material model can be
programmed. EXCOMP is used for each sublayer on the PCOMPA Bulk Data entry that refers to it.
10. In XMAT, extra material data from the MAT8A option is available.
PFD = nint( MATE(32 ):1 = STEPS
2 = TIME
3 = VELOC
VALUE = XMAT(33)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 786 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
This subroutine swaps the stresses into the user variables:
SUBROUTINE EXCOMP
+ ( CNAME , YMX , YMY , XNUY , SXY , SYZ , SZX ,
+ FBTEN , FBCOM , XMXTEN , XMXCOM , SHRF ,
+ CAPA , XMAT , TIME , NSTEP , IPREC ,
+ LAST , NADVAR , ISUBLY , LBUSER ,DLTH ,
+ SIG1 , SIG2 , SIG4 , SIG5 , SIG6 ,
+ D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D5 , D6 ,
+ DOUT1 , DOUT2 , DOUT4 , EFAIL ,
+ EFT , EFC , ESF , EMT,EMC, Q1, Q2 ,
+ FAIL , FAIL2 , USRVAR )
*
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
CHARACTER*(*) CNAME
DIMENSION LBUSER(*)
DIMENSION
+ SIG1(*) , SIG2 (*), SIG4 (*),
+ SIG5 (*), SIG6 (*),
+ D1(*) , D2(*) , D3(*) ,
+ D4(*) , D5(*) , D6(*) ,
+ DOUT1(*) , DOUT2(*) , DOUT4(*) , EFAIL(*) ,
+ EFT(*) , EFC(*) , ESF(*) ,
+ EMT(*),EMC(*), Q1(*), Q2(*) ,
+ FAIL(*) , FAIL2(*) , USRVAR(*)
*
* input:
* cname - material name (character)
* ymx - youngs modulus in fiber dir
* ymy - youngs modulus in matrix dir
* xnuy - poisson ration nuyx
* sxy - inplane shear modulus
* syz - transverse shear modulus
* szx - transverse shear modulus
* fbten - fiber tensile strength
* fbcom - fiber compressive strength
* xmxten - matrix tensile strength
* xmxcom - matrix compressive strength
* shrf - shear strength
* capa - shear correction factor
* xmat - extra material data
* time - current problem time
* nstep - step number
* iprec - singel/double precision check
* 1 - library is single precision
* 2 - library is double precision
* last - length of element string
* nadvar - number of additional vars
* ( see mat8a bulk data )
* isubly - sublayer number
* lbuser - list of pointer into usrvar
* dlth - time step
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 787 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 788 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
*
* this demo only works if cname = 99999999 , set on the mat8a
* bulk data entry
IF ( CNAME.NE.’99999999’ ) THEN
CALL SYS_PRINT (’USER SUPPLIED EXCOMP IS MISSING ....’)
ENDIF
*
* checks done only at first step
*
* make sure we have the strain output on and 6
* defined user variables
IF ( INIT.EQ.NSTEP ) THEN
*
* check is for a single precision library . if double
* precision then check against 2
IF ( IPREC.NE.IDEFPR ) THEN
CALL SYS_PRINT (’PRECISION IS WRONG IN EXCOMP ’)
STOP
ENDIF
*
IF ( NADVAR.LT.6 ) THEN
CALL SYS_PRINT(’FOR THIS EXCOMP DEMO TO RUN YOU MUST DEFINE ’)
CALL SYS_PRINT(’AT LEAST 6 SUBLAYER USER VARIABELS ON THE ’)
CALL SYS_PRINT(’MAT8A BULK DATA ENTRY FOR MATERIAL ’)
CALL SYS_PRINT( CNAME )
STOP
ENDIF
*
CALL SYS_PRINT(’YOU ARE USING THE DEMO EXCOMP ’)
CALL SYS_PRINT(’RATHER THAN YOUR OWN VERSION’)
CALL SYS_PRINT(’RELINK MSC.Dytran WITH YOUR EXCOMP CODING ’)
*
DO 100 NV = 1,3
DO 110 LV = 1,LAST
USRVAR(LBUSER(NV) + LV) = -1.E20
110 CONTINUE
100 CONTINUE
*
DO 200 NV = 4,6
DO 210 LV = 1,LAST
USRVAR(LBUSER(NV) + LV) = 1.E20
210 CONTINUE
200 CONTINUE
*
* see if strain output is on
IF ( DOUT1(1) .EQ. 123456789. ) THEN
CALL SYS_PRINT(’FOR THIS EXCOMP DEMO TO RUN YOU MUST DEFINE ’)
CALL SYS_PRINT(’STRAIN OUTPUT OPTION ON ON THE ’)
CALL SYS_PRINT(’PCOMPA BULK DATA ENTRY WHICH HOLDS MATERIAL ’)
CALL SYS_PRINT (CNAME)
STOP
ENDIF
ENDIF
*
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 789 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 790 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXELAS
Calling Sequence
CALL EXELAS (N, M, IX, IC, PROP, HISV, FORCEO, C, DI,
Input
N Integer variable
Element number
M Integer variable
Property number
IX(2) Integer array
Connectivity:IX(1) = grid point at end 1
IC(2) Integer array.
Component:IC(1) = component at end 1 (between 1 and 6)
IC(2) = component at end 2 (between 1 and 6)
PROP(7) Real array
Properties as input on the PELASEX entry
HISV(6) Real array
History variables for the element. This array can be used by the user to store
variables from one time step to the next.
FORCEO Real variable
Force in the element at the previous time step
C(3,2) Real array
Deformed coordinates in the basic coordinate system:
C(1:3,1) x, y, z, coordinates at end 1
C(1:3,2) x, y, z, coordinates at end 2
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 791 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
These are incremental displacements, i.e., the displacements for this time step only.
V(6,2) Real array
Velocities in the basic coordinate system
V(1:3,1) = x, y, z, translational velocities of end 1
V(4:6,1) = x, y, z, rotational velocities of end 1
V(1:3,2) = x, y, z, translational velocities of end 2
V(4:6,2) = x, y, z, rotational velocities of end 2
A(6,2) Real array
Accelerations in the basic coordinate system
A(1:3,1) = x, y, z translational accelerations of end 1
A(4:6,1) = x, y, z rotational accelerations of end 1
A(1:3,2) = x, y, z, translational accelerations of end 2
A(4:6,2) = x, y, z, rotational accelerations of end 2
UREL Real variable
Relative displacement of the element; i.e., the displacement of end 2 in the spring
direction minus the displacement of end 1
DUREL Real variable
Relative incremental displacement of the element VREL real variable
VREL Real variable
Relative velocity of the end points of the element in the direction of the element
XMASS(2) Real array
Mass of the grid points at ends 1 and 2
Output
FORCE Real variable
Force in the element
STIFF Real variable
Current stiffness of the element
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if the PELASEX entry is specified in the Bulk Data Section.
2. The velocities (V) and accelerations (A) of the end points can be updated by the user subroutine
when required.
3. The stiffness is used by Dytran to estimate the time step. A nonzero value must be returned.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 792 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
This example defines a stiffness and a corresponding force for a spring element.
SUBROUTINE EXELAS
+(N,M,IX,IC,PROP,HISV,FORCEO,C,DI,V,A,UREL,DUREL,
+VREL,XMASS,FORCE,STIFF)
*
* single or double defined below
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECSION (A-H,O-Z)
*
* declare argument as arrays and data-type here....
DIMENSION IX(2),IC(2),PROP(7),HISV(6),C(3,2),
+DI(6,2),V(6,2),A(6,2),XMASS(2)
*
* define the stiffness and the force on the spring
STIFF = 1.E3
FORCE = STIFF * DUREL
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 793 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXEOS
Calling Sequence
CALL :EXEOS (CNAME, LENNAM, ISTART, IEND, RHO, DV,
Input
CNAME Character string
Name specified on the EOSEX entry
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of CNAME
ISTART, IEND Integer variables
Grid-point loop counters
RHO(*) Real array
Density of element
DV(*) Real array
Change in volume of element
DEVIS(*) Real array
Viscous work term of element
XMASS(*) Real array
Mass of element
FBURN(*) Real array
Burn fraction of element (not for Lagrangian elements)
POLD(*) Real array
Old pressure of element
SIEOLD(*) Real array
Old specific internal energy of element
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 794 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
PNEW(*) Real array
New pressure of element
SIENEW(*) Real array
New specific internal energy of element
CLNEW(*) Real array
New sound speed of element
GRUNGM(*) Real array
Gruneisen gamma of element (only for multi-material elements)
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any EOSEX entries.
2. The subroutine is used to calculate the pressure PNEW for Lagrangian and/or Eulerian elements
according to a user-specified description. In most cases the equation of state is energy dependent,
the new pressure must be solved therefore simultaneously with the energy equation:
SIENEW = SIEOLD + DEVIS – --- ⎛ ( POLD + PNEW ) --------------------⎞
1 DV
2⎝ XMASS⎠
PNEW = f ( RHO,SIENEW )
where S denotes that the adiabatic derivative is required, Σ l is the longitudinal stress, ρ is the
density, p is the pressure, G is the shear modulus, ρ 0 is the reference density and η = ρ ⁄ ρ 0 . Care
must be used in defining this quantity, because an error can cause an instability in the calculation.
The Gruneisen gamma GRUNGM must be computed for multi-material elements and can be
calculated as follows:
ρ
p = A ⋅ f ⎛ -----⎞ + B ⋅ f ( ρ, e )
⎝ ρ 0⎠
where B is the Gruneisen gamma.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Execution Guide.
4. This routine is part of a vectorized process. As a result, the routine can be called more than once
per time step.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 795 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
This example calculates the equation of states of an explosive in water using multi-material
Eulerian elements.
SUBROUTINE EXEOS(CNAME,LENNAM,ISTART,IEND,RHO,DV,DEVIS,XMASS,
+ FBURN,POLD,SIEOLD,PNEW,SIENEW,CLNEW,GRUNGM)
*
* single or double defined below
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
* declare argument as arrays and data-type here....
CHARACTER*(*) CNAME
*
* ----------------------------------------------------------
*
* input:
* cname = name of the exale definition
* lennam = length of the character string
* istart = start of the grid point loop
* iend = end of the grid point loop
* rho = density
* dv = change in volume
* devis = viscous work term
* xmass = mass
* fburn = burn fraction (not used for Lagrangian elements)
* pold = old pressure
* sieold = old specific internal energy
*
* output:
* pnew = new pressure
* sienew = new specific internal energy
* clnew = new soundspeed
* grungm = Gruneisen gamma
*
* ----------------------------------------------------------
*
* local dimensions and declarations
*
DIMENSION RHO(*),DV(*),DEVIS(*)
DIMENSION XMASS(*),FBURN(*),POLD(*),SIEOLD(*)
DIMENSION PNEW(*),SIENEW(*),CLNEW(*),GRUNGM(*)
*
ZERO = 0.0
ONE = 1.0
HALF = 0.5
*
* first water
IF (CNAME(1:LENNAM) .NE. 'WATER') GOTO 1000
*
* variables
E = 2.2E9
RHOREF = 1000.
HVLM = 1.0/1.1 - 1.0
SSPD = SQRT(E/RHOREF)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 796 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 797 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
TERM3 = MAX(SMALL,ONE+HALF*BB*DVOVH/ETA)
TERM4 = SIEOLD(NZ) + DEVIS(NZ) -
+ HALF*(POLD(NZ)+AA)*DVOVH/RHO(NZ)
*
* calculation of new pressure, specific internal energy
* and speed of sound
SIENEW(NZ) = TERM4/TERM3
PNEW(NZ) = AA + RHOREF*MAX(ZERO,SIENEW(NZ)*BB)
SSPD = CC/RHOREF + SIENEW(NZ)*DD +
+ PNEW(NZ)*BB*RHOREF/RHO(NZ)/RHO(NZ)
SSPD = MAX(DMIN6,SSPD)
CLNEW(NZ) = SQRT(SSPD)
*
* in this case the gruneisen gamma should be calculated
GRUNGM(NZ) = BB*RHOREF/RHO(NZ)
200 CONTINUE
*
9900 CONTINUE
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 798 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXEOS1
Calculates the equation of state for Lagrangian and Eulerian solid elements. The pressure can depend on
a damage variable and the SOFTE and VOLPLS variables. These last two variables can be set in for
example an EXFAIL2 routine or in an EXYLD1 routine.
Calling Sequence
CALL: EXEOS1 (CNAME, LENNAM, ISTART, IEND, RHO, DV,+DEVIS, XMASS,
FBURN, POLD, SIEOLD, PNEW, SIENEW, CLNEW, GRUNGM, + DAM,SOFTE,VOLPLS)
Input
CNAME Character string
Name specified on the EOSEX entry
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of CNAME
ISTART, IEND Integer variables
Grid-point loop counters
RHO(*) Real array
Density of element
DV(*) Real array
Change in volume of element
DEVIS(*) Real array
Viscous work term of element
XMASS(*) Real array
Mass of element
FBURN(*) Real array
Burn fraction of element (not for Lagrangian elements)
POLD(*) Real array
Old pressure of element
SIEOLD(*) Real array
Old specific internal energy of element
DAM(*) Real array
Damage of the element
SOFTE(*), VOLPLS(*) Arrays that allow the user to store an additional variable. Contents are
transported and clumped. These arrays can also be accessed within
exfail2 and exyld1.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 799 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
PNEW(*) Real array
New pressure of element
SIENEW(*) Real array
New specific internal energy of element
CLNEW(*) Real array
New soundspeed of element
GRUNGM(*) Real array
Gruneisen gamma of element (only for multi-material elements)
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any EOSEX entries.
2. The subroutine is used to calculate the pressure PNEW for Lagrangian and/or Eulerian elements
according to a user-specified prescription. In most cases, the equation of state is energy
dependent;therefore, the new pressure must be solved simultaneously with the energy equation:
1 DV
S IE NE W = S IE OLD + DE V IS – --- ( P O L D + P N E W ) --------------------
2 X MA SS
P N EW = f ( R HO, SI EN E W )
where S denotes that the adiabatic derivative is required, ∑ is the longitudinal stress, ρ is the
l
density, p is the pressure, G is the shear modulus, ρ 0 is the reference density and η = ρ ⁄ ρ 0 . Care
must be used in defining this quantity because an error can cause an instability in the calculation.
The Gruneisen gamma GRUNGM must be computed for multi-material elements and can be
calculated as follows:
ρ
p = A ⋅ f ⎛ -----⎞ + B ⋅ f ( ρ ,e )
⎝ ρ 0⎠
where B is the Gruneisen gamma.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Execution Guide.
4. This routine is part of a vectorized process. As a result, the routine can be called more than once
per time step.
Example
SUBROUTINE EXEOS1(CNAME,LENNAM,ISTART,IEND,RHO,DV,DEVIS,XMASS,
+ FBURN,POLD,SIEOLD,PNEW,SIENEW,CLNEW,GRUNGM,DAM,
+ SOFTE, VLPL )
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 800 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
*
* single or double defined below
#include “spdbl”
*
* declare argument as arrays and data-type here....
CHARACTER*(*) CNAME
*
* ---------------------------------------------------------------
*
* input:
* cname = name of the exale definition
* lennam = length of the character string
* istart = start of the grid point loop
* iend = end of the grid point loop
* rho = density
* dv = change in volume
* devis = viscous work term
* xmass = mass
* fburn = burn fraction (not used for Lagrangian elements)
* pold = old pressure
* sieold = old specific internal energy
*
* output:
* pnew = new pressure
* sienew = new specific internal energy
* clnew = new soundspeed
* grungm = Gruneisen gamma
*
* ---------------------------------------------------------------
*
* local dimensions and declarations
*
DIMENSION RHO(*),DV(*),DEVIS(*)
DIMENSION XMASS(*),FBURN(*),POLD(*),SIEOLD(*)
DIMENSION PNEW(*),SIENEW(*),CLNEW(*),GRUNGM(*),DAM(*)
DIMENSION SOFTE(*),VLPL(*)
*
ZERO = 0.0
ONE = 1.0
HALF = 0.5
*
* first water
IF (CNAME(1:LENNAM) .NE. 'WATER') GOTO 1000
*
* variables
E = 2.2E9
RHOREF = 1000.
HVLM = 1.0/1.1 - 1.0
SSPD = SQRT(E/RHOREF)
*
* the simple bulk equation of state
DO 100 NZ = ISTART, IEND
TMU = (RHO(NZ)-RHOREF)/RHOREF
AMU = MAX(TMU,HVLM)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 801 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 802 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXFAIL
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXFAIL(MATNAM,LENNAM,LST,LFIN,EPLAS,EFFSTS,PRES,EDIS,
RHO,FFAIL,IZONE)
Input
MATNAM Character variable
Material number
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of MATNAM
LST,LFIN Integer array
First and last number of the loop over the elements in the list
EPLAS Real array
Plastic strain of an element
EFFSTS Real array
Effective stress of an element
PRES Real array
Pressure of an element
EDIS Real array
Distortional energy of an element
RHO Real array
Density of an element
IZONE Integer array
List of element user-number, see Remark 4.
Output
FFAIL Real array
Failure flag of an element:
FFAIL = 0 Element failed
FFAIL = 1 Element not failed
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be included if there are any FAILEX entries in the input.
2. The pressure array is only used for Eulerian material with strength.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 803 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
4. The IZONE array is only filled for Lagrange Solid Element
Example
In this example, the material fails when the maximum plastic strain exceeds 50%. The routine returns the
FFAIL flag to the code (FFAIL = 1 no failure and FFAIL = 0 failure).
SUBROUTINE EXFAIL
+(MATNAM,LENNAM,LST,LFIN,EPLAS,EFFSTS,PRES,SIE,RHO,
FFAIL,IZONE)
C
#include “spdbl”
C
DIMENSION EPLAS(*),EFFSTS(*),PRES(*),SIE(*),RHO(*),FFAIL (*)
C
CHARACTER*80 MATNAM
C
C Example of failure if the maximum plastic strain exceeds 50%
C
DO 100 NZ = LST, LFIN
IF (EPLAS (NZ) . GT. 0.5) THEN
FFAIL (NZ) = 0.
ELSE
FFAIL (NZ) = 1.
ENDIF
100 CONTINUE
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 804 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXFAIL1
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXFAIL1 (MATNAM,LENNAM,LST,LFIN,IZONE,TXX,TYY,TZZ,TXY,
+TYZ,TXZ,DEPSXX,DEPSYY,DEPSZZ,DEPSXY,DEPSYZ,DEPSXZ,
+EXX,EYY,EZZ,EXY,EYZ,EXZ,GXY,GYZ,GZX,
+USRVR1,USRVR2,TSTEP,FFAIL)
Input
MATNAM Character variable
Material number
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of MATNAM
LST,LFIN Integer array
The first and last number of the loop over the elements in the list
IZONE Integer array
Element user number
TXX, TYY, TZZ Real arrays
Element normal stress components
TXY, TXZ, TYZ Real arrays
Element shear stress components
DEPSXX, DEPSYY, DEPSZZ Real arrays
Element normal strain increments
DEPSXY, DEPSXZ, DEPSYZ Real arrays
Element shear strain increments
EPSXX, EPSYY, EPSZZ Real arrays
Element normal (last cycle) strain components
EPSXY, EPSXZ, EPSYZ Real arrays
Element shear (last cycle) strain components
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 805 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
TSTEP Real array
Element time step
FFAIL Real array
Element failure flag
FFAIL = 0 means element has failed.
FFAIL = 1 means element has not failed.
Remarks
1. The user subroutine exfail1.f must be included if there are any FAILEX1 entries in the input data.
2. The FAILEX1 entry can only be used in combination with orthotropic solid (Lagrangian) elements.
The material definition for these elements is done using DMATOR.
3. The access to the element’s elasticity matrix allows for inclusion of degradation of the material
on an element-by-element basis. Any changes made to the elasticity matrix components of an
element are stored in the element memory and are used during the next time step in the evaluation
of the new stress state. When the properties of the elasticity matrix depend on the strain, you
define the full constitutive model.
4. The strain components are the last time-step strains. To get the current strain, the increments
must be added. The increments are used to detect the direction of the loading (i.e., loading
or unloading).
5. Dytran does not store changes you make to the strain tensor.
6. The stress tensor is always represented in the material coordinate system, which is based on the
element topology for the materials that refer to the FAILEX1 entry.
7. Dytran stores the changes that you make to the stress tensor components. Note that this may result
in an inconsistent relation of stress state and strain field.
8. The user variables are used to store element data that is not standard part of Dytran storage. When
these variables are used by other user subroutines, this may cause definition conflicts. The content
of the user variables is stored at return from the EXFAIL1 user subroutine. Additional user
variables can be defined by using the parameter PARAM, VARACTIV.
9. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 806 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
In the example that follows, a failure model is defined that is based on maximum strain, depending on
the direction of the strain. The example includes material degradation prior to failure.
SUBROUTINE EXFAIL1
+(MATNAM,LENNAM,LST,LFIN,IZONE,
+ TXX,TYY,TZZ,TXY,TYZ,TXZ,
+ DEPSXX,DEPSYY,DEPSZZ,DEPSXY,DEPSYZ,DEPSXZ,
+ EPSXX ,EPSYY, EPSZZ ,EPSXY ,EPSXZ ,EPSYZ ,
+ EXX,EYY,EZZ,EXY,EYZ,EXZ,GXY,GYZ,GZX,
+ USRVR1,USRVR2,TSTEP,FFAIL)
*
#include "spdbl"
*
*Stress tensor
DIMENSION TXX(*),TYY(*),TYY(*)
DIMENSION TXY(*),TXZ(*),TYZ(*)
*
* Strain increments
DIMENSION DEPSXX(*),DEPSYY(*),DEPSZZ(*)
DIMENSION DEPSXY(*),DEPSXZ(*),DEPSYZ(*)
*
* Last time step total strain tensor
DIMENSION EPSXX(*),EPSYY(*),EPSZZ(*)
DIMENSION EPSXY(*),EPSXZ(*),EPSYZ(*)
*
* Elasticity matrix
DIMENSION EXX(*),EYY(*),EZZ(*)
DIMENSION EXY(*),EYZ(*),EXZ(*)
DIMENSION GXY(*),GYZ(*),GZX(*)
*
* Element user numbers
DIMENSION IZONE(*)
*
* Current time step and element failure flag
DIMENSION TSTEP(*),FFAIL(*)
*
* User variables
DIMENSION USRVR1(*),USRVR2(*)
*
*
#include "constants"
*
CHARACTER*80 MATNAM
CHARACTER*80 CFLRNM
LOGICAL LFIRST
*
* Set the failure name for groups
IF (MATNAM(1:LENNAM).EQ.’100’) THEN
CFLRNM = ‘COMPOSITE’
ENDIF
*
* Check the material name
IF (CFLRNM.EQ.’COMPOSITE’) THEN
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 807 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 808 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXFAIL2
Calling Sequence
CALL: EXFAIL2 (MATNAM,LENNAM,LST,LFIN,EPLAS,EFFSTS,PRES,
SIE,RHO,DAM,SOFTE,VOLPLS,DEPI,DLTH,SXX,SYY,SZZ,SXY,SYZ,SXZ,
SXXO,SYYO,SZZO,SXYO,SYZO,SXZO,SHEAR)
Input
MATNAM Character variable
Material number
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of MATNAM
LST,LFIN Integer array
First and last number of the loop over the elements in the list
EPLAS Real array
Plastic strain of an element
EFFSTS Real array
Effective stress of an element
PRES Real array
Pressure of an element
RHO Real array
Density of an element
DAM Real array
Damage of an element
DEPI Real array
Plastic strain increment of the current cycle
DLTH Time step
SXX-SXZ Deviatoric stress tensor of the current cycle after radial scale back
SXXO-SXZO Deviatoric stress tensor from the previous cycle
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 809 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
DAM Updated Damage
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be included if there are any FAILEX2 entries in the input.
2. EXFAIL2 is only supported by the multi-material Euler solver with strength.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
4. The damage variable is available in EXEOS1 and the EXYLD1 subroutine.
Example
This example illustrated how FAILJC can be implemented by means of EXFAIL2.
SUBROUTINE EXFAIL2
+ (MATNAM,LENNAM,LST,LFIN,EPLAS,EFFSTS,PRES,SIE,RHO,DAMT,
+ SOFTE,VOLPLS,DEPI,DLTH, SXX , SYY , SZZ , SXY , SYZ , SXZ ,
+ SXXO, SYYO, SZZO, SXYO, SYZO, SXZO,
+ SHEAR)
*
#include "spdbl"
SAVE IERM
DIMENSION EPLAS(*),EFFSTS(*),PRES(*),SIE(*),RHO(*)
DIMENSION DAMT(*),DEPI(*)
*
*
#include "params"
#include "ermsg"
*
CHARACTER*(*) MATNAM
*
CHARACTER*31 CSUBNM
CHARACTER*6 CSUB06
PARAMETER (CSUBNM='EXFAIL2')
PARAMETER (CSUB06 = 'INIT')
*
PARAMETER( NERM= 1 )
DIMENSION IERM(NERM)
DATA (IERM(I),I=1,NERM) /NERM*0/
*
D1 =
D2 =
D3 =
D4 =
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 810 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
D5 =
DEPREF=
TROOM =
TMELT =
CP =
EPCUTOF =
SMALL = 1e-20
*
ONE = 1.0d0
*
DO 400 NZ=LST,LFIN
TEMP = SIE(NZ)/CP
TEMP = MAX(TEMP,ZERO)
TEMP = MIN(TEMP,TMELT)
THL = (TEMP - TROOM)/(TMELT-TROOM)
EFPMIN = MIN(EPLAS(NZ),DEPI(NZ))
IF (EPLAS(NZ).LT.EPCUTOF) GOTO 400
IF(EFFSTS(NZ).GT.ZERO .AND. EFPMIN.GT.ZERO) THEN
SCPR = -PRES(NZ)/EFFSTS(NZ)
SCPR = MIN(SCPR,1.5D0)
EPDAM = (D1 +D2*EXP(D3*SCPR))
DEPDT = DEPI(NZ)/DLTH
DEPDT = DEPDT/DEPREF
EPDAM = EPDAM*(ONE+D4*LOG(DEPDT))
EPDAM = EPDAM*(ONE+D5*THL)
EPDAM = MAX(EPDAM,SMALL)
DAM(NZ) = DAM(NZ) + DEPI(NZ)/EPDAM
DAM(NZ) = MIN(DAM(NZ),ONE)
ENDIF
400 CONTINUE
9900 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 811 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXFLOW
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXFLOW (FLNAME, LENNAM, NELEM, PELEM, QELEM,
Input
FLNAME Character string
Name of the boundary
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of FLNAME
NELEM(*) Integer array
Element number
PELEM(*) Real array
Pressure in the element
QELEM(*) Real array
Artificial quadratic viscosity of element
UXELEM(*) Real array
x-velocity of element
UYELEM(*) Real array
y-velocity of element
UZELEM(*) Real array
z-velocity of element
RHOEL(*) Real array
Density of element
SIEEL(*) Real array
Specific internal energy of element
Output
PFACE(*) Real array
Pressure at boundary
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 812 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any FLOWEXentries in the input file.
2. The pressure and velocity at the boundary must be specified. If there is flow into the mesh, the
density and specific internal energy must also be defined.
3. This subroutine is called twice every time step for every Euler face referenced on the FLOWEX
entry. The first call is for the material transport calculation, the second is for the impulse
calculation.
4. This subroutine is vectorized. All the input data is stored in arrays, which must be dimensioned.
The start and end of the arrays are given by the variables LST and LFIN in the common block
/MSCD_LOCLOP/. Calculations must be done for all of the entries in the arrays between LST
and LFIN. See the following example.
5. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
This example simulates a non-reflecting boundary by defining the velocity and pressure at the boundary
to be the same as that in the element.
SUBROUTINE EXFLOW (FLNAME, LENNAM, NELEM, PELEM, QELEM,
+UXELEM, UYELEM, UZELEM, RHOEL, SIEEL,
+PFACE, UXFACE,UYFACE, UZFACE, RHOFAC,
+PFACE, SIEFAC)
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H, 0-Z)
DIMENSION NELEM(*), PELEM(*), QELEM(*), UXELEM(*),
+UYELEM(*), UZELEM(*), RHOEL(*), SIEEL(*)
DIMENSION PFACE(*), UXFACE(*), UYFACE(*), UZFACE(*),
+RHOFAC(*), SIEFAC(*)
CHARACTER*(*) FLNAME
COMMON /MSCD_LOCLOP/LST, LFIN
C
C Do the vector loop from the LST to LFIN
DO 100 I = LST, LFIN
PFACE (I) = PELEM (I)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 813 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 814 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXFLOW2
Calling Sequence
CALL: EXFLOW2 (FLNAME, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, NELEM,
Input
FLNAME Character string
Name of the boundary
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of FLNAME
NELEM(*) Integer array
Element number
PELEM(*) Real array
Pressure in the element
QELEM(*) Real array
Artificial quadratic viscosity of element
UXELEM(*) Real array
x-velocity of element
UYELEM(*) Real array
y-velocity of element
UZELEM(*) Real array
z-velocity of element
RHOEL(*) Real array
Density of element
SIEEL(*) Real array
Specific internal energy of element
SX(*) Real array
Face area x-component
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 815 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
PFACE(*) Real array
Pressure at boundary
UXFACE(*) Real array
x-velocity at boundary
UYFACE(*) Real array
y-velocity at boundary
UZFACE(*) Real array
z-velocity at boundary
RHOFAC(*) Real array
Density of inflowing material
SIEFAC(*) Real array
Specific internal energy of inflowing material
CMATNO Character array
Material name of material for in- or outflow at the faces in the list
IFLWTP Integer variable
Flow type switch: 0 in/outflow
1 outflow
2 inflow
Remarks
1. This subroutine is valid for multimaterial Euler only. For hydrodynamic single material, or single
material with strength, use EXFLOW.
2. This subroutine must be included if there are any FLOWEX entries in the input file and the Euler
processor used is the multimaterial Euler processor.
3. The pressure and velocity at the boundary must be specified. If there is flow into the mesh, the
density and specific internal energy must also be defined.
4. This subroutine is called twice every time step for every Euler face referenced on the
FLOWEXentry. The first call is for the material transport calculation, the second is for the
impulse calculation.
5. This subroutine is vectorized. All the input data is stored in arrays that must be dimensioned. The
start and end of the arrays are given by the variables LST and LFIN in the common block
/MSCD_LOCLOP/. Calculations must be done for all of the entries in the arrays between LST
and LFIN. See the following example.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 816 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
6. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
SUBROUTINE EXFLOW2
+ (FLNAME, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, IUSRZN,
+ PZON, QZON, UXZON, UYZON, UZZON, RHOZON, SIEZON,
+ PFAC, UXFAC, UYFAC, UZFAC, RHOFAC, SIEFAC,
+ SX, SY, SZ, CMATNO, IFLWTP )
*
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
DIMENSION PZON(*),QZON(*),UXZON(*),UYZON(*),UZZON(*),
+ RHOZON(*),SIEZON(*)
DIMENSION PFAC(*),UXFAC(*),UYFAC(*),UZFAC(*),RHOFAC(*),SIEFAC(*)
DIMENSION SX(*),SY(*),SZ(*)
DIMENSION IUSRZN(*)
*
CHARACTER*80 FLNAME
CHARACTER*8 CMATNO(*)
*
COMMON/MSCD_LOCLOP/LST,LFIN
*
CHARACTER*80 FLNAME
*
DATA SMALL /1.E-15/
DATA ZERO /0./
DATA ONE /1./
*
*
* mass flow
DATA DMASS /10./
*
DO 100 NF = LST,LFIN
*
FACX = ONE
FACY = ONE
FACZ = ONE
IF (ABS(SX(NF)).LE.SMALL) FACX = ZERO
IF (ABS(SY(NF)).LE.SMALL) FACY = ZERO
IF (ABS(SZ(NF)).LE.SMALL) FACZ = ZERO
*
* Material at Inflow
CMATNO (NF) = ’100’
*
* Density at Inflow
RHOFAC (NF) = 1000.
*
* Internal Energy at Inflow
SIEFAC (NF) = 2.E5
*
* Pressure on the face is the element pressure
PFAC (NF) = PZON(NF)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 817 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
*
* normal on the face points outward
* .... transport of material ....
*
UXFAC (NF) =
+ -FACX * DMDT / ( RHOFAC(NF) * SX(NF) )
UYFAC (NF) =
+ -FACY * DMDT / ( RHOFAC(NF) * SY(NF) )
UZFAC (NF) =
+ -FACZ * DMDT / ( RHOFAC(NF) * SZ(NF) )
*
100 CONTINUE
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 818 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXFUNC
User-defined Function
User Subroutines
Defines the functions to create time dependency in dynamic excitation.
Calling Sequence
CALL: EXFUNC (CFNAME, XVAL, YVAL, NMSTR)
Input
CFNAME Character variable. The name of the function defined on input.
XVAL (NMSTR) Real array. The x-value that the function requires (time).
NMSTR Number of values
Output
YVAL (NMSTR) Real array.The value to be returned by the function.
Note that the y-value is multiplied by the scale factor defined on the load entry.
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any TABLEEXentries in the input.
2. The subroutine is called every time step. The time is passed to the subroutine. The outcome (y-
value) is returned.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
4. There can be more than one function defined in the EXFUNC user routine; these functions can be
distinguished by their names.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 819 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
This subroutine defines six different functions that can be referred to from the input by a TABLEEX entry.
These functions can be used for a variety of dynamic loads.
SUBROUTINE EXFUNC
+(FNAME, XVAL, YVAL, NMSTR)
*
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
DIMENSION XVAL(*),YVAL(*)
*
CHARACTER*16 CFNAME
*
IF (CFNAME.EQ.’FUNC1’) THEN
YVAL = LOG (ABS (XVAL) )
ELSE IF (CFNAME. EQ.’FUNC2’) THEN
YVAL = SIN (XVAL*6.28)*COS (XVAL*3.14)
ELSE IF = (CFNAME.EQ.’FUNC3’) THEN
YVAL = XVAL*XVAL*XVAL+2*XVAL
ELSE IF (CFNAME.EQ.’FUNC4’) THEN
YVAL = XVAL
ELSE IF (CFNAME.EQ.’FUNC5’) THEN
YVAL = ABS (XVAL)
ELSE IF (CFNAME.EQ.’FUNC6’) THEN
YVAL = EXP (XVAL)*LOG10 (ABS (XVAL-1.) )
ELSE
CONTINUE
ENDIF
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 820 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXINIT
Calling Sequence
CALL: EXINIT (CNAME, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, NGPEL, NUMENT,
+ ISTART, IEND)
Input
CNAME Character variable
Name specified on the TICEEX or TICGEX entry
LENNAM Integer variable
Number of characters in CNAME
TIME Real variable
Time at the current time step
NCYCLE Integer variable
Number of the current time step
NGPEL(*) Integer array
Element or grid point user number
NUMENT Integer variable
Length of array and number of elements or grid points
defined on the TICEEXor TICGEX entry
ISTART, IEND Integer variables
Element loop counters
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any TICEEXor TICGEXentries.
2. This subroutine is used to initialize the variables of elements and/or grid points.
Example
This example shows how to initialize a gravitational field in water.
SUBROUTINE EXINIT
+(CNAME, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, NGPEL, NUMENT, LST, LFIN)
*
* single or double defined below
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
* declare argument as arrays and data-type here
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 821 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CHARACTER*(*) CNAME
*
* ---------------------------------------------------------
* cname = name of the exinit definition
* lennam = length of the character string
* time = current problem time
* ncycle = current time step number
* ngpel = gridpoint or element user number
* nument = array length
* lst = start of the element point loop
* lfin = end of the element point loop
* ---------------------------------------------------------
*
* parameter constants
*
* global commons
CHARACTER*16 CVAR
*
* local dimensions and declarations
DIMENSION NGPEL(*)
DIMENSION IPU(1),XPVAR(1)
DIMENSION IPN(1),NZU(1)
DIMENSION IZVAR(8)
DIMENSION NZONEU(NUMENT),XVAR(NUMENT)
*
DATA ACCG /9.81/
DATA YSURF /5.75/
DATA RHOREF /1000./
DATA BULK /2.2E9/
*
* check if we have the right initial condition entry
IF (CNAME(1:LENNAM) .NE. ’INEL1’) GOTO 9900
*
* loop over the elements
NZV = 0
DO 200 NZ = LST,LFIN
*
NZU(1) = NGPEL(NZ)
*
CVAR = ’NODE1’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(1) = IPN(1)
CVAR = ’NODE2’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(2) = IPN(1)
CVAR = ’NODE3’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(3) = IPN(1)
CVAR = ’NODE4’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(4) = IPN(1)
CVAR = ’NODE5’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(5) = IPN(1)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 822 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
CVAR = ’NODE6’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(6) = IPN(1)
CVAR = ’NODE7’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(7) = IPN(1)
CVAR = ’NODE8’
CALL RETRIEVE_ELEMENT_INT_VAR(1,NZU,IPN,CVAR)
IZVAR(8) = IPN(1)
* Find the eight nodes of the zone
YMID = 0.0
DO 100 IC = 1,8
IPI = IZVAR(IC)
* get user numbers
CALL PX_GET_USR_PNT_FROM_INT_PNT
+ ( IPU(1) , IPI )
* get ypos
CVAR = ’YPOS’
CALL RETRIEVE_GRIDPOINT_FLOAT_VAR(1,IPU,XPVAR,CVAR)
YMID = YMID + XPVAR(1)
100 CONTINUE
* Compute the z-coordinate of the center of the zone and
* compute the pressure for the distance under the water level
YMID = YMID/8.
DH = YSURF - YMID
PRES = RHOREF * ACCG * DH
* To this pressure belongs a density
RHO = RHOREF + PRES*RHOREF/BULK
* Only change the density in non_void zones
IUNUS = ISVOID(NZU(1))
IF(IUNUS.EQ.0) then
NZV = NZV+1
NZONEU(NZV) = NZU(1)
XVAR(NZV) = RHO
ENDIF
200 CONTINUE
*
CVAR=’DENSITY’
CALL STORE_ELEMENT_FLOAT_VAR(NZV,NZONEU,XVAR,CVAR)
*
9900 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 823 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXPBAG
Calling Sequence
Call:EXPBAG (NAME, LENNAM, TIME, VOLUME, PRES)
Input
NAME Character variable
Name of the gas bag
LENNAM Integer variable
Number of characters in NAME
TIME Real variable
Problem time
VOLUME Real variable
Volume inside the gas bag
Output
PRES Real variable
Pressure inside the gas bag
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any GBAGEX entries in the input file.
2. The subroutine is called every time step. The volume of the gas bag is calculated and passed to
the subroutine. The pressure in the gas bag is returned.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 824 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
This subroutine simulates an air bag with the pressure inside initially at 100 N/m2 and updated using the
equation P ∗ V = constant.
SUBROUTINE EXPBAG
+(PBNAME, LENNAM, TIME, VOLUME, PRES)
C
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H, O-Z)
C
SAVE IFIRST, CONST
CHARACTER *(*) PBNAME
DATA IFIRST /0/
C
IF (IFIRST.EQ.0) THEN
PRES = 1000.
CONST = PRES * VOLUME
IFIRST = 1
ELSE
PRES = CONST/VOLUME
ENDIF
C
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 825 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXPLD
Calling Sequence
CALLEXPLD (NAME, LENNAM, TIME, PRES, SIGN)
Input
NAME Character variable
Name of a set of pressures
LENNAM Integer variable
Number of characters in NAME
TIME Real variable
Problem time
SIGN Real variable
Unused
Output
PRES Real variable
The magnitude of the pressure
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any PLOADEX entries in the input file.
2. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
SUBROUTINE EXPLD (NAME, LENNAM, TIME, PRES, SIGN)
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRESCISION (A-H, O-Z)
CHARACTER *(*) NAME
C
PRES = 725. * SQRT (TIME)
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 826 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXPOR
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXPOR (CEXPOR,LENNAM,NMENTR,NMFACE,IEUL,IFACE,PRESS,DENSTY,
+ SIE,XVEL,YVEL,ZVEL,UX,UY,UZ,AREA,SX,SY,SZ,
+ QVISC,DLTH,VTRANS,DMASS,
+ FDENS,FSIE,XVELF,YVELF,ZVELF,COEEFV)
Input
CEXPOR Character array
Name of the porosity definition
Length: NMENTR
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of the CEXPOR name variable
NMENTR Integer variable
Number of segments in the current batch
NMFACE Integer variable
Number of face segments
IEUL Integer array
User Euler element number connected to the segment
Length: NMENTR
IFACE Integer array
Internal face number connected to the segment
Length: NMENTR
PRESS, DENSTY, SIE Real arrays
Pressure, density and specific internal energy in the element connected
to the segment
Length: NMENTR
XVEL, YVEL, ZVEL Real arrays
X-, Y- and Z-velocity components in the element connected to
the segment
Length: NMENTR
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 827 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
VTRANS, DMASS Real arrays
Transported volume and transported mass through the segment
Length: NMENTR
FPRESS, FSIE Real arrays
Pressure and specific internal energy at the segment face
Length: NMENTR
XVELF, YVELF, ZVELF Real arrays
Velocity components at the segment face
Length: NMENTR
COEFFV Real array
Porosity coefficient of the segment
Length: NMENTR
Remarks
1. The expor.f user subroutine must be included if there are any POREX entries in the input data.
2. The POREX entry can only be used in combination with a coupling and porosity definition
(COUPLE and COUPOR).
3. User-defined porosity can only be used with the single mat hydrodynamic Euler solver, the Roe
solver, and the multi-material Euler solver. For use with the multi-material solver, the EXPOR2
user subroutine has to be included.
4. The user-defined subroutine must be compiled with a Fortran 90 compiler for compatibility.
There is no guarantee that a Fortran 77-compiled object will link properly with the Fortran 90
compiled library objects provided on the Dytran distribution.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 828 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
5. The porosity is computed according to the user-defined model. The output must consist of the
volume and mass flow through the segment faces, the pressure, specific internal energy and the
velocity components at the face. The porosity coefficient is also required output as it is used in
the impulse computation.
6. The volume and mass flow are defined to be positive for outflow and negative for inflow. They
should be consistently defined. In case of elements containing (partial) voids, the void fraction is
taken into account automatically by Dytran.
7. The area coefficient COEFFV represents the open fraction of the surface area. The coefficient
must be in the range [0.0, 1.0], where a value of 1.0 means entirely open to flow and 0.0 means
entirely closed to flow. The coefficient is subsequently used for the impulse calculation on
the surface.
8. The segment face values for the velocity components, the pressure and the specific internal energy
are by default set to the centroidal values of the Euler element the segment is connected to.
9. The volume and mass flow and the porosity factor are to zero by default.
10. The precision of the computations should be appropriate for the computer being used. You can
use the include file “spdbl” to automatically define the proper accuracy.
11. The EXPOR user subroutine is part of a “vectorized” computation process and may be called
several times within a time step.
Example
In the example that follows, the subroutine contains two different porosity models called PERM and
FLOW, respectively.
The PERM porosity model is analogous to the Dytran PERMEAB implementation. It represents a porous
surface where the flow is the porosity factor times the pressure difference.
The FLOW porosity model mimics the Dytran standard PORFLOW implementation with pressure-
dependent porosity.
SUBROUTINE EXPOR
+( CEXPOR,LENNAM,NMENTR,NMFACE,IEUL,
+IFACE,PRESS,DENSTY,SIE,
+ XVEL,YVEL,ZVEL,UX,UY,UZ,AREA,SX,SY,SZ,
+ QVISC,DLTH,VTRANS,DMASS,
+ FDENS,FSIE,XVELF,YVELF,ZVELF,COEEFV )
*
#include "spdl"
*
* input arguments
CHARACTER*(*) CEXPOR(*)
DIMENSION IEUL (*),IFACE (*)
DIMENSION PRESS (*),DENSTY(*),SIE (*)
DIMENSION XVEL (*),YVEL (*),ZVEL (*)
DIMENSION UX (*),UY (*),UZ (*
DIMENSION AREA (*)
DIMENSION SX (*),SY (*),SZ (*)
DIMENSION QVISC (*)
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 829 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
*
*output arguments
DIMENSION VTRANS(*),DMASS (*)
DIMENSION FPRESS(*),FSIE (*)
DIMENSION XVELF (*),YVELF (*),ZVELF (*)
DIMENSION COEFFV(*)
*
#include "constants"
*
*loop over all segments
DO 100 NSEG = 1,NMENTR
*
IF (CEXPOR(NSEG)(1:LENNAM).EQ.’FLOW’) GOTO 1000
IF (CEXPOR(NSEG)(1:LENNAM).NE.’PERM’) GOTO 100
*
*PERMEAB porosity model
POUT = 1.0E5
RHOOUT = 1.2
SIEOUT = 2.1E5
GAMCRT = 1.4
*
* permeability coefficient
VALP = 0.005
*
* area coefficient for transport
COEFF = 0.5
*
* porous area
AREAN = COEFF*AREA(NSEG)
*
* area coefficient for impulse computation
* assume the area to be closed)
OEFFV(NSEG) = 0.0
*
*in- or outflow depends on the pressure diff
IF (PRESS(NSEG).GT.POUT) THEN
RHO = DENSTY(NSEG)
XINOUT = 1.0
PRSDIF = PRESS(NSEG)-POUT
SIECRT = SIE(NSEG)
ELSE
RHO = RHOOUT
XINOUT = -1.0
PRSDIF = POUT-PRESS(NSEG)
SIECRT = SIEOUT
ENDIF
*
* limit the velocity to sonic flow
SQPMB = GAMCRT*(GAMCRT-1.0)*SIECRT
VALCRT = SQRT(SQPMB)
VALUEP = VALP*PRSDIF
VALPMB = MIN(VALCRT,VALUEP)
*
* mass-flow rate and transported volume
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 830 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 831 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
*
* determine flow depending on the pressure
CHK = 0.0
IF (PRES.NE.0.0) THEN
CHK = 2.0*PRES*RHO*GAMMA/GAMM1*
+ ((PEXH/PRES)**(2.0/GAMMA) -
+ (PEXH/PRES)**(GAMP1/GAMMA))
ENDIF
*
* mass-flow rate
FLWOUT = 0.0
IF (CHK.GT.0.0) THEN
FLWOUT = XINOUT*AREAN*SQRT(CHK)
ENDIF
*
* volume and mass
VTRANS(NSEG) = DLTH*FLWOUT/RHO
DMASS (NSEG) = RHO*VTRANS(NSEG)
*
* store face pressure
FPRESS(NSEG) = PFACE
100 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 832 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXPOR2
Calling Sequence
CALL EXPOR2 (CEXPOR,LENNAM,TIME,
+ NMENTR,IEUL,IFACE,
+ PELEM,QELEM,UXELEM,UYELEM,UZELEM,
+ RHOEL,SIEEL,UXSEG,UYSEG,UZSEG,
+ PFACE,UXFACE,UYFACE,UZFACE,RHOFAC,
+ SIEFAC,AREA,SX,SY,SZ,
+ COEFFV,CMATNO)
Input
CEXPOR Character array
Name of the porosity definition
Length: NMENTR
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of the CEXPOR name variable
NMENTR Integer variable
Number of segments in the current batch
IEUL Integer array
User Euler element number connected to the segment
Length: NMENTR
IFACE Integer array
Internal face number connected to the segment
Length: NMENTR
PELEM,RHOEL,SIEEL Real arrays
Pressure, density and specific internal energy in the element
connected to the segment
Length: NMENTR
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 833 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
CMATNO Character array
Name of material for inflow through the segment face. Outflow of
material occurs on basis of the material fractions present in the
adjacent Euler element. For outflow, CMATNO is ignored.
Length: NMENTR
PFACE,RHOFAC,SIEFAC Real arrays
Pressure, density and specific internal energy at the segment face.
These are the boundary conditions that will be imposed on the
Euler element.
Length: NMENTR
XFACE, YFACE, ZFACE Real arrays
Velocity components at the segment face. These are the
boundary conditions.
Length: NMENTR
COEFFV Real array
Porosity coefficient of the segment
Length: NMENTR
Remarks
1. The EXPOR2 user subroutine must be included if a POREX entry is used in combination with the
multi-material solver.
2. The POREX entry can only be used in combination with a coupling and porosity definition
(COUPLE and COUPOR).
3. The user-defined porosity can only be used with the single mat hydrodynamic Euler solver, the
Roe solver and the multi-material Euler solver.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 834 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
4. The user-defined subroutine must be compiled with a Fortran 90 compiler for compatibility.
There is no guarantee that a Fortran 77-compiled object will link properly with the Fortran 90
compiled library objects provided on the Dytran distribution.
5. The user subroutine loops over surface segments. Each segment is connected to only one Euler
element and only one surface element. The arrays IEUL and IFACE can be used to refer to these
elements or faces as a function of the segment number. Note that each Euler element and each
face can refer to multiple face segments.
6. The porosity is computed according to the user-defined model. The output must consist of the the
pressure, specific internal energy and the velocity components at the face.
7. The area coefficient COEFFV represents the open fraction of the surface area. The coefficient
must be in the range [0.0, 1.0], where a value of 1.0 means entirely open to flow and 0.0 means
entirely closed to flow. The coefficient is subsequently used for the impulse calculation on the
surface.
8. The segment face values for the velocity components, the pressure and the specific internal energy
are by default set to the centroidal values of the Euler element the segment is connected to.
9. The precision of the computations should be appropriate for the computer being used. You can
use the include file, spdbl, to automatically define the proper accuracy.
10. The EXPOR2 user subroutine is part of a “vectorized” computation process and may be called
several times within a time step.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 835 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
In the example that follows, the subroutine contains a simple inflow boundary.
SUBROUTINE EXPOR2
+ (CEXPOR,LENNAM,TIME,
+ NMENTR,IEUL,IFACE,
+ PELEM,QELEM,UXELEM,UYELEM,UZELEM,
+ RHOEL,SIEEL,UXSEG,UYSEG,UZSEG,
+ PFACE,UXFACE,UYFACE,UZFACE,RHOFAC,
+ SIEFAC,AREA,SX ,SY,SZ,
+ COEFFV,CMATNO)
*
#include "spdbl"
*
* input arguments
CHARACTER*(LENNAM) CEXPOR(*)
DIMENSION IEUL(*),IFACE(*)
DIMENSION PELEM(*),QELEM(*),UXELEM(*),UYELEM(*),
+ UZELEM(*), RHOEL(*),SIEEL(*)
DIMENSION AREA(*),SX(*),SY(*),SZ(*)
*
* output arguments
DIMENSION PFACE(*),UXFACE(*),UYFACE(*),UZFACE(*),RHOFAC(*),
+ SIEFAC(*)
DIMENSION COEFFV(*)
CHARACTER*8 CMATNO(*)
*
#include "constants"
*
DO 100 NSEG=1,NMENTR
IF (CEXPOR(NSEG) (1:LENNAM).EQ.'INFLOW') THEN
UXFACE(NSEG) = 0D0
UYFACE(NSEG) = 200D0
UZFACE(NSEG) = 0D0
RHOFAC(NSEG) = 1100D0
SIEFAC(NSEG) = 0D0
COEFFV(NSEG) = 1.0D0
*
CMATNO(NSEG) = '4'
ENDIF
*
100 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 836 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXSHR
Calling Sequence
CALL EXSHR (MATNAM, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, DLTH,
+ EXX, EYY, EZZ, EXY, EYZ, EZX,
+ PRES, EDIS, SIE, RHO, FBURN, ZMASS,
+ SHEAR, ISTART, IEND)
Input
MATNAM Character string
Name of the material
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of MATNAM
TIME Real variable
Time at the current time step
NCYCLE Integer variable
Cycle number of the current time step
DLTH Real variable
Time step increment at the current time step
EXX,..,EZX(*) Real arrays
Strain components in element
PRES(*) Real array
Pressure in the element
EDIS(*) Real array
Distortional energy of the element
SIE(*) Real array
Specific internal energy of the element
RHO(*) Real array
Density of the element
FBURN(*) Real array
Burn fraction of the element
ZMASS(*) Real array
Mass of the element
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 837 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
SHEAR (*) Real array
Shear modulus of the element
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be included if there are any SHREX entries in the input.
2. The FBURN array is only used for Eulerian material with strength.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
In this example, the shear modulus will be computed as a function of the shear strain. The routine returns
the shear modulus SHEAR to the code.
SUBROUTINE EXSHR
+ (MATNAM, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, DLTH,
+ EXX, EYY, EZZ, EXY, EYZ, EZX,
+ PRES, EDIS, SIE, RHO, FBURN, ZMASS,
+SHEAR, ISTART, IEND)
*
INCLUDE DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
DIMENSION SHEAR(*)
DIMENSION EDIS(*),ZMASS(*),SIE(*),RHO(*),FBURN(*),PRES(*)
IMENSION EXX(*),EYY(*),EZZ(*),EXY(*),EYZ(*),EZX(*)
*
CHARACTER*80 MATNAM
*
*
* Example of shear modulus as a function of shear strain.
*
DO 100 NZ = ISTART, IEND
*
* define the shear modulus
GAMXY = 1.0 + EXY
GAMYZ = 1.0 + EYZ
GAMZX = 1.0 + EZX
GAMMA = GAMXY*GAMYZ*GAMZX – 1.0
SHEAR(NZ) = 3.E7 – 1.E10*GAMMA
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 838 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
100 CONTINUE
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 839 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXSPR
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXSPR (N, M, IX, IC, PROP, HISV, FORCEO, C, DI,
Input
N Integer variable
Element number
M Integer variable
Property number
IX(2) Integer array
Connectivity
IX(1) = grid point at end 1.
IX(2) = grid point at end 2.
IC(2) Integer array
Unused
PROP(7) Real array
Properties as input on the PSPREX entry
HISV(6) Real array
History variables for the element. This array can be used by the
user to store variables from one time step to the next.
FORCEO Real variable
Force in the element at the previous time step
C(3,2) Real array
Deformed coordinates in the basic coordinate system
C(1:3,1) = x-, y-, z-coordinates at end 1.
C(1:3,2) = x-, y-, z-coordinates at end 2.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 840 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
FORCE Real variable
Force in the element
STIFF Real variable
Current stiffness of the element
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if the PSPREX entry is specified in the Bulk Data Section.
2. The velocities (V) and accelerations (A) of the end points can be updated by the user subroutine
when required.
3. The stiffness is used by Dytran to estimate the time step. A nonzero value must be returned.
4. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 841 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
This example defines the stiffness and the corresponding force for a spring element.
SUBROUTINE EXSPR
+ (N,M,IX,IC,PROP,HISV,FORCEO,C,DI,V,UREL,DUREL,
+ VREL,XMASS,FORCE,STIFF)
*
single or double defined below
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
* declare argument as arrays and data-type here....
DIMENSION IX(2),IC(2),PROP(7),HISV(6),C(3,2),
+ DI(6,2),V(6,2),XMASS(2)
*
* define the stiffness and the corresponding force
RMASS = 1./(XMASS(1) + XMASS(2))
STIFF = RMASS * (XMASS(1)*1.E3 + XMASS(2)*2.E3)
FORCE = STIFF * DUREL
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 842 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXTLU
Calling Sequence
CALL : EXTLU (LUUSR, LUMAX)
Input
LUMAX Integer
Maximum LU number allowed
Output
LUUSR Integer array
To store declared LU number
Remarks
1. LUMAX is set by Dytran. This value can be used to check whether the user-defined LU number
does not exceed the maximum allowable LU number. LUMAX should not be changed in the
user subroutine.
2. Declared Fortran LU numbers are reserved within Dytran and are used for files you need in other
user subroutines.
3. It is advised to define a common block in the EXTLU subroutine where the user-defined LU
numbers are kept. This common block can be included in any other user subroutine that utilizes
external user-defined files. For example:
COMMON /MSCD_MYLU/ LU01, LU02, LU03, LU04, LU05
Example
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 843 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
*
LU01 = 80
LU05 = 81
LUUSR(LU01) = LU01
LUUSR(LU05) = LU05
*
* The above statements reserve LU01 and LU05 as user exclusive LU’s
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 844 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXTVEL
Calling Sequence
CALL: EXTVEL (NAME, LENNAM, NGP, XPOS, YPOS, ZPOS,
Input
NAME Character string
Velocity boundary name
LENNAM Integer variable
Number of characters in NAME
NGP Integer variable
Grid point number
XPOS Real variable
Old x-coordinate of point
YPOS Real variable
Old y-coordinate of point
ZPOS Real variable
Old z-coordinate of point
XVEL Real variable
Tentative x-translational velocity of the point
YVEL Real variable
Tentative y-translational velocity of the point
ZVEL Real variable
Tentative z-translational velocity of the point
XAVEL Real variable
Tentative x-angular velocity of the point
YAVEL Real variable
Tentative y-angular velocity of the point
ZAVEL Real variable
Tentative z-angular velocity of the point
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 845 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
XVEL Real variable
Constrained x-translational velocity of the point
YVEL Real variable
Constrained y-translational velocity of the point
ZVEL Real variable
Constrained z-translational velocity of the point
XAVEL Real variable
Constrained x-angular velocity of the point
YAVEL Real variable
Constrained y-angular velocity of the point
ZAVEL Real variable
Constrained z-angular velocity of the point
PMASS Real variable
Grid point mass
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any FORCEEX entries in the input file.
2. The subroutine returns the constrained velocities of each grid point.
3. EXTVEL is called once for every grid point referenced on FORCEEX entries.
4. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
This example constrains the x-velocity of grid points with an x coordinate that is positive.
SUBROUTINE EXTVEL
+ (NAME, LENNAM, NGP, XPOS, YPOS, ZPOS, XVEL, YVEL, ZVEL, XAVEL,
+ YAVEL, ZAVEL)
*
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H, O-Z)
CHARACTER*(*) NAME
*
* This routine puts the x-velocity to zero when the x-position
of the point is positive.
*
IF (XPOS.GT.0) XVEL = 0.
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 846 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXVISC
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXVISC (N, M, IX, IC, PROP, HISV, FORCEO, C, DI,
Input
N Integer variable
Element number
M Integer variable
Property number
IX(2) Integer array
Connectivity
IX(1) = grid point at end 1.
IX(2) = grid point at end 2.
IC(2) Integer array
Unused
PROP(7) Real array.
Properties as input on the PVISCEX entry
HISV(6) Real array
History variables for the element. This array can be used by the
user to store variables from one time step to the next.
FORCEO Real variable
Force in the element at the previous time step
C(3,2) Real array
Deformed coordinates in the basic coordinate system
C(1:3,1) x, y, z, coordinates at end 1
C(1:3,2) x, y, z, coordinates at end 2
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 847 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
FORCE Real variable
Force in the element
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if the PVISCEX entry is specified in the Bulk Data Section.
2. The velocities (V) and accelerations (A) of the end points can be updated using the user subroutine
if required.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 848 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Example
This example defines the damping force for a danger element.
SUBROUTINE EXVISC
+(N,M,IX,IC,PROP,HISV,FORCEO,C,DI,V,UREL,DUREL,
+ VREL,XMASS,FORCE)
*
* single or double defined below
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
*
* declare argument as arrays and data-type here....
DIMENSION IX(2),IC(2),PROP(7),HISV(6),C(3,2),
+ DI(6,2),V(6,2),XMASS(2)
*
* define the force on the damper element
VELX = V(1,1) - V(1,2)
VELY = V(2,1) - V(2,2)
VELZ = V(3,1) - V(3,2)
*
FORCE = 1.E-3 * SQRT(VELX*VELX + VELY*VELY + VELZ*VELZ)
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 849 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXYLD
Calling Sequence:
CALL EXYLD (MATNAM, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, DLTH, IZONE,
Input
MATNAM Character string
Name of the material
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of MATNAM
TIME Real variable
Time at the current time step
NCYCLE Integer variable
Cycle number of the current time step
DLTH Real variable
Time step increment at the current time step
IZONE(*) Integer array
Element number
PRES(*) Real array
Pressure in the element
EDIS(*) Real array
Distortional energy of the element
SIE(*) Real array
Specific internal energy of the element
RHO(*) Real array
Density of the element
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 850 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
YLDSQ(*) Real array
Yield stress of the element
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be included if there are any YLDEX entries in the input.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 851 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
2. The FBURN array is only used for Eulerian material with strength. The IZONE array and the
USRVR1-2 arrays can only be used for Lagrangian material.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
In this example, the yield stress is computed as a function of the effective strain rate and the pressure.
The routine returns the yield stress YLDSQ to the code. The USRVR1 and USRVR2 arrays are used to
store the yield stress and the effective strain rate in memory so that they can be requested as output.
SUBROUTINE EXYLD
+ (MATNAM, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, DLTH, IZONE, PRES, EDIS, SIE,
+ RHO, FBURN, EFFPLS, ZMASS, EFFSTS, TWOJ2, EFFSR, USRVR1,
+ USRVR2, RELV, SXXO, SYYO, SZZO, SXYO, SYZO, SXZO, SXXT,
+ SYYT, SZZT, SXYT, SYZT, SXZT, DEXX, DEYY, DEZZ, DEXY,
+ DEYZ, DEZX, TDET, YLDSQ, ISTART, IEND)
C
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H, O-Z)
C
DIMENSION IZONE(*)
DIMENSION YLDSQ(*)
DIMENSION EDIS(*),ZMASS(*),EFFSTS(*),TDET(*)
DIMENSION SIE(*),RHO(*),FBURN(*),EFFPLS(*),EFFSR(*)
DIMENSION TWOJ2(*),PRES(*),RELV(*)
DIMENSION USRVR1(*), USRVR2(*)
DIMENSION SXXO(*),SYYO(*),SZZO(*),SXYO(*),SYZO(*),SXZO(*)
DIMENSION SXXT(*),SYYT(*),SZZT(*),SXYT(*),SYZT(*),SXZT(*)
DIMENSION DEXX(*),DEYY(*),DEZZ(*),DEXY(*),DEYZ(*),DEZX(*)
C
CHARACTER*80 MATNAM
C
C
C Example of yield stress as a function of
C effective strain rate and pressure.
C
DO 100 NZ = ISTART, IEND
C
C define the yield stress.
YLDSQ(NZ) = EFFSR(NZ)*SQRT(ABS(PRES(NZ)))
C
C store the yield stress and effective strain
C rate in the user vars, so that they can be
C requested as output.
USRVR1(NZ) = YLDSQ(NZ)
USRVR2(NZ) = EFFSR(NZ)
100 CONTINUE
*
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 852 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EXYLD1
Calling Sequence
CALL:EXYLD1 (MATNAM, LENNAM, TIME, NCYCLE, DLTH, IZONE,
+PRES, EDIS, SIE, RHO, FBURN, EFFPLS, ZMASS,
+EFFSTS, TWOJ2, EFFSR, USRVR1, USRVR2, RELV, SXXO,
+SYYO, SZZO, SXYO, SYZO, SXZO, SXXT, SYYT, SZZT,
+SXYT, SYZT, SXZT, DEXX, DEYY, DEZZ, DEXY, DEYZ,
+DEZX, TDET, YLDSQ, DAM, SOFTE,VOLPLS,ISTART, IEND)
Input
MATNAM Character string
Name of the material
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of MATNAM
TIME Real variable
Time at the current time step
NCYCLE Integer variable
Cycle number of the current time step
DLTH Real variable
Time step increment at the current time step
IZONE(*) Integer array
Element number
PRES(*) Real array
Pressure in the element
EDIS(*) Real array
Distortional energy of the element
SIE(*) Real array
Specific internal energy of the element
RHO(*) Real array
Density of the element
FBURN(*) Real array
Burn fraction of the element
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 853 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Damage
SOFTE(*), VLPL(*) Arrays that allow the user to store an additional
variable. Contents are transported and clumped. This
array can also be accessed within EXFAIL2.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 854 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Output
YLDSQ(*) Real array
Yield stress of the element
Remarks
1. The subroutine must be included if there are any YLDEX entries in the input.
2. The FBURN array is only used for Eulerian material with strength. The IZONE array and the
USRVR1-2 arrays can only be used for Lagrangian material.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
Example
In this example, the yield stress will be given by the Johnson-Cook yield model. The yield stress will be
reduced using the damage variable. This reduction is equivalent to continuous failure.
SUBROUTINE EXYLD1
+ (MATNAM,LENNAM,TIME,NCYCLE,DLTH,
+ IZONE,PRES,EDIS,
+ SIE,RHO,FBURN,EFFPLS,ZMASS,EFFSTS,TWOJ2,
+ EFFSR,USRVR1,USRVR2,RELV,
+ SXXO,SYYO,SZZO,SXYO,SYZO,SXZO,
+ SXXT,SYYT,SZZT,SXYT,SYZT,SXZT,
+ DEXX,DEYY,DEZZ,DEXY,DEYZ,DEZX,
+ TDET,YLDSQ,DAM,SOFTE,VOLPLS,ISTART,IEND)
$cmsc/dytran ompstk
*
#include "spdbl"
*
*---------------------------------------------------------
* input:
* matnam - name on exyld entry
* lennam - length of name
* time - time
* ncycle - cycle
* dlth - time step
* izone - (lagrange) element number
* pres - old element pressure
* edis - old element distortional energy
* sie - old element specific internal energy
* rho - element density
* fburn - (euler) burn fraction of element
* effpls - element effective plastic strain
* zmass - mass of element
* effsts - element old effective stress
* twoj2 - tentative second invariant element
* effsr - effective strain rate element
* usrvr1 - user variable element
* usrvr2 - user variable element
* relv - relative element volume
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 855 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 856 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
EFSTN0 =
*
DO 50 NZ=ISTART,IEND
TEMP = SIE(NZ)/SPHEAT
TEMP = (TEMP-TROOM)/(TMELT-TROOM)
TEMP =MAX(SMALL,TEMP)
TEMP =MIN(ONE,TEMP)
EFFSTN = SQRT(3./2.*TWOJ2(NZ))/(3.*SHEAR*DLTH)
EFFSTN = EFFSTN/EFSTN0
EFFSTN =MAX(ONE,EFFSTN)
EFFPLS(NZ) = MAX(ZERO,EFFPLS(NZ))
TMP1 = YLDA+YLDB*EFFPLS(NZ)**YLDN
TMP2 = ONE+YLDC*LOG(EFFSTN)
TMP3 = ONE-TEMP**YLDM
YLDSQ(NZ) = TMP1*TMP2*TMP3
YLDSQ(NZ) = (ONE-DAM(NZ))*YLDSQ(NZ)
50 CONTINUE
*
*
#include "call_byebye"
RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 857 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
GEXOUT
Calling Sequence
CALL:GEXOUT (NAME, LENNAM, NGP, CGP, NGTYPE, LIGRD, LXGRD)
Input
NAME Character string
Output name specified on the GPEXOUT entry.
LENNAM Integer variable
Length of NAME
NGP(*) Integer array
Grid-point number
CGP(*) Character *8 array
Unused
NGTYPE Integer variable
Type of element to which the grid point is attached:
2 One-dimensional element
3 Triangular shell
4 Quadrilateral shell
5 Triangular membrane
6 Dummy triangle
7 Dummy quadrilateral
8 Lagrangian solid
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 858 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Remarks
1. This subroutine must be included if there are any GPEXOUT Case Control commands.
2. The subroutine can be used to calculate results based on the data available in Dytran.
3. The precision of the calculations should be appropriate for the computer being used. See the
Dytran Installation and Operations Guide.
4. This subroutine is vectorized. All the input data is stored in arrays, which must be dimensioned.
The start and end of the arrays is given by the variables LST and LFIN in the common block
/MSCD_LOCLOP/. All of the entries in the arrays between LST and LFIN must be output. See
the following example.
5. Access to grid-point variables is possible by including calls to the subroutines listed in User
Subroutines using the variable names from Outputting Results.
Example
This example outputs the total force on a grid point to the primary output (unit 6).
SUBROUTINE GEXOUT
+ (NAME, LENNAM, NGP, CGP, NGTYPE, LIGRD, LXGRD)
*
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H, O-Z)
*
DIMENSION NGP (*), LIGRD(*), LXGRD(*)
CHARACTER *(*) NAME
CHARACTER*8 CGP(*)
*
COMMON/MSCD_LOCLOP/LST, LFIN
COMMON/MSCD_XLGMEM/XLGDAT(1)
*
IF (NGTYPE.NE.8) GOTO 9900
*
* The total force on each Lagrangian node is printed out.
*
DO 100 NG = LST, LFIN
FTOT = XLGDAT(LXGRD(NG) +7)**2+
+ XLGDAT(LXGRD(NG)+8)**2+
+ XLGDAT(LXGRD(NG)+9)**2
FTOT = SQRT (FTOT)
WRITE (6, 101) NGP (NG), FTOT
101 FORMAT (1X, ’Force on node’, I5, ‘is‘, E13.5)
100 CONTINUE
*
9900 RETURN
END
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 859 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
8 Diagnostic Messages
J
Overview 860
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 860 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Overview
Whenever Dytran encounters invalid or inconsistent data in the input file or a problem is encountered
during the analysis, a diagnostic message is printed.
Diagnostic messages produced during the initialization and solution are written to the
<jobname>_ERROR_SUMMARY-MSG file. These messages normally indicate incorrect or inconsistent
data and problems encountered during the solution.
Each diagnostic message is produced a maximum of five times to prevent large quantities of output from
being produced.
The diagnostic message is a set of short codes that indicate the severity of the message, its number, and
the subroutine that generated it. One or more lines of text follows, indicating what the problem is.
The coded line has the basic form:
%x-<diagnostic number>-<subroutine name>
Information messages do not indicate a problem, and the analysis should continue successfully.
Warnings are not fatal, and the analysis will continue. However, warnings are an indication that
something about analysis is not normal. You should review all warnings carefully and make sure you
know what is causing the message.
%W-P3007905-P3XXTXX_CYCLE_ZERO
Authorization files will expire this month
Error messages indicate that there is almost certainly something wrong with your analysis. You should
review your input and modify it appropriately. Errors in the solution cause termination at the end of the
current time step. If you specified output at the end of the analysis, then the output is produced before the
analysis terminates.
%E-CN000602-SYS_CHECK_RST_INPUT_FILE
Restart input file must have extension .RST
Fatal messages have the same effect as error messages but indicate a more serious problem.
%F-2039502-P2XXTXIX_PACKET_EDIT
Materials cannot be put on archive files, only on time history files.
Catastrophic errors are issued only when the program would otherwise crash. They may occur, for
example, when the analysis would result in a division by zero.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 861 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
%C-P2057301-C2_STORE_IZONER_FOR_CFACE
Face number -4 is illegal
The severity code letter is followed by the unique diagnostic number. There is a unique number for each
diagnostic message and it can be used to reference the message. The subroutine name indicates which
routine produced the diagnostic message. Note that the routine names in Dytran consist of up to 31
characters.
Internal program errors have the message (PROGRAM ERROR) at the end of the first line of the diagnostic
message, e.g.,
%E-CN000502-SYS_CHECK_RST_INPUT_FILE (PROGRAM ERROR)
RESTART INPUT FILE HAS WRONG EXTENSION
You should never get program errors. If you do, check if there are other diagnostic messages indicating
other problems. If not, please note the diagnostic number and contact your local MSC representative.
Redefinition of severity and number of prints of diagnostic messages can be performed by using
PARM,ERRUSR. This parameter has to be used carefully.
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 862 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 863 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Appendix A References
Dyran Reference Manual
A References
Main Index
dy_ref.book Page 864 Tuesday, June 10, 2008 11:06 AM
Main Index